Nokia RM-230 User Manual
RM-2 30 User Guide 92553 38 Iss ue 1 9-F eb- 07
DECLA RAT ION OF CO NFORM ITY Hereby, NOKIA CORPORATION declares that this RM-230 produ ct is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. A copy of the Declaration of Conformity can be found at http://www.n ok ia.c o m/phones/declaration_ o f_conformity/ é 200 7 No kia. A ll r ights reser ved. Nokia, Nokia Connecting People, Nok ia Care, Navi, and Visual Radio are trademark s or regist ered trademarks of Nokia Corporation. Nokia tune and Visual Radio are sound marks of Nokia Corporation. Other product and company names mentioned herein may be trademarks or tradenames of their respe ctive own ers. Reproduction, transfer, distribution, or storage of part or all of the contents in this document in any form without the prior written permission of Nokia is prohibited. This product includes software licensed from Symbian Software Ltd é 1998-2007. Symbian and Symbian OS are trademarks of Symbian Ltd. US Patent No 58 1 8437 and oth er pen ding patents. T9 text input software C opyright (C) 1997 -2 007. Tegic Communications, Inc. All rights rese rved. Java⢠and all Java-based marks are trademark s or regist ered t r ademarks of Sun Microsy st ems, Inc. This product is licensed under the MPEG-4 Visual Patent Portfolio License (i) for personal and noncommercial use in connection with information which has been encoded in compliance with the MPEG-4 Visual St andard by a c on sumer engaged in a personal and n oncommercial activity and (ii) for use in connection with MPEG-4 video provided by a licensed video provider. No license is granted or shall be implied for any other use. Additional information, including that rela ted to promotional, internal, and commercial uses, may be obtained from MPE G LA, LLC. See <http:// www.mpegla.com>. Nokia operates a policy of ongoing development. Nokia reserves the right to m a ke changes and improvements to any of the products described in this document without prior notice. TO THE M A XIMUM E XTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICA BLE LAW, UNDER NO CIRCUMSTAN CES SHALL NOKIA OR ANY OF ITS LICENSORS BE RESPO N SIBLE FOR ANY LOSS OF D A TA OR INCOME OR ANY SPECIAL, IN CID ENT A L, C ON S EQU EN TIA L O R I ND IRE CT D AMA G ES H OW SO EVE R CAU SE D. T H E C O N T E N T S O F T H I S DO C U M EN T A R E P R O V I D E D " A S I S " . E X C EP T A S R E Q U I R E D B Y A P P L I C A B L E L A W , NO WARRANTI E S OF ANY KIND, EI THER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCL U DING, BUT NOT LI MITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE MADE IN RELATI O N TO THE A CCURACY , RELIABILITY OR CONTE N TS OF THI S DOC UM ENT. NOKIA R ESERVES THE RIGHT TO RE VISE THIS DOCUMENT O R WITHDR AW IT AT ANY TIME W ITHOU T PRIOR NOTICE. The availability of particular products and applications for these products may vary by region. Please check with your Nokia dealer for details, and availability of language options. 0434
This device complies with Directive 2002 /9 5/EC on the restriction of the use of cert a in hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment. Export controls This dev ice m a y c ontain comm odit ies, tec hnology or software subject to export laws and regulations f rom the US and other countries. Diversion contrary to law is prohibited. NO WARRANT Y The third-party applicat ion s provided with your device may have been created and may be owned by persons or entities not affiliated with or related to Nokia. Nokia does not own the copyright s or intellectual property rights to the th ird-party applications. As such, N okia does not t ake any respon sibility for end-user support, functionality of the applicat ion s, or the information in the applications or these materials. Nokia does not provide any warranty for the thir d-pa rty applications. BY USI NG THE APPLICAT IONS Y OU ACKN OWLEDGE THAT THE APPL ICATI ONS ARE PROVID ED AS IS WITHOUT WARR A NTY O F ANY KIND, E X PRESS OR IMPLIE D, TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERM ITTED BY APPLICAB LE LAW . YOU FUR THER AC KNOWLED GE THAT N EITHE R NOKIA NOR ITS AFFILIAT ES MAKE AN Y REPRESENTATI O NS OR WARRANTIE S, E XPRESS OR IMPL I ED, INCL U DING BUT NOT LI M ITED TO WA RRANTIE S OF TI TLE, MERCHA N T ABILI TY OR FIT NESS FOR A PA RTICU LAR PURP OSE , OR THA T THE APPLICATION S W ILL NO T INFRINGE ANY THIRD-PAR TY PATENTS, COPYR IGHTS, TRAD EMARKS, OR OTHER RIG HTS. Mod el : 57 00 9255 338 Dr aft
4 Cont ents For your s afety ................................. 6 General i nformation ........................ 8 Access codes ........ .......... .......... ......... .......... ....... 8 Nokia support a nd conta ct information . ... 9 1. Get s tarted .................................. 10 Insert a (U)SIM card and battery .............. 10 MicroSD c a rd s lot ......... .......... ......... .......... .... 11 Charge t he battery ....... .......... ......... .......... .... 12 Switch the phone on and off . . .......... ......... 13 Set time and date .............. ......... .......... ......... 13 Normal operating position ....... .......... ......... 13 Configur a tion settings .......... ......... .......... .... 13 2. Your ph one ................................. 14 Keys an d parts .......... .......... ......... .......... ......... 14 Modes...... .......... .......... .......... ......... .......... ......... 15 Standby mode ...... .......... .......... ......... .......... .... 16 Indic a tors ......... .......... .......... ......... .......... ......... 17 Menu .. .......... .......... .......... .......... ......... .......... .... 19 Welcome a pplication ........ ......... .......... ......... 19 Tutoria l......... .......... .......... .......... ......... .......... .... 19 Help .............. .......... .......... .......... ......... .......... .... 20 Volume control .............. .......... ......... .......... .... 20 Keypad lock (keygu a rd) ......... ......... .......... .... 20 Connect a compatib le headset .............. .... 21 Connect a USB data c able ....... .......... ......... 21 Attach a wrist s trap ..... .......... ......... .......... .... 21 3. Call fu nctions ............................. 21 Make a voice call .......... .......... ......... .......... .... 21 Answer or reject a c all ..... ......... .......... ......... 23 Make a video call .......... .......... ......... .......... .... 24 Answer a video ca l l . .......... ......... .......... ......... 25 Video sha ring ....... .......... .......... ......... .......... .... 26 Log ...... .......... .......... .......... .......... ......... .......... .... 28 4. Write text ................................... 28 Tradi ti onal text input ....... ......... .......... ......... 2 9 Predic t ive text input ......... ......... .......... ......... 29 Copy and delete text ........ ......... .......... ......... 30 5. Messaging .................................. 30 Write a nd send message s ........ .......... .......... 3 1 InboxâÂÂre c eive me ss a ges .......... .......... .......... 3 3 My folders ...... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... 34 Mailbox ....... ......... .......... .......... .......... .......... ..... 34 Outbox............. .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... 3 5 View m es sa ges on the SI M c ar d ...... .......... 3 6 Cell broa d cas t ......... .......... .......... .......... .......... 3 6 Service command editor ............... .......... ..... 36 Messaging s ettings .......... .......... ............... ..... 3 6 Message r eader ....... .......... .......... .......... .......... 4 0 6. Contacts ..................................... 40 Manage conta cts......... .......... .......... .......... ..... 40 Manage conta ct groups . .......... .......... .......... 41 Add a r ingin g tone ...... .......... ............... .......... 41 Assign speed dialing k eys ........ .......... .......... 4 1 7. Gallery ........................................ 42 Gallery f unctions ......... .......... .......... .......... ..... 42 8. Music player ... ............................ 45 Listen to music........ .......... .......... .......... .......... 4 6 Music menu ........ .......... .......... .......... .......... ..... 46 Playlist s ........... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... 4 7 Music sh o p ..... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... 4 7 Transfer music ......... .......... .......... .......... .......... 4 8 9. Media .............. ............................ 49 Visual R adio ........ .......... .......... .......... .......... ..... 49 Camera ............ .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... 5 2 Movie director......... .......... .......... .......... .......... 54 Videos ..... ......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... 56 Recorde r ...... ......... .......... .......... .......... .......... ..... 56 RealPlayer....... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... 5 6 Flash Player ......... .......... .......... .......... .......... ..... 57 10.Perso nalization ......................... 58 Themes ............ .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... 5 8 Profiles ........ ......... .......... .......... .......... .......... ..... 58 3-D tones.... ......... .......... .......... .......... .......... ..... 59
5 11.Web.... ........................................ 60 Mobile Sea rch ...... .......... .......... ......... .......... .... 60 Web.......... .......... .......... .......... ......... .......... ......... 60 12.Organ izer ................................... 65 Clock ... .......... .......... .......... .......... ......... .......... .... 65 Calenda r ...... .......... .......... .......... ......... .......... .... 66 Notes ....... .......... .......... .......... ......... .......... ......... 67 Calculator ......... .......... .......... ......... .......... ......... 6 8 Converter .......... .......... .......... ......... .......... ......... 6 8 13.Applicatio ns .............................. 69 Down l oad!........ .......... .......... ......... .......... ......... 69 My own ........ .......... .......... .......... ......... .......... .... 69 14.Setting s ..................................... 70 Voice c ommands ...... .......... ......... .......... ......... 70 Call ma ilbox ......... .......... .......... ......... .......... .... 71 Speed dial ........ .......... .......... ......... .......... ......... 71 Phone set tings .......... .......... ......... .......... ......... 71 Speech.......... .......... .......... .......... ......... .......... .... 80 Settings wizard.... .......... .......... ......... .......... .... 80 Instant messag ing ........ .......... ......... .......... .... 81 15.Connect ivity .............................. 84 PC Suite .. .......... .......... .......... ......... .......... ......... 8 4 Bluet ooth connection ....... ......... .......... ......... 84 Connect io n m a nager ....... .......... .......... .......... 8 6 Push to talk .............. .......... .......... .......... .......... 87 Remote s y nc hr oniza tion .......... .......... .......... 91 Infrar ed ....... ......... .......... .......... .......... .......... ..... 92 Modem ........ ......... .......... .......... .......... .......... ..... 92 USB data cable........ .......... .......... .......... .......... 93 Data tr an sf er ...... .......... .......... .......... .......... ..... 93 16.Data man ager ........................... 94 Application manager ....... .......... .......... .......... 9 4 File mana ger .. .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... 96 Device ma nager ...... .......... .......... .......... .......... 9 6 Memory card ...... .......... .......... .......... .......... ..... 97 Activation keys........ .......... .......... .......... .......... 9 8 17.Batte ry infor mation ................. 99 Charging a nd discharging........ .......... .......... 99 Nokia ba ttery a uthenti cation guidelin es ....... .......... .......... .......... .......... ....... 100 18.En hancements ........................ 101 Care an d mainten ance ................. 101 Additio nal safet y informa tion .... 103 Index ................... .......................... 107
6 For y our safe ty Read these simp le guidelines. Not following them may be dangerous or illegal. Read the comp lete user g uid e for f urth er in forma tio n. SW ITC H ON SAF E LY Do not switch the device on when wireless ph one use is prohibited or when it may caus e interferen ce or dange r. RO AD SA F ETY CO ME S FIR S T Obey all local law s. Always keep you r hands free to operate th e vehicle wh ile driving. Your first consider ation while driving should be road safety. INT ERF ER E NCE All wireless device s may be susceptible to inte rference, which could affect performance. SWITC H OF F IN HOS PIT ALS Follow any res trictio ns. Switch the device off near medical equipm ent. SWI TCH O FF IN A IRCRAFT Follow any res tricti ons. Wir eless device s can caus e interferen ce in aircr aft. SW ITC H OF F W HEN R EF UEL I NG Do n o t u se the de vice at a refuelin g point. Do not use near fuel or che micals. SWI TCH O FF NEA R BLASTI NG Follow any res tricti ons. Do not use the device w here blasting is in progre ss. USE S ENSIBLY Use only in the normal position as explained in the product docume ntation. Do n ot to uc h the ant en na un nec es sa ri ly. QUA LIF IE D SE R VIC E Only qualified personnel may install or repair this product. ENH ANC EM EN TS AN D B AT TER IES Use only approved enhancemen ts and batteries. Do not connect in compatible products. WAT ER - RESI STA N CE Your device is not water-resis tant. Keep it dry. BAC K- UP CO PIES Remember to make back-up copies or keep a written record of all important information stored in your device.
7 CONN E CTING TO O THER DEVICES When conne cting to any oth er device, read its user gu ide for detailed s afety instructions. Do not con nect incompatib le products. EM ERG EN CY CAL LS Ensur e the phone f unction of the devi ce is swi t ch ed on and in service. Pr ess the end key as man y times as needed to clea r the display and retu rn to the standby mo d e. E nter the em ergenc y number, then press the c all ke y . Gi ve your locatio n. Do not end the call until giv en permission to do so. â About your device The wireless device described in this guide is approved for use on the GSM 850, 900, 1800, and 1900 a n d UMT S 2100 n etwork s. Con tact your s er vice p rovider for mo re inf ormat ion about networks. When using the featur es in this device, obey all la ws and respect lo cal customs, privacy and legitimate rights of others, including copyrigh ts. Copyright protections may prevent some image s, music (in c luding ringing tones), and other content from being copied, modified, transferred, or forwarded. Your device supports internet con nections and other methods of conne ctivity. Like comput ers, you r dev ice may be exp osed to vir uses, malicious mess ages and applica tions, an d other ha rmful conte nt. Exer cise caut ion and ope n mess ages, acce pt connectivit y requ ests, download content, and accept ins tallations only from trustworthy sourc es. To increase the security of your device , consider inst alling antivirus softwa re with a regular update se rvice and using a firewall application. Warning: T o u se any featur es in this devic e, other than th e alarm cl ock, the device mu st be switch ed on. Do n ot switch the de vice on when wire less device u se may cause in terfere nce or danger. â Networ k se rvic es To us e the pho ne you must have serv ice from a wireles s servi ce provide r. Many of the featu res req uire spec ial netwo rk featu res. These f eature s are not availa ble on all networks ; other netwo rks m ay require that you ma ke specific a rrange ments with your ser vice prov ider before y ou can use the ne twork ser vices. Your s ervice pr ovider can give you instructio ns and explain what c harges will ap ply. Some networks may have limitations that affect h ow you can use network se rvices. For instanc e, some networks m ay not su ppor t all language- dependent characters and services. Your service provider may ha ve r equested that certa in features be disabled or not activated in your device . If so, these features will n ot appear on your device menu. Your device may also have a specia l configuration such as ch anges in menu name s, menu order, and icons. Co nt act yo ur se rvic e p ro vid er f or m ore in for ma ti on .
8 This device supports WAP 2.0 protocols (HTTP and SSL) that run on TCP/IP protocols. Some features of this devic e, such as web browsing, e-ma il, push to talk, instant messaging, and multimedia me ssaging, require network support for th ese technologies. â Enhancements, batteries, and charger s Check the model number of any charger before use with this device. This device is intended for use when supplied with power from the AC-3, AC-4, AC-5, DC-4 chargers or CA-44 char ger ada pt er. Warning: U se only batte ries, charge r s, and enhancements approved by Nokia for use with this particular model. The use of any other types may inva lidate any approval or warranty, and may be dangerous. For availability of appr oved enhancem ents, please check with your dealer. Whe n you disconnect the power cord of any enhan cement, grasp and pull the plug, not the cord. Ge nera l info rmat ion Mode l: 5700 â Access codes Lock c ode The lock code ( 5 to 10 digits) helps to protect your phone against unauthorized us e. The pre set cod e is 12 345. Ch ange t he co de, and ke ep the n ew code se cret a nd in a safe place separate from your phone. To change the code and to set the phone to request the co de, s ee âÂÂSe curit y ,â p. 73. If you e nter an incorrect lock code five times in su cce ssion, t he phone ign ores furth er entries of t he code. Wait for 5 minutes , and enter the code again. When the de vice is loc ked, calls m ay be poss ible to the of ficial emergen cy numbe r programmed in to your device. PIN codes The personal identification number (PIN ) code a nd the un iversa l person a l identification number ( UPIN) code (4 t o 8 digits) help to protect your SIM card against unauthorized use. See âÂÂSecu rity , â p. 73. The PIN code is usually supplied wit h the SIM car d. The PIN2 code ( 4 to 8 digits) may be supplied with the SIM card and is required for some fu nct ions.
9 The module PIN is required to access the information in the security module. The module PIN is supplie d with the SI M card if the SIM card has a security module in it. The signing PIN is req uired for the digital signature. The signing PI N is supplied with the SIM card if t he SIM card has a security m odule in it. PUK co de s The personal unblocking key (PUK) code and the universal personal unblocking key (UPUK) code (8 digits) are required to change a blocked PIN code and UPIN code , respectively. The PUK2 code is required to cha n ge a blocked PIN 2 code. If the codes are not supplied with the SIM card, con tact your local service provider for th e codes. Ba rring pa ssw ord The barring passw ord (4 digits) is required w hen using Call barring . See âÂÂCall barring,â p. 77. You can obtain t he pas sw ord from you r service provider. If you enter an incorrect barr in g password three times in succession, t he password is blocked. Contact your service provider. â Nokia support and contact infor ma tion On the web site, you can get information on the u se of N okia product s and services. If you need to contact customer service, check the list of local Nokia contact cent e rs at ww w .nokia.com/custome rse rvice. For mainte nance se rvices, c heck your nearest Nokia se rvice center at www. noki a.com/ rep air. Softw are upd ates Nokia may produce software updates that may offer new features, enhanced functions, or improved performance . You may be able to req uest these updates through the Nokia Software Updater PC application. To update the device software, you need th e Nokia Software Updater application and a com patible PC with Microsoft Windows 2000 or XP operating system, broadband internet acce ss, and a compatible data cable to connect your device to th e PC. To get more information and to dow nload the Nokia Software Updater application, visit www.nokia.com/softwareupdate or your local Nokia web site.
10 1. Ge t st ar ted â Insert a (U)SIM card and battery Always sw itch th e device o ff and disconnect th e char ger befor e removing th e battery . This phone u ses BP- 5M batteries. For availability a nd information on using SIM ca rd services, contac t your SIM card ven dor. This may be the service provider or other vendo r. 1. To open t he back cove r of the phone for th e firs t time, lift it using t he plastic strip shown on the back of the phon e (1). You can then remove the st ri p. To open the ba ck cover later, turn t he low e r part of the phone 90 degre e s le ft or right wh en the n u mber key s of the lower part are on t he same side as the display, and lift the ba ck cover (2). To remove the ba ttery, l ift it a s shown (3). 2. To release the SIM card holder, slide it backwards ( 4), and lift it ( 5). I n se r t t h e ( U ) S I M c a r d t o t h e S I M c a r d ho l d e r ( 6 ) . M a k e s u r e t h a t t h e ( U ) S I M card is pr ope rly insert e d and t hat the golde n-colored contact area on the ca rd is facing dow nwards, and the beveled corner faces upwards.
11 Close the SIM card holder (7), a nd s lide it forward to lock it (8). 3. Replace the ba t tery (9). Replace t he back cov er (10) and (11). â MicroSD card slot Use only compatible microSD cards appr oved by Nokia for use with this device. Nokia uses approved industry standards for memory cards, but some brands may not be fully compa tible with this device. Incompa tible card s may dama ge the car d and the device and corru pt data stored on the card. Keep microSD ca rds out of the re a ch of sm all children. You can ex tend t he avai lable me mory w ith a m icroSD memory card. Y ou can i nsert or remove a microSD card without s w itching the phone off. Import ant: Do n ot re move the memory card in the middle of an operation when the ca rd is being a cces s ed. Removing th e card i n the middl e of an o peration may damage the memory card as well as the de v ice, and data s tored on the ca rd may be cor ru pt ed.
12 Inse r t a micro SD ca rd No te that the m emory car d may b e supplied with the phon e, and ma y alre ady be in sert ed. 1. Open the side door (1). 2. Place the microSD ca rd in the slot wi th th e g old en con ta ct a rea f aci ng down (2). Push t he card ge nt ly t o lock it into place. 3. Close tight t he si de door ( 3). Remove a microSD card 1. Open the side door. 2. Push the card gently to re lease it. Remove mem ory card and press 'OK' is displayed. Pull the c a rd out, and se lect OK . 3. Close tight t he si de door. â Char ge the batter y 1. C onnec t the charger to the wa ll soc ket. 2. Open the side door (1), and connect t h e charger plug to the ch arger connector in the phone (2). 3. After charging, close tight th e side door. If the battery is com p letely discharged, it may take a fe w minut es before the charging indicator appears on th e display or before any calls can be made. The charging time de pends on t he charge r and the battery used. Charging a BP -5M b att ery wi th th e A C-5 ch ar ger ta kes a pp ro xi mat el y 80 mi nute s . 1 2
13 â Switch the phone on and off Press and h old the power key. If the ph one asks for a PIN code, e nt er t he PIN c ode, and select OK . If the ph one asks for the lock code, e nter the lock code, and select OK . The factory s etting for the lock code is 12345. â Set time and date To s et the c or rec t ti me z on e, t ime , and date , s el ect the country you are pres entl y in, then enter the local tim e and dat e. â Normal operating position Use the phone on l y in its nor mal operating posit ion. Not e: As with any r adio transmitting devic e, avoid touching an an t e nna unnec essar ily when the anten na is in use. F or example , avoid touching the cellu lar antenna during a phone c all. Contact with a transmitting or receiving antenn a affects the quality of the radio commu nication, may cause th e device to operate at a higher power level than ot herwise ne eded, a nd may red uce the batt ery li fe. Yo ur dev i ce ha s in ter n al an te n na s. Cellular a ntenna (1) Blue toot h antenn a (2) â Configuration set t ings Before you can use multimedia messaging , instant messaging, push to talk, e-mail, synchronization, st reaming, and the browser, you must ha ve th e prope r conf iguration settings on you r ph one. Your phone may aut omat ically con figur e browser, multimedia messaging, access point , and st re aming settin gs based on the SIM card used. You may a lso rece ive the settings directly as a configuration message,
14 which you save to your phon e. For m ore information on availability, contact you r service provider or n earest a uthorized Nokia deale r. When you receive a configuration message, and t h e settings are not aut om atically saved and a ctivate d, 1 new m essage is displayed. Select Sh o w to open the message. To save the settings, sele ct Opti ons > Save . You may need to ente r a P IN code provided by t he se rvice provide r. 2. Y our p hone â Keys and par ts Power key ( 1) Louds peak er (2) Earpie ce (3) Volume keys (4 ) Left and r ight se lection ke ys (5) Men u ke y (6 ), hereaft er described a s "select Menu " Clear key (7) Call key (8) End key ( 9) Navi⢠scroll ke y (10), hereaft er referred to as scroll key Number keys ( 11) Microphone (12) No kia AV 2 .5-mm c onnector (13) Louds peaker ( 14) Charg er conn ector (15) microSD card s lot (16) USB c onnect or (17) Infra red port (18)
15 Media keys: Rewind, zoom out (19) Play/Pause/Stop, capture ke y (20) Fast forward, zoom in (21) Camera lens (22) Ca me ra fl a s h (2 3 ) â Modes Your phone h a s five f un ctional m odes: phone m ode (1), camera mode (2), music mode (3), video call mode (4), and video view mode. To switch between the modes, turn the lower part o f the phone. There is a short pause befor e a mode is activated. In the ph on e mode, do not t ry t o rotat e the low er part of t he ph one more than 9 0 degrees to th e lef t or 180 de grees t o the right. If you force the lower part of the phone to rotate m ore, the phone will be damaged. Phone mode The phone mode is activated when the number ke ys of the lower part are on the same side as t he display. Camera mode To activat e the ca mera mode while in th e phone mode, t urn the lower part of t he phone 90 degrees t o the left so that the camera lens is poin ting away fr om you when you look at th e display. To take a self portrait, turn the lower part of t he phon e 90 degr e es to the right while in the phon e mode so that the camera lens is pointing toward you w hen you look at the display.
16 Music mod e To activate t he music m ode while in the phone mode , turn t h e lower pa rt of th e phone 180 degrees to the righ t so that the keys u sed t o control music playback are on the same side as the display. Video call mode During video calls, you can let the call recipient to see your face. Tur n the lower part of the phone so that t he ca m era len s is pointing towar d you when you look at the display. You ca n a lso t urn t h e ca m era lens to t he o pposite direction. Vide o view mode When you are viewing a video or still images in t h e phone mode, you can activate th e video view mode. Turn th e lower part of the phone 90 degrees to the left so that the camera lens is pointing away from you. In video v i ew mode the display a utomatically changes to la ndscape, a nd you can put the phon e on the table, for e xample, while viewing. To view the next or previous still images or to fa st forward or re wind the video, press t he fast forward or rewind media key. To play or pause the video, pre ss t he play/pause/stop media ke y. To st op the video, press and h old the play/pause/stop media key. â Standby mode When you have switch e d on the phone, a nd it is re gis t ered to a ne t work, the phone is in t he standby m ode and ready for use. To open t he list of la st dial e d numbers, press the call ke y. To use the voice comm ands or voice dia ling, press a nd hold the right se lection ke y. To change t h e profile, press the power ke y, and select a profile. To star t a con n ection to t he w eb, pres s and hold 0 . Active sta ndby When active st a ndby is e nabl ed, you can use the display for f ast access to frequently used applications. To select whether the active standby is shown, select
17 Menu > Settings > Phone sett. > General > P ersonalis at ion > Standby mode > Act ive standby > On or Of f . To access active standby a pplications, scroll to the application, and select it . In active st a ndby the de fault applications are shown across t he top of the active standby area, a nd calendar, to-do, and playe r events are listed below. To select a n application or event, scroll to it, and se lect it. Offline profile The Off line profile lets you use the phon e wi thout connecting it t o a ne twork. When the O ffline profile is active, the con nection to the w ireless network is turned off, as indicated by in the s i gnal str en gth indicator a re a. All w ireless RF signals to or from your phone are prevented, and you can use your device without a (U)SIM card. Use t he off line profile in radio sensitive environmentsâÂÂon board aircraft or in hospitals. You ca n lis ten to music using the m usic player when the offline pr ofile is active. To leave the Offlin e profile, press the power key, and select another profile. Import ant: I n th e offline profile you cannot make or receive any calls, or use other features tha t require cellular ne twork coverage. Calls may still be possible to the official emergency number programm ed into your device. To make calls, y ou must first activ ate the phone function by changing profile s. If the device has been locked, enter t he lock co de. â Indicators The phone is connected t o a UMTS netw ork. The phone is connect e d to a GSM netw ork. The phone is in offline mode and not connected to a cellu la r network. See âÂÂOffline profile,â p. 17. You recei ved on e or sever al mes sages to th e Inbox folder in Messaging . You received new e-mail in your remote mailbox. Ther e are mess ages wa iti ng to b e sent in Outbox . See â Out box,â p. 35 . You have missed ca lls. See âÂÂRece nt calls, â p. 28. Shown if Ringing t ype is se t to Silent and Me ssage alert tone and E -mail alert tone ar e se t to Of f . S ee âÂÂPr o fil es, â p. 5 8.
18 The phone keypad is l ocked. See âÂÂK eypad lock (keyguard),â p. 2 0. The loudsp eaker is ac tivat ed. An alar m is acti ve. The second phone line is bein g used. See Line i n use in âÂÂCall ,â p. 7 6. / All calls to t h e phone are dive rt ed to your call mailbox or t o another number. If you h a ve two phon e lines, the dive rt indicat or is for th e firs t lin e and for th e second. A he ad se t is co nne c ted to th e p ho n e. A loopset is conn e cted to the ph one . The conne ction to a Bl uetoot h hea dset ha s been lost. / A data call is active. A GPRS packet data connection is active. indicates the connection is on hol d and t hat a con nect ion is availa ble. A packet dat a connection is a ctive in a part of the ne twork t hat supports EGPRS . ind icate s the conne ction is on hold and t hat a connec tion is available. The icons indicate that EGPRS is available in the netw ork, bu t your device is not ne cessarily using EGPRS in the data tra n sfer. A UMTS packet data connection is a ctive. indicates th e connection is on hold and that a connection is available. Bluetooth is switched on. Data is being tr a nsmitted using Bluetooth. See âÂÂBluetooth connection,â p. 84. An infrared connection is active. When infrared is act ive, but t he re is no connection, the indicator blinks. A U SB c onn e ctio n is a ctiv e . Other indicators may also be shown. For push t o talk indicators, see â Push to talk,â p. 87.
19 â Menu In the menu you can access the functions in your ph one. To access t he main menu, press t he men u key; he reafter described a s "select Menu ". To open an application or a folder, scroll to it, an d press the scroll key. To change t h e menu view, select Me nu > Optio ns > Change Menu view and a view type. If you ch a nge the order of the fun ctions in the menu, the order may differ from the default orde r descr ibed in this user guide. To close an application or a folde r, select Back and Ex it as many times as nee ded to return to the standby mode, or select Opt io ns > Ex it . To display and switch betwe en open applica t ions, select and hold Me n u . T he application switching window ope ns, showing a list of open a pplications. Scroll to an application, and select it. To mark or unmark an item in applications, press # . To ma rk or unma rk several cons ecuti ve it ems, pr ess and hol d # , and scroll up or down . Leaving applications running in the background increases the dem and on battery power and reduces the battery life. â W e lcome application We lc o m e appli cation st arts when you switch on your phone for t he first t ime . With th e We l c om e application, you can access t h e following applications: Tu t o ri a l âÂÂLearn about the featu re s of your phone and how to use them. Se ttin gs w i zar d âÂÂConfigure connection settin gs. Dat a tr ans fer âÂÂCopy or synchronize dat a from othe r compatible phones. To open Welcome later, select Menu > Applications > We lc o me . â Tu t o ri a l Tu tor ial con ta in s an i ntr od uc tio n to the pho ne fe at ure s a nd a tuto ri al to t eac h ho w to u se t he p h one. The tuto ri al star ts a uto mat ic all y w hen you tur n on yo ur ph one for t he f irs t ti me . To s ta rt th e tu tor ial you rs elf , se le ct Menu > Tu to r i a l and a tut oria l i tem.
20 â He lp You r devic e has c ontext -sensit ive h elp. You can access t he hel p from a n application or from the main menu. To access help when an application is open, se le ct Op tion s > Help . To s w itc h between help and the application that is open in the background, sele ct and hold Menu . S e lec t Optio ns and from the following opt i ons: T opic list âÂÂto view a list of available topics in the appropriate category Help c ate gory l is t âÂÂto view a list of help categories Search by keyword âÂÂto search for help topics using ke yw ords To o pen he lp fro m th e main menu, se lect Menu > Applications > He lp . In the list of help categories, select t he desired application t o view a list of he lp t opics. To switch between the he lp category li st, indicate d w ith , and a keyw ords list, indicated with , scroll left or right. T o di splay the related help text, se lect it. â V olume control To adju st the e arpiece or lou dspeaker volu me during a call or when listening t o an audio file, pr ess the volume keys. To activate t h e loudspeaker durin g a call, se lect Loudsp eaker . To deactivate t he loudspeaker dur ing a call, select Ha ndset . Warning: Do not hold the device nea r you r ear when the loud speaker is in use, because t he v olume may be extremely l oud. â Keypad lock (keyguard) To prevent a ccidental keypresses, you can lock the keypad. To lock t he keypad in t he phone mode , press the left selection key a nd * withi n 1.5 seconds. T o set t he ph one to aut omat ically lock t he keypad after a ce rtain time, select Menu > Settings > Phone sett. > General > Security > Phone an d SIM card > Keypad autolock period > User de fined and the de sired tim e . To lock the ke ypad in m usic mode, pres s the power key quickly, and select L ock keypad . To unlock the ke ypa d in the phon e mode, select Unlock , and press * withi n 1.5 seconds. To unlock the ke ypa d in music mode, se lect Unlock > OK .
21 When the keypad lock is on, calls may be possible to the of ficial emergency number programmed into your device. â Connect a compatible hea dset Do not connect pr oducts that create an output signal as this may cause damage to the device . Do not conne ct any vo ltage source to the N okia A V connector. When c onnec ting any externa l devic e or any headset, other than those approv ed by Nokia for use with this device , to the Nokia AV connec tor, pay special attention to volum e levels. â Connect a USB data cable To set the default USB connection mode, select Menu > Settings > Conn ectivity > USB > USB m ode and the de sired mode . To set whether t he d efault mode is activated automatically, se lect Ask on connection > No . â Atta ch a w rist s tra p Conn ect the w rist strap a ccor din g to the graphic. 3. Call func tions â Make a voice c all 1. In th e sta ndby mode , ent er t he phon e number, in cluding the area code . Press the c lear key to r emove a numbe r. For international calls, press * twi ce f or the in te rn atio nal p re fi x (th e character re pla ces the int ernational acce ss code), and enter the cou nt ry code, area code (omit the le ading zero if necessary), and ph one number. 2. To call th e n umber, pre ss the call key. To adjust the volum e during the ca ll, pres s the volume keys. 1 2
22 3. T o en d the ca ll, o r to cancel t he c all a t tempt, pre ss the end k ey. To make a call from Con tacts , se l ect Menu > Con tacts . Scroll to the desired name; or ent er the firs t letters of t he name, and scrol l to the desired name. T o call the number, pre ss the call ke y. To call your call mailbox (network service), press and h old 1 in the standby mode. You must define th e mailbox number before you can call your mailbox. See âÂÂCall mailbox,â p. 7 1. To call a recent ly dia led number, pre ss the ca ll key in t h e standby mode . The list of the last 20 numbers you called or attempted to call is shown. Scroll to the n umber you want, and pre ss the call ke y. To make a push to talk call, se e âÂÂPu sh to talk,â p. 87 . Speed dialin g You can assign a phone number to one of t h e spee d dia ling keys 2 to 9 . S ee â Assign speed dia ling keys,â p. 4 1 , or âÂÂSpe ed dial,â p. 7 1. Call a speed dialing number in either of the following ways: ⢠Press the s pe ed dialing key, t hen the call key. â¢I f Speed diallin g is se t to On , press a nd hold the spee d diali ng key un til t h e call begins. To set Speed dialling to On , s e lec t Me nu > Settings > Phone sett. > Phone > Call > Spee d dialling > On . Voic e dia ling A voice tag is a dde d automatically to all entries in Contacts . Use long names, and a void sim ilar names for di fferent n umbers. Mak e a voi ce d i ali ng c all Voi ce tags a re sensiti ve to ba ckgroun d noise. Us e voice t ags in a quiet en vironm ent. Not e: Usin g voice tags may be difficult in a nois y environment or during an emergency, so y ou should not rely solely upon voice dialing in all circumsta nces. 1. In th e sta ndby mode , press and hold the r ig ht selection key. A short tone is played, a nd Speak now is displayed. If y ou are using a compat ible h eadset with t he hea dset key, press and hol d the heads et key.
23 2. Speak the voice command clearly. The phone pla ys the voice comm and of the best match. After 1.5 s econds, th e phone dials the num ber; i f the result i s not the correct one, be fore dialing select Next an d an othe r entry . Using voice commands to ca rry out a phone function is s imila r to voice dialing. See âÂÂV oice commands,â p. 70. Make a confere nce call (network service) 1. Make a call to the f irst pa rticipant. 2. To make a call to another pa rticipant, select Op tio ns > Ne w ca ll . The first call is automatically put on hold. 3. To join the first participant in the conference call when the new call is answered, se lect Opt ions > Conference . To add a new pers on to the call, repeat st ep 2, and select Op tion s > Conference > Add to con ference . The phone supports conference ca l ls bet w een a maximum of six participants, including yourself. 4. T o hav e a pr ivate c onv ersat ion wit h on e of th e pa rtic ipants , sele ct Op ti ons > Conference > Privat e . Select a pa rt icipant and Pri va te . The conference call is put on hold on your phone. T he other participants can still cont inue the conference call. To return to the conference call, s ele ct Opti ons > A dd t o conference . 5. To drop a pa rticipant, select Op tions > Conf erence > Drop participant , scroll to the participant, and select Dr op . 6. T o en d the co nfere nce call, pres s the e nd key . â Ans wer or rej ect a cal l To answer a ca ll, press the call ke y. To adjust the volu me during the call, press the volume ke ys. To mu te th e ring ing t one, s elec t Sile n ce . Tip : If a compati ble headse t is conne cted to th e phon e, pr ess th e heads et key to answ er and end a ca ll. To r ejec t th e call , pr ess the end key, o r sel ect Optio ns > Reject . Th e cal ler hear s a busy tone. If you have acti va ted t he Call divert option If busy to divert calls, rejecting the call diverts the call.
24 To send a t ex t messa ge to t he caller infor min g why you cannot a nswer t h e call, select Op ti ons > Se nd text message . Yo u can activa te th e text messa ge r eply an d edit t he text in the mes sage . Se e Reject call with SMS and Message text in âÂÂCall,â p. 76. Call waiting ( n etwork service) During a call, to answer the waiting call, press the call ke y. The first ca ll is pu t on hold . To end th e active cal l, pr ess t he en d key. To ac t ivate th e Call wait ing functio n, select Menu > Se ttings > Ph one s e tt. > Phone > Call > Call waiting > Act iv ate . To s witch between the t wo calls, select Swap . Optio ns duri ng a ca ll Many of t he optio ns tha t you ca n use during a call a re net work servi ces. Fo r availability, contact your service provide r. Select Optio ns during a call for some of the follow ing options: Tr a n s f er â to connect a ca ll on hold t o an a ctive call and d isconnect yourself Replace âÂÂto end an active ca l l and replace it by a nswering the waiting call Send DTMF âÂÂto se nd DTMF tone str ings (for example, a password). Ent er the DTMF string or search for it in Contacts . To ente r a wa it ch arac ter ( w ) or a pau se char acter ( p ), press * repea tedly. To se nd the t one, se lect OK . Tip : Yo u can ad d DT MF t one s to th e Phone number or DT M F f i e l d s i n a contact card. â Make a video call When you make a vide o call, you can see a real-time, two-way vide o between you and the recipient of the call. The live video image or video im age captured by t he camera in your device is shown to the video call recipient. To be able to make a video call, you may need t o have a USIM card and be in the coverage of a UMTS network. For ava ila bility of and s u bscription to video ca ll services, cont a ct your service prov i der. A video call can only be made between two parties. T he video ca ll ca n be m ade to a compatible mobile ph one or an I SD N client. Video calls ca nn ot be m ade while there is another voice , video, or data call act ive.
25 You are not rece ivin g video (the re cipient is not sending video or the ne t work is not transmitting it) . You have denie d vide o sending from your device. 1. Enter t he phone n umber in th e standby mode; or select Me n u > Contacts , and sc rol l to th e desi red con ta ct. 2. S elect Op tio ns > Call > Video call . Starting a video call may take a while. W aitin g for video image is shown. If the call is not su ccessful (for example, video c a lls are not su pporte d by t h e network, or the re ceivin g de vice is not compatible), you are asked if you want to try a normal call or send a message instead. The video call is act ive whe n you se e two vide o images, and hear t he sound through the loudspeaker. T he call re cipien t may de n y video sending ( ), in which case you hear the sou nd and ma y se e a still image or a gre y background graphic. During video ca lls while the ph on e is in phone mode, t urn the low er part of the ph on e so that t he camera len s is pointing toward you to let the call recipient to see your face, or tu rn the lower part to opposit e direct ion to show the view aw ay f rom you . To increase or decrease the volume during a call, press the volume keys. To change between showing v i deo or o nly hearing sound, se lect Enable or Dis a bl e > Se nding video , Se nding audio , or Sen ding aud. & video . To zoom your own image, se lect Zoom in or Zoom out . T he zoom indicator is shown on the top of t he display. To switch the plac e s of t he sent a nd received v i deo images on t he display, select Change im age order . Even if you have denied video sending during a video ca ll, the call w i ll still b e charged as a vide o call. Check the pricing with your network operator or service prov i der. To en d the vi deo c all, pres s the end key. â Answer a video call When a video call a rrives, is displayed. Press t h e call key to an sw er the video ca ll. Allow video im age to be sent to caller? is sho wn. If you selec t Ye s , the image captured by the ca mera in your device is shown to the caller. If you se lect No , or do nothing, video sending is not activated, and a grey scre en is shown in place of the video.
26 Even if you have de n ied video sending during a vide o call , t h e call is still charge d as a video ca ll. Check the pricin g w ith you r service provider. To end t h e video call, pre ss the end key. â Video sharing Use Video sharing t o send live video from your mobile device to another compatible mobile device during a voice c a ll. Vide o sharing requir ements Because Video sh aring requires a 3 G universal mobile tele communications system (UMTS) connection, your ability to use Video sharing depends on 3G network availability. Contact your service provider for qu estions about network availability and fees asso ciated with thi s appl icati on. To use V ideo sharing you must do th e following: ⢠Ensure that you r de vice is s et up for pers on-t o-person conn e ctions. ⢠Ensure you have an acti ve UMTS connection and are wit h in UMTS network coverage. If you s tart the sharing session while you a re with in UMTS network coverage and a handover t o G SM occurs, t he sharing s ession is discontinued, but your voice call con t inues. ⢠Ensure that both t he sen der and recipient are re gi stered to t he U MTS network. If you invite som eone to a sha rin g session and that personâÂÂs phone is turned off, or the person is n ot within UMTS network coverage, they do n o t k now that you are sending an in vitation. However, you receive an error message that t he recipient cannot a cce pt the invitation. Settings A person - to-person conn ection is also known as a session initiation protocol (SIP) connection. T he SIP profile settings must be configured in your device be fore you can use Video sh aring . Ask your service provider for the SIP profile settings, and save them in your device. You r se rvice pr ovider may s end you the set ting s over the air. If you know a r ecipie ntâÂÂs SIP a ddress, you can enter it on your c ont act card for t hat person. Select Menu > Con tac t s , a cont act, and Op ti ons > Edit > Op ti ons > Add detail > SIP or Share view . Enter the SIP address in the form at
27 sip:username@domainname (you can use an IP address instead of a domain name ). Share l ive v ideo To receive a sharing session, the re cipient must install Video sharing and config ure the required se ttings on their mobile device. Y ou and the re cipien t mu st both be registe re d t o the service before y o u can st art sharing. To re ce ive share invitations, you must be regi st ered to the serv ice, have an act ive UMTS connection, and be w it hin the UMTS network cove rage. 1. When a voice call is a ctive, select Optio ns > Share video > L ive video . 2. The phone se nds the in vitat ion to t h e SIP addre ss you have added to t he contact card of the recipient. If the re cipien t has se veral SIP addresses in the contact card, sele ct t he SIP ad dress to whi ch yo u want to sen d th e inv itati on, a nd Select to send the in vita tio n. If the SIP a ddress of the recipient is not a vailable, e n ter a SI P address. Select OK t o se nd the i nv ita tio n. 3. Sharing begins automatically when th e recipient accepts t he in vitation. The loudspeaker is a ct ive. Y ou can also use a headset t o con tinue your voice call while you share live video. 4. S elect Pa u s e to pause the sharing session. Select Cont in ue to resume sha ring. 5. To en d the sharing sessi on, se lect Stop . To en d th e v oic e cal l, pre ss t he en d key. Accept an invi tation When someone sen ds you a share invi t ation, a n invitation message is displ ayed showing the sen derâÂÂs name or SIP address. If your device is not set t o Sile nt , it ring s w hen y ou receive an invitati on. If some one sends you a share invit a tion and you are not wit hin UM TS n et work coverage, you will not know that you re ce ived an invitation. When you receive an invitation, select from t he following: Accept âÂÂto begin t he sharing ses sion and activate the view mode. Reject âÂÂto declin e the i nvit a ti on. Th e send er rece ives a mess age that yo u rejec ted the i nvit at ion. You can also pr ess the end ke y to de cline the sharing session and disconnect the voice ca ll.
28 To end t he s ha ring se ssion, select Sto p . â Log In the log, you can monitor phone calls, text m essages, packe t dat a con ne ctions, and fax and da t a calls re gistered by the phone. Connections to your remote mailbox, multimedia messaging cen t er, or brow ser pages are shown a s data calls or packet data conn ections in the general communications log. Not e: The a ctual invoic e for c alls and s ervices from your ser vice provide r may v ary, depending on network fe atures, rounding off for billing, taxes, and so forth. Not e: Some tim ers, including the life timer, may be rese t during service or softwa re upgrades. Recent calls The phone regis t ers t he phone n umbers of misse d, received, and dialed ca lls, and the approximate durat ion of your calls. The phone re gisters missed an d received calls only if t he network supports t he se function s, and the phone is switched on and withi n th e net work se rvic e ar ea. To view r ecent calls ( network service) , select Men u > Log > Recent calls and a c al l type . To clear all recent call lists in the Recent calls view, s e lect Op tion s > Cl e ar recen t calls . T o clea r on ly one of t he call regi sters , op en th e regi ster y ou wa nt to erase, and s elect Opti ons > Clear list . General log To view the ge neral log, se le ct Menu > Log , and scroll right. To filter the log, select Opti ons > Filter and the filt er t ype. To er a s e all the lo g co ntent s per manentl y, s elect Optio ns > Clear log > Yes . 4. Writ e text When you write text, appears on the top righ t of t he display, indicat ing predictive text input, or appears, indicating traditional text input. To set t h e
29 predictive text in put on or off when writing text, press * , and se lect Act iva te pre dic tive text or P red ict iv e text > Off . , , or is displayed next t o the text input indicat or, indicating the cha ra cter ca se. To change the cha racter case, pre ss # . indicates the n umber m ode. To change be tween letter and n um ber mode, press # r e peatedly until number mode is a ct ive; or pres s * , and selec t Number mode or Al ph a mode . â T r aditional text input Press a nu mber key, 1 to 9 , repe atedly unti l the de sir ed ch aract er appe ars . Not all characters available under a n um ber key are printed on the key. The availability of characters depe nds on the se lected writing langu a ge. See Writing language in âÂÂLangu age, â p. 72 . If t he nex t le tt er y ou w an t is on t he sam e k ey as t h e pr ese n t on e, wa i t unt il the cursor appears ( or scroll forward to end the time-out period), a nd enter the letter. To i nsert a number, press and hol d the number key. The most commo n punctuation marks and special characters are available unde r the 1 key. For m ore characters, pre ss and hold * . To er a s e a cha racte r, p ress the cl ear key. T o eras e more char acte rs, p ress an d hold the c lear key. To ins ert a space, press 0 . To move the c ursor to t he nex t line, press 0 thr ee ti mes. â Predictive text input To enter any letter with a single ke ypress, use predictive tex t input. To select th e predictive te x t input, press * , and select Activat e pr e dic tive t ext . This acti vates predictive text input for all e ditors in the phone. 1. To write th e des i red word, pr ess the keys 2 âÂÂ9 . Press each key only once for one letter. Th e w ord change s after every keypres s. For t he most common pu nctuat ion marks , pre ss 1. For more punct uation marks and special characters , press and hold * . To er ase a ch aract er, p ress th e clear key. To erase more c hara cte rs, pr ess and ho ld the c le ar key. 2. W hen you h ave fi nished t he word and it is correct, to con firm it, scroll forward or insert a space.
30 If the wo rd is not c orrect, to view the ma tching words the d icti onary has fo und one by one, pre ss * repeatedly. If the ? c har ac te r is show n afte r t he wo rd, th e wo rd you i nte n ded to w rite is not in the dictionary. To add a word t o the dictionary, select Spell . En t er t he word (up to 32 letters) using traditional text input, and select OK . T he wo r d i s added to the dictionary. W hen the dict i onary becomes f ull, a new word replaces the olde st added word. Writ e co mpound wo rds Write the first half of a compou nd word, and scroll forward to confirm it. Write the las t part of the compound word, and to complete the compou nd wor d, press 0 t o ad d a spac e. â Copy and delete text 1. To selec t letters and words, pre ss and hold # , and at the same time scroll lef t or right. As the selection moves, text is highlighted. To s e lect lines of text, pres s and hold # , and at the same time scroll up or down. 2. To copy the text to t he clipboard, press and hold # , and at t he sam e t ime s elect Copy . If you want to del ete the se lect ed tex t fr om the docume nt, p ress t he c lear key. 3. To insert the text, scroll to the insertion point, press and hold # , and at the same ti me sele ct Pas te . 5. Messagi ng You can create, send, receive, view, e dit, and organize text messages, multimedia messages, e-mail messages, presentations, and docume nts. You can also r eceive messages and da ta using B luetooth wireless technology, receive and forward picture messages, rece ive service messages and cell broadcast messa ges, and send service commands. To open t h e Messaging menu, s elect Menu > M essaging . You ca n see t he Ne w message functi on and a list of defa u lt folde rs:
31 Inbox âÂÂcontains received messages except e-mail and cell broadcast messages. E-mail messa g es ar e sa ved in th e Mailbox folder. To read cell broadca st messages, select Op tion s > Cell br oadcast . My f o lde r s âÂÂfor organizing your me ssages int o folde rs Mailbox âÂÂf o r c o n n e c t i n g t o y o u r r e m o t e m a i l b o x t o r e t r i e v e y o u r n ew e - m a i l messages or viewing your previously retrieved e- m ail messages offline. After you define settings for a new mailbox, the name given to that m a ilbox is displayed instead of Mailbox . Dra fts âÂÂsaves draf t messages that have n ot been sent. Sent âÂÂsaves the me ssages t hat a re sent, exclu d ing me ssages sent usin g Blue toot h. Outbox âÂÂtemporarily saves the messages waiting t o be sent. Reports (ne twork serv ice) âÂÂsave s the d eli very report s of the t ext me ssag es, special me ssage types such as busin ess cards, and m ult imedia messages you have sent. Receiving a delivery report of a m ultimedia messag e that has been sent to an e-mail address may n ot be possible. â Write and send messages Your device supports the send ing of text messages beyond the charact er limit for a single messa ge. Longer messages a re sent as a series o f two or m ore messages . Your ser vice prov id er m ay c harg e ac co rdin gly. Ch ar acter s th at u se a cce nt s or othe r ma rks , an d ch ar acter s from some language options, take u p more s pace, limiting the n umber of charac ters that can be se nt in a sing le m essa ge. The wir eless network ma y limit the size o f MMS messa ges. If t he inserted pictur e exceeds this limit, the device may make it smal ler so that it can be sen t by MMS. Only devices tha t have compatible f eatures can rec eive and display multim edia messages. The appearance of a message may vary depending on th e receiving device. Before you ca n send and receive an SMS message , a m ultimedia message, or an e-mail, or connect t o your r em ote mailbox, you mu st have t he corr ect connection settings in place. Se e âÂÂMessaging settings,â p. 36. 1. To crea te a message, select Menu > M essaging > New message an d the message type. To cre ate an Audio message , see âÂÂN okia Xpress a udio messaging,â p. 32.
32 2. Press t he scroll key to select t he recipie nt s or grou ps from Contacts or enter the phone number or e- mai l address of the recipient in the To fie ld. Separa te re ci pien ts w ith a s emi col on (;). 3. When creating an e-mail or multimedia message, scroll down to the subject field, and write th e message subject. 4. Scroll down t o t he message f ield, and write the message. When you write text messages, the message length indicator shows how many characters you can enter in the me ssage. For example, 10 (2) me a ns t hat you can still add 10 charac t ers for the t e xt to be s e nt as t w o separate text messages. To us e a templa te fo r the text mess age, s elect Opt ions > Ins e rt > Templat e . To create a presentation based on a template to be sent as a multimedia message, select Optio ns > C rea te p re s enta t ion . T o use a text temp late for t he multimedi a message, select Op tio ns > Insert object > Te m p l a te . To add a media object to a m ultimedia message, select Optio ns > In se rt object > Image , Sound clip , or V ideo clip . To create a nd add a new media object, select Op tion s > Ins ert ne w > Image , Sound cl ip , Video clip or Slide . When sound is added, is show n. To add a media object to an e - mail, select Opti on s > In s e rt > Image , Sound clip , Video clip , No te or Templat e . 5. To sen d the message, sele ct Optio ns > Send . Nokia Xpress audio messagi ng Audio messages are multimed ia messages that consist of a single sound clip. To create a nd sen d a n audio me ssage: 1. S elect Menu > Me ssaging > New message > Au dio message . 2. In th e To field, press t he scroll ke y to choose the recipients fr om Con tacts , or enter the phone n um ber or e -mai l addr ess. Scroll down to the messa ge fi e ld. 3. To recor d a new sound cli p, press the scrol l key, or se lect Opti ons > Insert sound clip > New sound cli p . T he recording starts. To use a previously recorded sound clip, select Optio ns > Insert sou nd clip > From Gallery , scroll to the sound clip, and select it. The sound clip has to be in .amr format. To play the sound clip on the loudspeaker, select Opt ions > Play sound clip .
33 4. To sen d the message, sele ct Optio ns > Send . E-mail se ttings Before you use e-mail, you must do th e following: ⢠Configure an internet a cce s s poin t (IAP) correctly. See âÂÂConnection,â p. 78. ⢠Define your e-mail settings correctly. See âÂÂE-m ail settings,â p. 33. Follow the instructions given by your e-mail se rvice provider and in t ernet service provider. â InboxâÂÂreceive messages Select Men u > Messaging > Inbox . Wh en th e re a re unr ea d me s sag es i n th e in b ox , the ic on c ha ng es t o . To open a rec eived message, select Me nu > M essaging > Inbox and th e desir e d message. Import a nt: Exercise caution w hen opening messages. Multimedia me ssage objects may contain maliciou s software or otherwise be harmful to your device or PC. View multimedia objects To v iew t he lis t of medi a obj ects that ar e inc luded i n th e multi medi a mes sage, open the message, and select Opt ions > Obje cts . You can save th e file in your phone or send it using Bluetooth tech nology or as a multimedia message to another compatible de vice. Speci a l messa ge type s Your phone can r ece ive many kinds of messages, s uch as ope rator logos, business cards, calendar entries, and ringing tones. To open a rec eived message, select Me nu > M essaging > Inbox and th e desir e d mes sage. You can save t he spec ial mes sage c ontent to yo ur phone . For example , to save a rece ived calendar en try to th e cale ndar , select Opti ons > Save to Calendar . Not e: The picture messa ge function can be used only if it is supported by your service pr ovider. Only compa tible devices that offer pic ture message features can re cei ve an d di splay pi cture mes sage s. T he app ea rance of a mes sag e may var y depending on th e receiving device.
34 Service m essages Service messages (network service) are notifications (for e xample, news headlines) t ha t may contai n a text message or the address of a browser ser vice. For availability and subscription, cont act your se rvice provider. â My f olders You can orga nize your mess ages into fo lders, create new fol ders, a nd r ename an d delete folders. Select Men u > Messaging > My folde rs . To creat e a fold er, s elect Op tion s > Ne w folder , a nd ent er a name f or th e fol der. â Mailbox Select Men u > Messaging > Ma ilbox . Whe n you op en Ma ilbox , C onnect to mailbox? is displaye d. Sele ct Ye s to connect to your m ailbox (network ser vice) or No to view previously retrieved e-mail messages of fline. To connect to t he mailbox a fterwards, s e lect Opti ons > Conne ct . When you create a new m ailbox, t he name you give t o the mailbox replaces Mailbox . You can hav e up t o six mailb oxes. When you are online, t o end the da ta connection to the remote mailbox, select Opti o ns > Disco nnect . Retrieve e-mail messages from the mailbox Import a nt: E xerci se cautio n when o pening mes sages. E -mail m essages may contain malicious software or otherwise be harmful to your device or PC. 1. S elect Menu > Me ssaging > Mailbox > Op ti ons > Connect . 2. S elect Op tio ns > Re tr ieve e-mail and from t he followin g options: Ne w â to retrieve all n e w e-mail messages to your phone Selected â to retrieve only t he e-mail messages that have be en marked All âÂÂto retrieve all m es sages from the mailbox 3. After you retrieve the e-mail messages, you ca n continue view ing them on line. Select Op tio ns > D isconne ct to close t he connection a nd to view the re trieved e-mail messages and headings off line.
35 4. To open an e-mail message, select it. If the e-mail message has not been retrieved and you a re offline a nd select Open , y ou are asked if you want t o re tri eve thi s me ss ag e fr om the m ail bo x. To vie w e-mail attachm ents, indicated with , select Opti o ns > Attach ments . You can retrie ve, open, or save a ttachments in supported formats. Delete e-mail messages To delete an e-mail message from the phone and retain it in the remote mailbox, select Menu > Messaging > M ailbox > Opt ions > Dele te > Phon e only . Th e e-mail heading stays in your phone. To remove the heading as well, delete the e-mail m essage from your re mote mailbox first , then conn ect your ph one to the remote mailbox t o update the st atus. To delete an e-mail from the phon e and the r e mote mailbox, select Op tio ns > Del ete > Phone and server . To cancel deletion of an e-mail from both the phone and server, s croll t o an e-mail that has be en marked t o be deleted durin g the next connection, and se lect Opti o ns > Restore . â Out box The outbox folder is a temporary storage place for messages that are waiting to be sent. To access t he outbox folder, select Me nu > Messaging > Outbox . Message statuse s: Sending âÂÂThe phone is sending th e message. Waiting or Queued âÂÂThe phone is waiting to se nd messages or e -mai l. Resend at ... (time)âÂÂSending fa ile d. The ph one tries to sen d t he message aga in after a t ime -out pe riod. To retry sending t he message im mediately, sele ct Opti o ns > Send . Defe rred âÂÂT o pu t documents to be on hold while they are in t he outbox folde r, scroll t o a m essage that is bein g se nt, and select Opt ions > Defe r se nding . Failed âÂÂTh e maxim um numb er of sendi ng at tempt s has b een reached.
36 â View messages on the SIM card Before you ca n view SIM messages, you ne e d to copy t hem to a folder in you r phone. 1. S elect Menu > Me ssaging > Op tion s > SIM messages . 2. Ma rk the mess ages you want to copy. 3. To copy t he marked messages, se lect Opt ions > C opy , and t he f older to whi ch you want to copy the messages. â Cell broadcast You may be a ble to receive messages, such a s w eathe r or traffic conditions from your ser vice pro vide r (ne twork serv ice). T o turn on t he servi ce, s ee Cell broadcast in âÂÂCell broadcast se t tings,â p. 39. Select Men u > Messaging > Op ti ons > Cell broadcast . A packet data conne c t ion ma y prevent cell broadcast reception. â Service command editor To enter a nd send service comm ands ( also known a s USSD commands) such as activati on com mands for network services to your ser vice provider, select Menu > Messaging > Optio ns > S ervi ce comman d . To send t he comma nd, s elect Opti o ns > Send . â Messaging settings Text message settings Select Men u > Messaging > Op ti ons > Settings > Te xt message and from the following options: Message centres âÂÂlists a ll the defin e d message cent e rs Mes sage ce ntre in us e âÂÂdefines which message center is used for delivering text messages and special message t ype s such as business cards Character encoding > Full support âÂÂto select all characters in the message to be sent as vie wed. If you select Reduced support , char act ers wit h acc ents an d othe r marks may be c onverted to other chara cters. Receive report ( netw ork service)âÂÂWhe n set to Ye s , the status of t he sent m e ssage ( Pen di n g , Failed , Deliv ered ) is s hown in Reports .
37 Message validity âÂÂIf the recipient of a message cannot be reached wit hin the validity period, th e messa ge is removed from t h e message se rvice cen t er. Note that the ne twork must su pport this feat ur e. Message sent as âÂÂto de fine how th e message is sent. De fault is Text . Preferred connection âÂÂYo u ca n send t ext message s usin g the normal GSM net wor k or, if su pported by the network , packet data. Reply via same ce ntre (n etwork service)âÂÂI f you select Ye s , and the recipient replie s to your me ss a ge, t he re turn me ss a ge is se nt using the sa me message ser vice center number. Some ne t works do n ot provide this opt ion. Multimedia me ssaging settings Select Men u > Messaging > Op ti ons > Settings > Multimedia m essage and from the fo llo w ing o pti on s: Image size âÂÂDefine the size of the image in a multimedia mess age. If you s ele ct Original , the image is no t scaled. MMS cr e ation mode âÂÂIf you select Gu id ed , the phone informs you if you try to send a me ssage that may not be su pport ed by t he recipie nt . T o set the phone to prevent you from sending messages that are not supported, se l ect Rest rict ed . I f you select Free , me ssage creation is not res tricted, but the recipient may n ot be able to view your message. A ccess point in use âÂÂS elect w hich acces s poin t is used a s the prefe rred connec tion for multimed ia messaging. Multimedia retrie val âÂÂTo receive multimedia messages only when you are in your home network, select Au t o i n ho m e net w. . To always receive multimedia messages, select Al ways au tomatic . To retrieve messages manually, select Manual . T o n ot receive any multimedia messages or advertisements, select Off . Allow anon. msgs. âÂÂTo re ject messages comi ng from an anonymous sender , select No . Rece ive a dver ts âÂÂDefine wheth er you w ant to allow reception of multimedia message adver tisements. Receive report âÂÂIf y ou want the s t atus of t he sent message ( Pe n d i n g , F ailed , or Del iver ed ) to be shown in Report s , select Ye s . Receiving a deliv e ry report of a multimedia me ssage t hat has be en sent to a n e -mail a ddress may not be possi ble. Deny re port s ending > Ye s â to deny se nding delivery reports
38 Message validity (network service )âÂÂIf the recipient of a message cannot be reached within the validity period, the message is removed fr om the multimedia message ce n ter. E-mail se ttings Sett ings for mailb oxes Select Men u > Messaging > Op ti ons > Settings > E- mail > Mail boxes an d a mailbox. If no mailbox set t ings have bee n defin e d before, you a re asked if you want to def ine the sett ings. Con ne cti on s ett in gs > Incomin g e-mai l and Outgoing e-ma il âÂÂTo define the correct settings, contact your e-mail service provider. User setti ngs Select Use r se tt ing s and from the following settings: My n ame âÂÂEnter the name to be displayed in outgoing e -mai l. Send message ( network servic e)âÂÂTo set wh en yo ur e- mail mes sage s are s ent, select Immediately or Dur ing nex t conn. . Send copy to se lf âÂÂSel ect Ye s to send a copy of the e-mail to the a ddress defi n ed in My e-mail address . Include signature âÂÂSe lect Ye s to attach a signature to your e-mai l messages and to c rea te or e dit a si gn at ure te xt. New e- ma i l al ert s âÂÂTo not receive alerts about new e-mail, select Off . Retrie val setti ngs Select Re trieval settings and from the follow ing set t ings: E-mail to retr ieve âÂÂTo only re t rieve headers, select Headers only . To limit how much data is retrieved, select Size limit , and ent e r the m aximum amount of da ta per messa g e in kilobytes. To re t r ieve messages and attachments, sele ct Msgs. & attachs. . The Size limit an d Msgs. & attachs. options are only available with POP3 mailboxes. Retrieval amount âÂÂTo limit the number of messages t o ret rie ve from t he inbox of the re m ote ma i lbo x, sel ec t From Inbox > No. of e-ma ils and enter the m aximum number of me ssages to retr ieve. You can al so limit the number of messages to retrieve from other subscribed f o lders in From folders (only IMAP4 mail boxes).
39 IMAP4 folder path (only IMAP4 mail boxe s)â De f ine the folder path for IM AP4 mailboxes. Folder subs cript ions (only IMAP4 mailboxes)âÂÂSelect the mai lbox folders you want to subscribe to. To subscribe to or unsubscribe from a folder, sc roll to it, and select Opti o ns > Subscribe or Cancel subscription . Autom atic re trieval Select Automa tic r etr ieval and from the following settings: E- mail no tifi catio ns âÂÂTo automatically retrieve the headers to your device when you receive a notification of new e -mail in your remote mailbox, select Auto-update or O nly in hom e netw . . E-mail retrieval âÂÂT o have e - mail headers automatically retrieved at set intervals, select Enabled , or if you onl y wa nt head ers to be re tri eved i n your home ne twork , select Only in home netw. . Headers can be aut omat ically re tr ieved f or two mailboxes at m ost. You ca n set on which days, at w hat tim es, and how frequently the header s ar e retr ieved in Retrieval days , Retrieval hours , a nd Retrieval in terval . E- mail no tifi catio ns and E-mail r etrie val c a n no t b e a c t i v e a t t h e s a m e t i m e . Service message settings Select Men u > Messaging > Op ti ons > Settings > Service message and f rom the following settings: Service messages âÂÂAllow or den y t he re ce ption of service messages. Download messages âÂÂDownload messages autom a tically or manu a lly. Cell broadcast settin gs Check with your service provide r whether cell broa dca st (network service) is available and what the available topics and re la ted topic nu m bers are. Select Men u > Messaging > Op ti ons > Settings > Cell broadcast and fr om the following settings: Reception âÂÂSel ect On or Off . Lang uage âÂÂSelect in which languages cell br oa dcast messages are received. T opic detection âÂÂTo automatically save pre vious ly unknown topic num be rs in received cell broadcast mes sa ges, select On .
40 Other sett ings Select Men u > Messaging > Op ti ons > Settings > Other and from the following setti ngs: Save sent messages â Selec t to save a c opy o f eve ry se nt t ext m essag e, mu ltime dia message, or e-mail t o the Sen t folder. Number of saved msgs. âÂÂDefin e how many sent messages are saved to the se nt items folder at a time. When the limit is reached, the oldest message is deleted. Memo ry in us e â Sel ec t w het he r to sav e m e ssa ges to t he ph one me mo ry or memo ry c ard. â Mes sage re ader With Msg. reader , you can listen t o received text, multimedia, and e-mail messages. To listen to a message in Inbox or Mailbox , scroll to the m essage or mark the messages, a nd sele ct Opti ons > Lis ten . To skip t o the ne xt m e ssage, scroll down. Tip : Wh en 1 new message or Ne w e- mai l is displayed in t h e standby mode, to listen to the re ceived messages, press and hold the lef t selection key until Msg. reader starts . 6. Cont acts You can sav e and ma nage con tact informat ion, s uch as n ames, phone num bers, and addre sses. â Manage contacts Select Men u > Contacts . To add a n ew co ntact , select Op tion s > Ne w c ont act . Fill in t h e fields you want, and s elect Do ne . To edit a contact, scroll to it, and s e lect Op tion s > Edit . To assign default numbers and addresse s t o a contact, se lect it, and select Opti o ns > Defa ult s . Scroll t o the de sire d defa u lt option, a nd select Assign .
41 To copy names and numbers from a SIM car d t o your phone, sele ct Opti ons > SIM contacts > SIM directory . Scroll to the name you want to copy or mark the desired names, and select Opti on s > Copy to Con tacts . To copy a ph one , fa x, or pager number from conta ct s to you r SIM car d, scroll to the contact you w a nt to copy, and select Opt ions > C opy > To SIM directory . To view the l ist of fixed dia ling n umbers, select Opti ons > SIM contacts > Fixed dialling . This setting is only shown if supported by you r SIM card. â Manage contact groups Create a con t act group so that you can send t ext or e - mail messages to several re cipient s at the s ame ti me. 1. S elect Menu > Cont acts . 2. Scroll to t he right, a nd select Opti ons > New group . 3. Enter a name for the group, and select the group. 4. S elect Op tio ns > Add me mbers . 5. Mark the cont acts you want to add to the group, an d select OK . â Add a ringing t one You can se t a r ingin g tone (also a video ringing tone) for e a ch contact a n d group. 1. S elect Menu > Cont acts . 2. T o add a ringi ng tone to a contact , sel ect t he con tact, Opti ons > Ri nging to ne , and the desire d ringin g tone. To add a ringing t one to a group, scroll righ t to the groups lis t , and scroll t o a contact group. Se le ct Opt ions > R i ngi ng t one and the ringing tone for t he group. To remove t he personal or group ringing tone, sele ct Def ault ton e as a ringin g ton e. â Assign speed dialing keys ⢠Speed dialing is a quick way to call frequently us ed n umbers. Y ou can assign a phone number to the spee d dialing keys, 2 to 9 . T h e 1 ke y is reserved f or the call mailbox . Speed dia ling has to be activated before using spee d dialing. To ac tivate the s peed dia ling , sel ect Menu > Settings > Phone sett. > Phone > Call > Speed dialling > On .
42 1. S elect Menu > Cont acts and a co ntact. 2. Scroll to a number, and select Op ti ons > Assign speed dial . Scroll to the desired speed dialing key, and se le ct Assi gn . When you return to the cont act information view, next to the nu mber indicates th e assigned speed dial. To call the contact by speed dialing, in the standby mode, press th e spe ed dialing key and t he call key, or pre ss a nd h old t he speed dialing ke y. 7. Galle ry Use Ga llery to sa ve and organize your images, videos, music tr a cks, sou nd clips, playlists, streaming links, .ram files, and presentations. Select Men u > Gallery . To op e n a fol de r (suc h as Images ), select it. To open a file, select it. The file ope n s in its corresponding application. The videos you dow nload or t ransfer to your phone are saved in V ideos . To a ccess Videos in the sta ndby m ode, s ele ct Vi deos , or sele ct Me nu > G allery > Vi de os , or select Menu > Media > Videos . You can tra n sfer videos t o y ou r phone from a compat ible PC, and download vide o clips from com pa tible internet vide o services to your phone using pa cke t data. â Gallery functions To set an ima ge as a w allpape r, se lect Images , and scroll to the image. Select Opti o ns > Use im age > Set as wallpape r . To assi gn the im age to a con tact, select Assign to cont act . To set a vide o as a video ringing tone, select V ideos , and scroll to the video. Select Opti o ns > Use video > Set as ringing tone . T o assign t he vide o for a contact, select Assign to cont act . To copy files to phone mem ory or to the memory card, scroll to the file or mark the files, and select Opti ons > Organise > Copy to phone mem. or Co py to me mory card . To create image or video folders and m ove files to them, select Images or Videos , and s croll to a file. Select Opti o ns > Organise > Ne w fold er and the memory, and enter a name for t he folder. Ma rk the fil es you want t o move to t he f older, a nd select Op ti ons > O rganise > Mov e t o f ol der and t he f older.
43 View vide os and images When you are viewing videos or st ill images in the phone mode, you can activate the video vie w mode. Turn t he lower pa rt of the phone 90 degrees to the left so that the camera le ns is pointing away from you. In vide o vie w mode th e display automatically changes to landscape, and you can put the phon e on the table, for example, w hile vie wing. To view the next or previous still images, press the f a st forward or rewind med ia key . To fast f o rward or re w ind the video, pres s th e fa st for w ard or rewind media key. To play or paus e the vide o, press th e play/pause/st op m edia key. To s top the video, press and h old the play/pause/stop media key. Edit images To edit image s in Ga llery , scroll to t he image, and select Op tion s > Edi t . To crop an image, select Opti o ns > Apply effect > Crop . To crop the image size manually, select Manual or a prede fin ed aspect ratio from the list. If you select Man ual , a cr oss appears in the upper le ft corne r of the image. Scroll t o se lect th e area to crop, and select Se t . Another cross appears in the lower right corne r. A gain select the area t o be cropped. To a dju st the firs t selected area, select Ba ck . Th e selected areas f orm a rectangle, w hich forms t h e cropped image. If you select ed a pr edefi ned asp ect ra tio, se lect the upp er lef t corn er of th e area to be cropped. T o resize the highlighted area, use the scroll ke y. T o freeze the se lected area, press the scr oll key. To mo ve th e area withi n th e pict ure, u se t he scroll ke y. T o select the area to be cr opped, press the scroll key. To r educe rednes s of th e eyes in an i mage, se lect Opti o ns > Apply effect > Re d eye reduct ion . Move the cross ont o the eye, and press the scroll key. A loop appears on the display. T o re si z e the loop t o fit the size of the eye, scroll up, dow n, lef t , or right. To reduce the redness, press t he scroll ke y. Shortcuts in the image editor: ⢠To view an image in the full scre en, pres s * . To r eturn t o the nor mal vi ew, pres s * aga in. ⢠To rotate an ima ge clockwise or counterclockwise, press 3 or 1 . ⢠To zoom in or out , press 5 or 0 . ⢠To move on a zoomed image, scroll up, down, left, or r ight .
44 Edi t videos To edit videos in Gallery and crea te cust om video clips, s croll to a video clip, and select Op ti ons > V ideo e dit or > Optio ns > Edit video clip . In the video editor you can see two timelines: video clip timeline and sou nd clip timeline. The images, t e xt, and transitions added to a video are shown on the video clip timeline. To switch between the timelines, scroll up or down. Modify video To modify the vide o, select from the following Edit video clip options: Cut âÂÂTrims the video clip in the cut vide o clip vie w. Add colour effect âÂÂInse rts a color eff e ct on the vide o clip. Use slow motion âÂÂSlows the speed of the vide o clip. Mute sound or Unmu te sound â Mutes or u nm utes the original vide o clip sound. Mo ve âÂÂMov es th e vid eo cl ip t o the s elec ted l ocati on. Adjust volume âÂÂAdjusts the volume level. Remove âÂÂRemoves the video clip from the video. Duplicate âÂÂMakes a copy of t h e sele ct ed video c li p. Edi t text (shown only if you added te x t)âÂÂTo m ove, remove, or duplicat e t ex t; change the color and style of the text; defin e how long it stays on the screen; a nd ad d effe cts t o th e tex t. Edit image (shown only if you added a n image)âÂÂTo move, remove, or du plicate an image; define h ow long it s t ays on t he scre e n; and se t a background or a color effect t o the image . Edit sound clip (shown only if you have a dde d a sound clip) â To cut or m ove the sound clip, to adjust its length, or to r emove or duplicat e the clip. Edi t tr an siti on âÂÂThere are t hre e t ypes of transitions: a t t he start of a video, at t he end of a vide o, and transitions between video clips. You can select start t ransition when the firs t transition of the video is active. Insert âÂÂSel ect Video clip , Image , Text , Sound clip , or New sound cli p . Mo vie âÂÂP revie w the movie in the full scr een or a s a t humbnail , sa ve or send th e movie, or cut the movie to a proper size f or s ending it in a multimedia message. To take a sna psh ot of a video clip, in the cut vide o view, se lect Opti ons > Tak e snapshot . In the thumbnail preview view, press the scroll ke y, and se l ect Take snapshot .
45 To save your video, se lect Opti ons > Mo vie > Save . To define the Memor y in use , select Op ti ons > Se ttings . To send t he video, sele ct Se n d > V ia multimedia , Via e-m ail , Via Bluetooth , or Via infrared . Contact your service provider for det a ils of the m aximum multimedi a message size that you can send. If your video is too large to send in a multimedia message, appears. Transf e r vide os from PC To transfe r videos from a compatible PC, use a com patible USB cable or Blue tooth connectivity. The requ ire ments of t he PC for video tra nsfer: ⢠Microsoft Windows XP operat ing system (or later) ⢠Nokia PC Suite 6.82 or la ter ⢠Nokia Video Manager application (a add-on application to PC Suit e ) To transfer videos use N okia Video Manager, connect the compatible USB cable or activate Bluetooth con n ection, and sele ct PC Suite as th e connection m ode. To change t he default U SB connection mode, se lect Menu > Settings > Connectivity > USB > USB mode . Nokia Video Manager is opt imized for transcoding and t ransfering video files. For information about transfe ring video with Nokia Video Manager, see t he Nokia Video Manager help. Download files Select Men u > Gallery , the folder f or the file type you want to download, a nd the download function (for example, Images > Downl. graphics ). The browser opens. Choose a bookmark f or the site to dow n load from . 8. Musi c p lay er Warning: L i sten to mu sic at a moderat e level. Continuous e xposure to high vo lume m a y d a m a g e y o u r h e a r i n g . D o n o t ho l d t h e d e v i c e ne a r y o u r e a r w he n t he loudspea ker is in use, because the volume may be e xtremely loud. To activ ate music m ode a nd st art Music playe r , turn the lower part of the phone to the right so that the playback control keys ar e on th e sa m e side as t h e displa y.
46 You can li sten to mus ic al so when the Offline profile is activated. See âÂÂOffline profile,â p. 17. To add songs to your device, see âÂÂTransfer music,â p. 4 8. For more information about copyright protecti on , see âÂÂActivation keys,â p. 9 8 . â Listen to music 1. A cti va te the m usi c m ode . 2. In Music me nu , select the category, such as All s ongs or Albums . 3. Select the music you w a nt to play. Use the media ke ys to con t rol p layback. ⢠Press the play/pause/stop key to play or pause a song. Press and hold the key t o stop the playba ck. ⢠Press t he rewin d key to rewind the song or to skip backwards. ⢠Press t he f a st for ward key to fast for ward the song or to skip forward. You can also us e the scroll key to cont rol t he player . To adjust the volu m e, use the volu m e ke y. To switch random play ( ) on or off, select Opt io ns > Shuffle . To re pe at the current song ( ) , al l songs ( ) , or to swit ch repeat off, select Opti o ns > Repeat . To modify the tone of the music playback, select Opti ons > Equaliser . To modify the bala nce loudness or st ereo widening, select Op tio ns > Audio settings . To view a visualization during playba ck, select Op tio ns > Star t visualisation . To retu rn to the standby mode and leave th e playe r in the ba ckground, pres s the end ke y. I f Active stan dby is On , the currently playing song is displa yed in the standby mode. To a ccess the music player from the standby mode, se lect th e currently playing s ong. To s w itch to another ope n applica tion, pres s and hold Menu . â Music menu To s elec t more mus i c to p lay in Now playing vie w, select Opti ons > Go t o Mu sic menu . To return to the Now p layi ng vie w, select Op tion s > Go to Now playing .
47 The music menu sh ow s the music a vailable in the phone and com pa tible memory card (i f inserted). All so ngs lists al l music. To vie w sorted songs, sele ct Albums , Artist s , Genres , or Com posers . To view playlists, select Playlists . To re fresh t he l ib r ary af ter you have upda ted t he song select ion in your ph one, select Op ti ons > Refresh Mu si c l ibrary . â Playlists To view and manage playlists, in the music menu, select Playlists . The following playlists appear a u tomatically: Most played tracks , R ecently played songs , a nd Recent additions . To view details of t he playlist, select Opti o ns > Playlist details . Creat e a pl aylis t 1. S elect Op tio ns > Cre ate playlist . 2. E nt er a name for th e pla ylist, and se lect OK . 3. S elec t arti sts to find t he so ngs y ou want to inc lude i n the play list. Press the scroll key to add items. T o show the song list un der a n artist title, s croll right. To hide the song list, scroll left. 4. When you have made your selections, select Done . If a com patible m emory card is inserted, the playlist is saved t o the memory card. To add more songs later, when viewing the playlist, select Op tion s > Add s ongs . To add songs , album s, a rt ists, gen res, a nd composers t o a playlist from the diff erent v iews of the m usic menu , select an i tem and Opt ions > Add to a playlist > Saved playlist or New playlist . To remove a song from a playlist, select Opti on s > Remo ve from pl aylis t . This deletion does not delete the song from the phone ; it on l y re moves it fr om the playlist. To reorder songs in a play li s t , scrol l to the song you want to move, and sele ct Opti o ns > Reorder list > Gr ab , scroll to a new position, and select Drop . â Mu sic sh op In th e music sh op (network service ) you can sear ch, browse, and pu rchase music for downloading to your phone . T h e variety and a ppearance of mu sic shop services may vary. For m ore information and availability of m usic shop, contact your service proder.
48 You must have music shop se ttings and valid internet conn ections in order to use this service. For more details, see â Music shop set t ings,â p. 48, and â Access points,â p. 78. To go to mu sic sh op, in th e Musi c player , selec t Op ti ons > Go to Musi c shop Music shop se t tings The availability and appearance of the music shop settings may vary. The settings ma y al so be p red ef in ed, an d y ou c an no t ed it th e m. In the music sh op, you may be able to edit the se t tings by sele cting Opti ons > Se ttin gs . If the sett in gs are not predefined, you may be asked to en t er the f ol lowing setti ngs: Addre ss âÂÂY ou mu st define t he w e b address of t he music shop s e rvice. Default acc. pt. âÂÂSel ec t t he ac ce ss p oi nt to us e w hen co nne c tin g to th e mus ic shop. User nam e âÂÂEnte r your user na me for t he mus ic shop. Pa s s w o r d âÂÂEnter your pa ssword f or the music shop. If User name and P assword fields are le ft empty, y ou may have to enter th em at login. â Tr a n sf e r m us i c You can buy music protected with WM DRM from online music shops, and transfer the mu si c to y our ph one . To transfe r m usic from a compatible PC or other compatible device s, use a compatible USB cable or Bluetooth connectivity. You can also IR connection. For details, s e e âÂÂBluetooth con n ection,âÂÂ, p. 84, or âÂÂInfra re d,â p. 92. Y ou cann ot transfer WMDRM protected mu sic files using Bluetooth or I R connection. To re fresh t he l ib r ary af ter you have upda ted t he song select ion in your ph one, i n the Mus ic menu , se l ect Optio ns > Refresh Music librar y The requ ire ments of t he PC for music purch ase a nd tr a nsfer: ⢠Microsoft Windows XP operat ing system (or later) ⢠Compatible version of Windows Me dia Player application ⢠Nokia PC Suite 6.82 or la ter
49 Transfer music f rom PC You can us e thre e diff erent methods to t ransfer mus ic: ⢠To view your ph one on a PC as a n external hard drive wh ere you can transfer any data files, m a ke the connection wi t h a compatible USB cable or Blu e tooth connectivity. If you are using t he USB cable, sele ct Da ta tran sf er as the connection mode. A compa tible memo ry car d needs to be i nsert ed in the p hone. You cann ot transfer WMDRM protected mu sic files using D ata tra nsfe r . ⢠To synchronize music with Windows Me dia Player, connect t he compatible USB cable and select Media player as t h e connection mode. A com pa tible memo ry ca rd need s to be ins erted i n th e phon e. To use Nokia Music Manager in Nokia PC Suit e, connect the compa tible USB cable or a ctivate Bluetooth connection, and select PC Suit e a s the connec tion mode. You cannot tr a nsfer WMDRM protecte d m usic files usin g PC Suite . To change t he default U SB connection mode, se lect Menu > Settings > Connectivity > USB > USB mode . Both Windows Media Player and Nokia Music Manager in Nokia PC Suite have been opti m ized f or transfer ring music file s. For infor mation about tra nsferring music with Nokia Music Ma nager, se e the Nokia PC Suit e user guide. Music tr ansfer with Windows Me dia Player The fun ct ionality of t he music synch ronization may vary be tween differen t versions of t he Windows Media Pla yer application. For m or e information, se e the corresponding Windows Media Player gu ide s and helps. 9. Media â Visual Radio You can us e the Visual Radi o appl icati on as an FM ra dio w ith au tomatic tu ning and preset st a tions or w ith parallel v isual information related to the radio program if you tune in to st a tions that offer Visual Ra d io serv i ce. T he Visua l Radio se rvice us es packe t data (n etwork ser vice) . To use t h e Visu a l Radio service, the following requirements must be m et:
50 ⢠The radio station and your service provider m ust su pport t his service. ⢠Your intern e t access poin t must be defined for a ccess to the network operatorâÂÂs Visual Radio server. ⢠The radio station m ust have th e correct Visual Radio service ID defined and have Visual Radio se rvice enabled. Visual Radio ca nnot be sta rt ed when t he phone is in th e offline mode. The FM radio depends on an a ntenna other than the wir eless device antenna. A compa tible headset or enhanc ement needs to be atta ched to the device for the FM radio to function properly. Warning: L i sten to music a t a moderat e level. Continuous e xposure to high vo lume m a y d a m a g e y o u r h e a r i n g . D o n o t ho l d t h e d e v i c e ne a r y o u r e a r w he n t he loudspea ker is in use, because the volume may be extrem ely loud. You can make a call or answer an incoming call while listening to the radio. The radio is turned off when there is an act ive call. To open Vi su al Radio, select Me nu > Me dia > R adio . To turn th e radio off , select Ex it . Tune a nd save a r a di o station To start the stat ion search wh en the r a dio is on, s e lect or . Searching stops when a station is found. To sa ve the station, select Op t i ons > Save station . S e lec t a locat ion for the st ation . En ter the n ame o f the st ation , and select OK . Radi o functions To adjust th e volume, pres s the volume keys. Select or to scroll t o the next or previous saved st a tion. The buttons are inactive if there a re n o saved stations. Whe n usin g a co mpatib le he adse t, pres s the h eadset key to s croll to th e next saved radio station. To save th e cur rent station, sele ct Optio ns > Save station , a preset position, and ent er the st at io n nam e . To s et the stat ion fr equency manuall y, sel ect Optio ns > Ma nual tuning . To listen t o the ra dio in the background and go to the st a ndby mode, se lect Opti o ns > Play in background .
51 Station l ist When the radio is on, select Op tion s > Stations . The station list is used for managing the saved r a dio stations. Stat ion s etup Scroll to a s t ation in the station list, pr es s the scroll key, and select Edi t to ch ang e the s ta ti on pa ra me ter s. View visu al cont ent To check availability and cost s, and to s ubscr ibe to t he service, cont a ct your service provider. To view visu a l content of the current stat io n, s e lect . If the visual se rvice ID w as not sa ved in the station list , you are asked f or the visual service ID. Enter t he visual service I D, and select OK . If you do not have the visual service ID, select Retri eve to access t he stat ion directory (network se rvice). To e nd th e v isua l conte n t fee d bu t n ot th e FM rad io, sel ec t Close . To set ligh t settings a nd th e power save r time-out, select Op tion s > Di spl ay settings . Visual Radio setti ngs When the radio is on, select Op tion s > Settings and the following: Start-up tone âÂÂto e nable or disable t he start - up tone Auto-st art service âÂÂto e nable or disable the automatic display of visual content Acces s poin t âÂÂto select the access point Station d ir ec tory With the station direct ory (network service) you can select Visual Radio enabled or traditional radio stations from a list, grou pe d in folders. To check availability and cost s, and to s ubscr ibe to t he service, cont a ct your service provider. Acc ess fro m the visua l c ontent vi ew To re tr ie ve the visual service ID and to start visual conten t for the c urrently t uned radio sta t ion, select and Retrieve . Af ter t he con nec tio n to the stat io n
52 directory is established, select the nearest location to your current position from a list of f olders, and pre ss the scroll key. The device compares the frequen cie s of the listed radio stations with t h e currently tune d in f requenc y. If a matchi ng frequ ency is foun d, the visual servic e ID of the tuned radio st a tion is displa yed. Select OK to start viewing the vis ua l content. If there is mor e than one radio sta t ion with matching fr equencies, the radio stations and their visual service ID are displa yed in a list. Select the des ired radio station. The tuned radio station a nd the vis ual serv i ce ID are displayed. Select OK to start vie wing the vis u al content. Acce ss from op tions To access the station directory ( ne twork service) from the station list, sele ct Opti o ns > St ation dire ct ory . Aft e r the co nne cti on to th e stat io n di re cto ry , se lec t th e n ea res t loc a tio n to yo ur current position from a list of loca tions. Radio stations that provide visual con tent are indicated with . Select the des ire d radio s t ation and from the following options: Listen âÂÂto tune to the high lig hted ra dio st ation. To c onfirm the f requenc y sett ing, select Yes . Start visual service â to open t he visual content of the sele cted radio station (if avai lable ) Save âÂÂt o save t h e details of the selected radio sta t ion to the st a tion list Deta il s âÂÂto vie w chann el infor mation â Camera To activat e the ca mera mode while in th e phone mode, t urn the lower part of t he phone 90 degrees t o the left so t hat the camera le ns is pointing away fr om you when you look at t he display. To take a self por tr ait, t urn the lower part of t he phone 90 degrees to th e right so that the camera lens is pointing t ow ard you when you look at th e display. on the upper lef t of th e display indicates t h e still image mode. To capture an imag e, press th e ca pt ure key. You can al so capture an image by pressing t he scroll key. The image is sa ved to Images in Galler y , and the im age is displayed. To return to the viewfinder, s elect Back . T o del ete the im a ge , pre ss th e clear key.
53 To zoom in or ou t, press the fa st forward or re w ind m edia key. To capture images se que ntially, select Opti ons > Sequence mode > On , or press 4 . When you press t he scr oll ke y, the came ra captures six images in short intervals and d ispl ays the im age s in a gri d. To t urn the fla sh on, s elect Opti on s > Flash > On . If you select Au tomatic , flash is us ed aut omatic ally when n eces sary. Keep a saf e dis tance when us ing the flas h. D o not us e the flash on people o r a ni mals at close ra nge . Do n ot c ove r th e fla sh whi le tak ing a pic tur e. In dim lighting, to use n ight mode, select Opti ons > Night mode > On , or press 1 . To us e the s elf-t imer, selec t Opti ons > Self-t imer and the time y ou wa nt th e camera to wait bef ore capturing the image. Press t he scroll ke y, a nd the t imer starts. To adjust the white balance or color tone, select Op tio ns > Ad jus t > White balance or Colour tone . To record a video, select Opt ions > Vide o mode , or scroll right . on the u pper left of the display in dicates the video mode. To start the recording, press t he capture ke y or t he scroll key. To pause the recor ding, press the capture key. To stop the r ecordin g, pre ss and hold the capture key. To use the pa norama mode, sele ct Opti o ns > P anorama mode , or scroll right. on the u pp er left of the display indicates t he panorama mode . Press the capture key t o start capt u ring a panorama image. The panorama preview is shown on the display. Tur n slowly to the right or le ft. Y ou cann ot ch a nge the direction. You turn t oo fast if the arrow on the display is red. To stop the panorama, pres s the capt ure ke y again . Came ra settings Your device supports an ima ge capture resolution of 1600 x 1 200 pixels. You can change camera settings for still images. In the camera mode, select Opti o ns > Settings > Image and fr om the following s e ttings: Image quality and I mage resolution âÂÂThe better th e image quality and the high e r the resol utio n, th e mo re memory th e imag e cons umes. Show captured image âÂÂTo not displa y th e image after capturing, select No . Default image name âÂÂC ha ng e ho w the ca ptu r ed i ma ge s ar e n am ed . Memo ry in us e âÂÂSel ect whe ther y ou want t o sa ve you r imag es in t he p hone memo ry or on the memory c ard.
54 You can change ca me ra s e ttings for vide os. In the camera mode , select Op t i ons > Se ttin gs > Vide o and from the following set t ings: Lengt h âÂÂIf set to Max im um , the length of t he re corde d video is only restricted by the avai lable memory . If set to Short , the recording time is optimized for MMS sending. Video resolution âÂÂSelect b etween two video resolu t ions. Default video name âÂÂSe lect how th e vide o cl ips ar e named . Memo ry in us e âÂÂSelect whether you want t o save your video clips in t he phone memo ry or on the memory c ard. â Movie director A muvee is a s hort, edited video clip that can contain video, image s, music, and text. Quick m uvee is cre ated automatically by Mo vie director after you se lect the st yle f or the m uvee . Movie director us es the d efault musi c and t ext a ssocia ted with the chose n style. In a cu stom muvee you ca n select your own video and music clips, images and style, and add an opening a nd closing message. You can se nd muvees with MM S. A muvee can be saved in Gallery in .3gp file format. To create muve es, select Me nu > Media > Movi e . Mark images and vide os, and select Op ti ons > Cre ate muvee . Create a qui ck mu vee 1. To creat e a quick muvee, select Menu > Media > Mo vie . Se lect the videos for the muvee, and scroll right to select t he images, and select Op tio ns > Cr eate muve e . 2. S elec t a sty le fo r the muvee f rom t he sty le l ist. Create a cu sto m mu vee 1. To creat e a a cus tom muvee, s ele ct Menu > Media > Movi e . Select the videos for the muvee, and scroll right to se lect the images, and select Opti on s > Create muvee . The style se l ection view open s. 2. Scroll to t he desire d style, and select Opti ons > Customise . 3. In Videos & images , reorder and edit the selected items, or add or remove items from your muvee. You can define the order in wh ich the f ile s are played in the
55 muvee. Select the file you want to move . Scroll to the file below which you want to place t he marked file , and press the scroll key. To add or re move images a nd videos from the m uvee, select Op tio ns > A dd/Remove . In Music , select the music for the muvee. To add albums and thei r con tent to t he muvee, in t he image or vide o clip list view, select Op tion s > Albums . In Message you can add an open ing and closing text to a muvee. In Le ngt h , you can de fine th e length of t he muvee. Se lect from th e following: Multime dia message âÂÂto o ptimiz e th e leng th of t he muv ee for MMS sendi ng Auto -selec t âÂÂto include all the selected images and video clips in the muvee Same as music âÂÂto set the muvee du ration to be the s a me as t he chosen m usic clip User define d âÂÂto de fine the lengt h of the muvee 4. S elect Op tio ns > Cre at e m uve e . The pre view view ope ns. 5. To preview the custom muvee before saving it , select Opti ons > Play . 6. To sa ve the m uvee, sele ct Opti on s > Save . To create a new custom muvee by usin g the same styl e settings, sele ct Opti ons > Recreate . Sele ct content To edit the selected video clips, in t he Videos & images folder, select Op tion s > Select contents . You can se lect wh ich pa rt s of t he video clip you want to include or exclu de in the mu vee. In the sli de, g reen indic ates inclu ded, r ed in dicat es excluded, and gre y indicates neutral parts. To include a part of the video clip in the muvee, scr oll to the part, and se le ct Opti o ns > Include . To ex clude a part , select Opti ons > Exc lude . To ex clude a shot, select Op ti ons > Exc lude sh ot . To let Movie dir ector randomly include or e x clude a certa i n part of the video clip, scroll t o the part, and select Opt io ns > Mark as ne utral . To randomly include or exclude parts of t he clip, select Optio ns > Mark all as neu tral . Sett ings In the s tyle sele ct ion view, sele ct Optio ns > Customise > Settin gs to edi t th e following options: Memo ry in us e âÂÂSelect where to s a ve your m uvees.
56 Resolution â Select the res olut ion of you r muvees . Sele ct Auto matic to use t he optimal resolution ba sed on t he number and length of the video clips you have select e d. Defaul t muve e name âÂÂSe t a de fault name f or the m uvees. â Videos To access t he videos folder in Gallery , select Menu > Me dia > V i deos . â Recorde r The voice r e corder allows you t o recor d phone conversations and voice m emos. If you record a phone con versation, all pa rties hear a beeping sou nd during recording. Recorded files are stored in Gallery . See â Gal lery ,â p. 42. Select Men u > Me dia > Rec or der . To r ecord a sou nd clip, select Opti ons > Record sound clip , or select . To listen to the recording, select . â RealPlayer With RealPlayer, you can play m e dia files such a s video clips saved in the phone memory or memory ca rd, or s t ream media files over t he air by opening a streaming link. RealPlayer does not su pport all file formats or all t he varia t ions of file formats. To open RealPlayer, select Menu > Media > Re alPlayer . To play a me dia file, select Opti o ns > Open > Most recent clips or Saved clip . To s tre am con t ent o ve r t h e air : ⢠Select a streaming link saved in the gallery. ⢠Open a streaming link while browsing th e web. To st ream l iv e cont ent, you must first c onfi gure your d efaul t acce ss point . See â Access points, â p. 78. Cont act your serv ice provi der for more i nforma tion. In RealPlayer, you can only open an rtsp:// URL address. You ca nn ot open an ht t p:/ / URL addr es s; howev er, Re alPlay er re cogn izes an h ttp link to a .ram file si nce a .ram file is a text file containing an rtsp link. Warning: Do not hold the device nea r you r ear when the loud speaker is in use, because t he v olume may be extremely l oud.
57 With RealPlayer, you can play m e dia files such a s video clips saved in the phone memory or memory ca rd, or s t ream media files over t he air by opening a streaming link. To open RealPlayer, se lect Menu > Media > Re alPlayer . RealPlayer does not su pport a ll file for m ats or a ll t he variations of file formats. Play media file s To play a media file in RealPlayer, select Opti o ns > Open and from the following: Most recent clips âÂÂto play me dia files t hat you have recently played Saved clip âÂÂto play m edia files saved in the phone or me mory ca rd To s tre am con t ent o ve r t h e air : ⢠Select a streaming link saved in the gallery. A conn e ction to the streaming ser ver is esta blis hed. ⢠Open a streaming link while browsing th e web. To st ream l iv e cont ent, you must first c onfi gure your d efaul t acce ss point . See â Acce ss point s,â p. 78. Many service provid ers re quire y ou to use an int ernet access point (IAP) for your default acce ss point. Other service providers allow you to use a WAP access point . Contact your service provider f or m ore information. In RealPlayer, you can only open an rtsp:// URL address. You ca nn ot open an ht t p:/ / URL addr es s; howev er, Re alPlay er re cogn izes an h ttp link to a .ram file si nce a .ram file is a text file containing an rtsp link. Warning: Do not hold the device nea r you r ear when the loud speaker is in use, because t he v olume may be extremely l oud. Shortc uts during play Scroll up t o seek forward or down to see k back in the media file. Press t he volume ke ys to in crease or decrease th e soun d volu me. â Flash Play er With Flash Pla yer , you can view, play, and interact with flash files made for mobile devices. Select Men u > Me dia > Flash Player . To open a folder or play a flash file , select it.
58 10 . P e r s o n a l i z a t i o n â Themes To change t h e look of your phon e display, act ivate a theme. A theme can include the standby mode wallpaper and powe r saver. You can edit a theme to personalize your phone furth er. Select Men u > P ersonalis. > Themes . T o se e a lis t o f the available themes, select General . T he acti ve theme is indicat ed by a check mark. To p revie w a theme , scro ll to t he theme , a n d se lect Opt io ns > Preview . To ac tiva te the previ ewed t heme, sele ct Set . In Them es , you can also set the menu view type , set a custom wallpaper, an d personalize the l ook of t he power saver. Audi o theme To apply or e dit an audio th e me, select Menu > P e rsonalis. > Th emes > Audio them es . To apply an audio theme, select Active audio theme and the desir ed the me. You can per sonal ize t he sound s ass ociat ed with an eve nt o r functi on. To s av e th e p ers on al iz ed t he m e, i n the Audio theme s main vie w , select Opti o ns > Sa ve th eme and enter a name f or the t heme. â Profiles In Profiles , you can a dju st a n d personalize t he phon e tones for different events, environments, or ca ller groups. You can see t he currently se lected profile at the top of the displa y in t he standby mode . If the Ge neral profile is in use, only the cur ren t date is s hown. Select Men u > P ersonalis. > Profiles . To activate t h e profile, se lect t he profile and Ac ti va t e . Tip: To quickly change to Silent profile from any ot h er profile , in the standby mode , press a nd hold # . To personalize a profile , select the profile, P ersonalise and from th e following options:
59 Ringi ng tone âÂÂTo set the ringing tone for voice calls, choose a ringing tone from the list. Pre ss a ny key to stop the soun d. Y ou can a lso change ringing tones in contacts. See âÂÂA dd a ringing tone,â p. 41. Video call tone âÂÂSelect the rin ging tone for video calls. Say caller's name âÂÂSe lect On to ha ve the p ho n e say the ca ller âÂÂs na me whe n t he phone is ringing. Ringing type âÂÂW hen As ce n di ng is selected, the ringing volume starts from level one and increases level by level to th e set volume level. Ringing volume âÂÂSet the volume level for the r ingin g and message alert tones. Message alert tone âÂÂS et th e alert tone for t ext a nd mul timed ia me ssages . E-mail alert to ne âÂÂSet the al ert tone for e-ma il message s. Vibrating alert âÂÂS et the p hone to vi brat e to a lert for incomin g calls and me ssages. Keypad tones âÂÂSet the volum e level for keypad tones. War n i n g to n e s âÂÂActivate or deactivate warning tones. Ale rt for âÂÂSe t the phon e to r ing on ly upon calls f rom phone numbers that belong to a sele ct ed contact grou p. Phone calls coming from people out side the sele ct ed group have a sile nt a lert . Profile name âÂÂName the profile. This setting is not s h own for the General and Offline profiles. When using th e Offline profile, the phone is n ot connected to the G SM network. If no SIM card is installed, to use some functions of t he phone, start th e ph one in Offline . Import a nt: In the offline profile you cannot make or receive any calls, or use other features tha t require cellular ne twork coverage. Calls may still be possible to the official emergency number programm ed into your device. To make calls, y ou must first activ ate the phone function by changing profile s. If the device has been locked, enter t he lock co de. â 3-D tones With 3-D to nes you c a n app ly thr ee-dime nsional sound effect s to ring ing to nes. Not all ringing tones support 3-D effects. To edit 3-D tone settings, sele ct Menu > P ersonalis. > 3- D to nes . To en a ble the 3 -D e ffects , sel ect 3-D t one s > On . To change the rin gi ng to n e, select R inging t one and the des ired ringing tone.
60 To change the 3-D effect that is a pplied to the ringing t on e, select Sound tra je ctor y and the desired ef fe ct. To m odify the effect, sele ct T ra jec to ry sp ee d , Doppler effect , o r Reverberation . Doppler effect may not be available for all effects. To l is ten to th e r in gin g to ne wi th th e 3 -D eff ect , sel ec t Opti ons > Pl ay t on e . If you ena ble the 3-D tone s but d o not s elect any 3 -D ef fect, st ereo wideni ng is applied to the ringing tone. 11 . W e b â Mobil e Sear ch Use Mobile Search to get a ccess to search engines, and find and connect to local services, websites, images, and mobile content. You can use t he application to find and ca ll local restaurants and sh ops, and use the advanced mapping technology to assist you in f inding their location. Select Men u > Web > Searc h . When you open Mobile Search, a list of categories is dis pla yed. Select a category (fo r exa mple, images ), and ente r your text into the search field . Sel ect Search . The search re sults are dis pla yed on t he screen. For additional h elp and inst ructions on the application, select Opti ons > Help . For more information on t he application, visit a ls o ww w.mobilesearch.nokia.com/. â We b To browse web pages wr itten in X HTML, WML, or H T ML, select Men u > Web > Browse r , or press and hold 0 in the st andby m ode. Check the availability of se rvices, pricing, and tariffs w ith your service pr ovider . Service providers also give you instruct ions on how t o use the ir services. Set up the phone fo r the brow ser ser vice Your device may con figur e the WAP or internet access point automatically ba sed on your SI M card. You can us e Settings wizard to configure W AP or inter n et access point settings. See âÂÂSettin gs wizard,â p. 8 0.
61 You may receive service settings in a configuration message fr om the service provider. To define a n access poin t manua lly, se e Access point s in âÂÂConn ectio n,â p. 78. Make a connection To access w eb pages, do th e follow ing: ⢠Select the home page ( ) of your ser vice provider. ⢠Select a bookm a rk from the bookmarks view. ⢠In the bookmarks view , en ter the address of the web page, and sele ct Go t o . Bookmarks Your device may have preinsta lled bookmarks and links for third-par ty internet sites. You may al so access ot her third- party site s thro ugh your device . Thir d-party s ites are n ot affiliated with Nokia, and Nok ia does not e ndorse or assume liabili ty for them. If you choose to acces s such site s, you sh ould t ake preca ut ions for se curity or content. Bookmarks are indicat ed by the following icons: The st a rting pa ge defin ed for the default a ccess poin t. The automatic bookmarks folde r contains bookmarks ( ) that are collec t ed automatically when y o u browse pa ge s. Any bookmark showing t he tit le or internet address of the bookmark. and may be replaced with the websiteâÂÂs icon. Add boo k marks m anua lly 1. In the bookm arks view, select Opti ons > B ookmark manager > Add bookmark . 2. Fill in the fields. 3. S elect Op tio ns > Save . Send bookmark s Scroll to a bookmark or mark several bookmarks, s elect Opt ions > Tools > Send and an option. Co nnection securit y If the security indicator is displayed during a connection, the data transmission between the device a nd the internet gateway or server is encrypted.
62 The security icon does not indicate that the data transmiss ion between the gateway and the conten t server (or pla ce where t he reques ted resou rce is s t or ed) is se cure. Th e service provider secures the data tra nsmission between the gatewa y and the content server. To view details a bout the conn e ction, encrypti on statu s, and informat io n about ser ve r a ut hen tic a tio n, se lec t Op ti ons > T ools > P age info . Securit y features ma y be required for some services, such as banking se rvices. For such connect ions you need security cer tificates. For more inf ormation , cont act your service prov i der. See a lso âÂÂCertificate management,â p. 74. Browse web p a ges Keys a nd co mmands for brow sing To open a link, make selections, or check box e s, press t he scr oll ke y. To go to t he previous page while brow sin g, sele ct Back . I f Back is not available, select Op ti ons > N avigation options > Histor y t o vie w a chronological list of the pages visite d during a browsing session. To ch oose the desired page, scroll le ft or right, and sele ct it. The history list is cle are d e ach time a session is closed. To save a bookmark wh i le browsing, sele c t Opti o ns > Save as bookmark . To r et ri eve the l a test co nt ent fro m the s erv er , se lec t Opti on s > Navigat ion options > Reload . To open t he browser toolbar, scroll to an empty par t of th e page, and press the scroll key. Keypa d shor tcuts w hile br owsin g 1 âÂÂOpen your bookmarks. 2 âÂÂSearch for keyw ords in t he current pa ge . 3 âÂÂRe turn t o the p revi ous p a ge . 5 âÂÂList all open windows. 8 âÂÂShow the page overview of the current page. Press 8 again to zo om i n an d view the desire d se ction of the page. 9 âÂÂEnt er a new web addres s. 0 âÂÂG o to the star t pag e. * or # âÂÂZoom the page in or out.
63 Mi ni ma p Min i ma p helps you navigate web pages t hat contain la rge amount of information. Set Min i ma p on in browser settings. Se e âÂÂBrowse r settings,â p. 64. Scroll through a large w eb pa ge, and Min i m a p opens and displays an ove rview of the web page you are browsing. To move in Mi ni map , scroll. When you stop scrolling, Mini map disappears and t he area outlined in Mi ni ma p is displayed. Page overview With P age o vervi ew , you ca n move more qu ickly to the des ired part of a web page. Page overview may not be a vailable on all pa ges. To show the page overview of the cu rrent page, press 8 . To find the desired spot on the page, scroll up or down. Press 8 again to zoom in and view the desir ed section of the page. Web feeds and blogs Web feeds a re .xml file s on we b pages that are widely used to share t he latest entr y headlines or full text , for exa mple, recent news in th e form of news feeds. Blogs or weblogs a re web diaries . M ost of the web feeds use RSS a nd ATOM technologies. The browser a utomatically detects if a web pa ge contain s w eb fee ds. To subscribe to a w eb f e ed, sel ec t Op t i ons > Subscribe a nd a feed, or click on th e link. To vie w the web fe eds you h a ve subs cribe d to, in t he bookm a rks view , select Web feeds . To update a web fe ed, select it, and Opti ons > Refresh . To define how the we b feeds are updated, select Optio ns > Settings > We b f ee d s . Sav ed pages You can save pa ges a n d view them later offline. To save a page while brows ing, select Opti ons > Tools > Save page . To o pen t he Saved pages view, in t he bookmarks view, select Saved pages . To open a page, sele ct it. To star t a con ne ction to t he browser service and retrieve the page again, select Opti o ns > N avigation options > Reload . T he phone st ays on line after you reload the page. Download You can download ite ms su ch as ringing tones, images, operat or logos, software, and video clips u sin g the mobile br ow ser.
64 Once downloaded, items are handle d by the respective applications on your phone, for e xample , a dow nloaded photo is saved in Gallery . Import a nt: O nly in stall and use applications and other software from trusted sources, such as applicat ions that are Symbian Signed or have passed the Java Ve rif ie d TM testing. End a connection To end the connect ion and vie w the browser page offline, select Opt ions > Tools > Di sconnect . To quit browsing and to return to t he standby mode , select Opt ion s > Exit . Empty the cache A cache is a me mory location that is us ed to store data tempo rarily. If you have tried to access or have a ccessed c onfidential informa tion requiring passwords, empty the cache after each us e. The i nformati on or serv ices you have acces sed are s tored in the cac he. To empt y th e cache, sel ect Menu > Web > Br o wser > Option s > Cle ar privacy data > Clear cache . To clear a ll privacy da ta, including the cache, cookies, form data pa sswords, and browsing history, select Menu > We b > Browser > Opti on s > Clear privacy data > All . Browser settings Select Optio ns > Settings > Ge neral , P age , Privacy or Web f ee d s , and from the following: Gene ral Acces s poin t âÂÂSel ect t he d efault acces s po int. Homepage âÂÂDefine the address of the desired homepage. Min i ma p âÂÂSet on or off. History list âÂÂSelect whether a list of the pages you have visited during the curr ent browsing session ar e displa ye d when you s ele ct Back . Securit y warnin gs â Hide or sh ow security not ifications. Java/Ecma Script âÂÂEnable or dis a ble the use of scripts.
65 Page Load images and sounds âÂÂSel ect w hether to v iew pic tures and h ear so unds w hen you are brow sing. If you select No , t o later load images and sounds during browsing, select Opti on s > Tools > Load images . Screen size âÂÂChoose how to use the display area for viewing pages. Defaul t enco ding âÂÂWhe n you selec t Automa tic , th e br ows er au to ma tica l ly tr ie s t o choose the correct character encoding. Block pop-ups âÂÂAllow or block a u tomatic opening of different pop-ups while browsing. Automatic reload âÂÂEnable or disa ble automatic ref re sh of brow ser pages. Font size âÂÂS ele ct th e font size . Priv acy Auto. bookmarks âÂÂSe lect On if you want the bookmarks to be automatically sa ved in th e Auto. bookmarks folder when you visit a page. When you select Hi de folder , the bookmarks are st ill automatically added to t he folde r. Form data saving âÂÂIf you do not want t he data you e nt er t o different f orms on a web page to be sa v e d and used n e xt time the page is entered, select Off . Cookies âÂÂEna ble or dis a ble the receivin g a nd sen din g of cookie s (a me a ns for co nte nt pro vi de rs to i den t ify u s ers an d th eir pr efe r enc e s for fre q uen tly u sed content). Web fe eds Automatic updates âÂÂDefine whether you want the web feeds t o be updat ed automatically or n ot , and how oft en you want to update them. Setting th e application to retrieve w eb feeds automatically may involve t he transmission of large amounts of da ta through your service pr ovider' s ne tw ork. Conta ct your service provider for information about data transm ission charges. Acc. poin t for auto-update âÂÂSe lect the desired access point for updating (onl y avai lable wh en Automatic updates is on). 12. Organi zer â Clock Select Men u > Organiser > Clock .
66 Clock settin gs To change the time or dat e, select Op tion s > Se ttings . F or m ore i n for m at i on ab o u t the setti ngs, s ee âÂÂD ate and time,â p . 73. Set an alarm 1. To se t a new alarm , scroll right to Alar m , and select Opti ons > New alarm . 2. Ent er the alarm time, selec t wheth er a nd w hen th e alar m is repe ated, and select Do ne . When an alar m is a ctiv e, is shown . To ca nce l an al arm , scr oll to the alar m, an d selec t Optio ns > Remove alarm . T o deac tiva te a repe ated ala rm, sele ct Op tio ns > D eact ivate alarm . Turn o ff the alarm Select Stop to t urn off the a larm. Select Snooze to st op th e alar m for 5 m inutes , after which i t res umes. If the alarm time is r eached while the device is switched off, th e device switches itse lf on and starts sou nding the alarm tone. If you s elect Stop , th e device asks whether yo u want to activate th e device fo r calls. Sele ct No to switch off the device or Ye s to m ake and receive calls. Do not select Yes when wire less phon e use m ay caus e interfe rence or da nger. World clock To open the world clock v iew, scroll right t o Wor l d . To add cities to t he list, select Opti o ns > Add city . To set you r cu rren t city, scroll to a city, and select Opti ons > Set as curre nt city . The city is displayed in the clock main vie w, and the time in your device is changed according to t h e city sele cted. Chec k t hat t he time is corr ect and matches your tim e zo ne . â Calendar Select Men u > Organiser > Calen dar . In the calen da r, you ca n kee p t rack of your appointments, meetings, birt hdays, ann iversar ie s, and oth er ev ent s. You can also s et a cal enda r alar m to rem ind yo u of upc oming even ts.
67 Create calen dar entr ies 1. S elect Op tio ns > New en t ry an d an en try t ype. Anni versary ent rie s are r epeat ed ev ery yea r. 2. Fill in the fields. Repeat âÂÂPress the scroll key to change the e nt ry to be repeated. A repeating entry is indicated by in the day view. Repe a t unt il âÂÂSe t an ending date for t he rep eated entr y, f or exam ple, the la st date of a weekly course you are t aking. This option is sh own only if you h a ve se lec ted t o re pea t th e ev e nt. Synchronisation > Privat e âÂÂAfte r sync hroniza tion th e calenda r ent ry can b e s e e n o n l y b y y o u , a n d i t i s n o t s ho w n t o o t h e rs e v e n i f t h e y ha v e o n l i n e a c c e s s to vi ew the calend ar. Public âÂÂThe c alenda r ent ry is shown to others w ho have access to view you r calen dar online. No ne âÂÂThe ca le ndar entry is n ot copied when you synchronize your calendar. 3. To sa ve the e ntry, se lect Done . Ca lenda r view s Press # in t he mo nt h, w ee k, or da y v iew s to auto m ati cal ly hi gh lig ht the c ur ren t date. To create a meeting entry, press a ny number ke y ( 0 âÂÂ9 ) in any calendar view. To go to a cer tain date, select Opt io ns > Go t o date . W r ite the da te, a nd sel ect OK . To-do Select Optio ns > To-do view . In th e To- do view , yo u can keep a l ist o f ta sks that y ou need to do . Creat e a to-do note 1. To sta r t to w rite a to -do no te, p re ss an y n umb er key ( 0 âÂÂ9 ). 2. W ri te th e task in the Su bject field. Se t a due dat e and a prior ity for the task. 3. T o sa ve the to-do note, selec t Do ne . â Not es Select Men u > Organiser > Notes . To w rit e a new n ote , star t w rit ing . To s ave th e no te , se le ct Done .
68 You can sa ve pl ain te xt fil es (. txt f ormat) you rec eive t o Not es . â Calculator Select Men u > Organiser > Calculator . 1. E nter t he first number of your calculat ion. 2. Scroll to an arithmetic function, and select it. 3. E nter the second number. 4. T o exec ute the cal culatio n, sele ct . To add a decimal, pre ss # . Not e: This calculator has limited accuracy and is designed for simple ca lculations. â Converter Select Men u > Organiser > Converter . In th e convert er, you can conve rt measure me nt para meters such as Le ngth from one un it to anot her, for ex ample , Ya r d s to Metre s . The conve rt er has lim ite d accura cy and rounding errors may occur. Set a ba se c urre ncy and exchange rates Before you can convert curr ency, you need to choose a base currency (usua l ly your domestic curre ncy) and add exchange rates . The rate of t he base cur rency is al ways 1. The base cu rrenc y det ermi nes the conversion rates of t he other cu rrencies. 1. S elect Curren cy as th e me asur eme nt type , and sele ct Opti ons > C urre ncy rates . 2. To change t he base currency, scroll t o t he cu rre ncy ( usually your domestic currency), and select Op tio ns > Se t as base currency . 3. Add e xchange rate s, scroll to the curren cy, and enter a n ew rate, th a t is, how many units of t he curre ncy equal one unit of t h e ba se currency you selected. 4. After you in s e rt all th e required exchange rates, you can convert currency. Not e: When y ou chan ge base c urrenc y, you m ust ent er new exchange r ates becau s e a ll p revious ly set e xchange r a tes are clear ed.
69 Conv ert un its To convert cu rre ncy, you m ust first set the exchange rat e. See âÂÂSet a base currency and exchange ra tes,â p. 68. 1. S elect Ty p e a nd the type of me asurement to convert, and select OK . 2. Sele ct the first Un it fi eld, the u nit from whic h you want t o conver t, and OK . 3. S elect t he nex t Un it field and the unit to w hich you want to co nvert. 4. I n the fir st A mount fie ld, ente r t he valu e to b e co nverted. The o ther Amo unt field changes a utomatically to show the con verted value. Press # to add a decimal and press * for the , - (fo r tempera ture) , and E (exponent) symbols. The conversion or der changes if you write a va lu e in the second A mount field . Th e result is shown in the first Amoun t fie l d. 13. App lic ation s â Download! Download! (n e twork service) is a mobile content shop ava ila ble on your device. You may be able to down load som e con tent f re e of ch a rge. With Download! you can discov er, pre view, buy, d ownload, and upgra de con tent, services, and applications. The items are categorized under catalogs and folders provided by diff erent service providers. Th e ava ilable conten t depends on your service provider. Select Men u > Applications > D ownload! . Download! us es yo ur ne twork servi ces to acc ess the most up-t o-dat e conte nt. F or information on additional items available through Download! , contact you r service provider , or t he supplier or manufactu re r of th e item. â My own To access th e applica tions you have down loaded in your phon e, se le ct Menu > Applications > My o wn .
70 GPS data This featu re is not designed to support positioning requ ests for r elated calls. Contact your se rvice provider for more information a bout how you r ph one complies with government regulations on location-based emergency ca lling services. GPS data is a GPS application t hat enables you t o view you r curren t location, find your way to a desired location, and track dist a nce. The applica t ion requires a Blue toot h GPS e nhancement to o perate. You m ust als o have Bl uetoot h GPS positioning method enabled in Menu > Settings > Phone sett. > Gener al > Po s i t i o n i n g > Posit ionin g methods . Select Men u > Applications > My own > GPS data . In GPS data an d Lan dma rks , coordinates are ex presse d in degree s and decima l degrees format us ing WGS-84 coordinat e system. Landm arks Landmarks are coordinates to geographic loca tions t hat you can save to your device for lat er use in diffe rent location-bas e d service s. You can c re ate landmarks using a Bluetooth GPS enhancement or n etwork (network service). Select Men u > Applications > My own > Lan dmar ks . 14. Sett ings â V oice commands To select t he fu n ctions t o us e by voice comm and, sele ct Me nu > Settin gs > Vo i c e comm. . The voice commands for changing profiles are in t he Profiles folder. To act ivate a new v oice co mma nd for an appli cati on, sele ct Opti ons > New application and the application. To manage the voice commands, scroll to a function, select Op t i ons a nd from the following options: Change command or Remove application âÂÂto change or deactiv a te the voice command of the selecte d fun ction Playback âÂÂto play the a ctivated voice com m and To use voice commands, se e âÂÂVoice dia ling,â p. 22.
71 To change voice comm and settings, se lect Optio ns > Settings and from the following options: Synt hesiser âÂÂt o a ctiv a te or de acti va te the t ex t- to-s pe ech sy nt hezi se r t h at say s out loud the recognized voice command Remove voice adapts. âÂÂto r ese t t he v oi ce ad ap ta tion s . The pho ne a d apts to t he us erâÂÂs v oice to bett er recogni ze th e voi ce co mmands. â Call mailbox Call m ailbox is a ne twork service. Contact your service provide r for the ca ll mailbox num ber. To define the call mailbox number if no number is set, select Menu > Settings > Call mailbox , a nd w he n Voice mailbox numbe r: is displa yed, enter the voice mailbox num ber. To change t h e call mailbox number, sele ct Menu > Se ttings > C all mailbox > Opti o ns > Chan ge number , an d enter the nu mber. â Speed dial To assign phon e numbers to t he speed dialing keys, se l ect Me nu > Settin gs > Speed dial , scroll to a k e y icon, and select Opti ons > A ssign . Se le ct the conta c t and t he num ber f or th e speed dial . To view the nu mber assigned to a spe ed-dialing key, sc roll to the key icon, and select Option s > View numbe r . To change or remove the number, select Change or Remove . â Phone settings Gene ral Select Menu > Settings > Phone sett. > Gene ral > Personalisation , D ate and time , Enhan ceme nt , Security , F act ory settings , or Po si ti o nin g . Pers onalisation Select Displ ay , Standby mode , Tones , L anguage , T hemes , o r Vo i c e c o m m s . . Display Light sensor âÂÂto adju st the light se nsor that observes the l ighting condit io ns and adjusts t he brightness of the display
72 Font size âÂÂto select the font size used in list s and editors P ower saver time- out âÂÂto set the time-out per iod a fte r w hich t h e power sa ver is act ivated Welcome note / logo âÂÂto set the welcome note or logo wh ich is displayed briefly each time you switch on the phone. Light tim e-out âÂÂto set the t im e-out for the display light Sta ndby mode Act ive standby âÂÂto enable or disable active s t andby. See âÂÂActive standby ,â p. 16. Shortcuts âÂÂto assign shortcuts for t he right and left selection ke ys, scrolling in different dir e ctions or pre ssing t he scroll ke y in t he standby mode. The s croll ke y shortcuts are not available if Active st andby is On . Act ive standby apps. âÂÂto select the application short cu ts t o a ppear in the active standby. This setting is available only if A ct ive s tandby is s e t to On . Operator logo âÂÂthis setting is visible on ly if you have re ceived and sa ved an operator logo. You ca n select wh ether t he operator logo is shown. Ton es Change the tones of the clock, ca l endar and currently active pr ofile. See âÂÂProfiles,â p. 58. Lang ua ge Phone language âÂÂto change the language for t he displa y texts in you r phone. This change may a lso affect the format used fo r date and time and t he sepa rators used, for example, in calculations. If you select Auto ma tic , the phone se lects t he language according t o the inf orm ation on you r SIM car d. A fter you h a ve change d the display t ext language, the phone restarts. Writing language âÂÂt o ch ange the writing language of you r ph one. Ch anging the la ngu age aff ect s th e ch ar acte rs and spec ia l ch aract ers ava ila bl e whe n wr it ing tex t an d th e pr e dic tiv e te xt dict i on ary use d. Pre dic tive text âÂÂto s et predictive t e xt input On or Of f for all editors in the phone. Select a language for e nterin g predictive text from th e list. Them es Apply themes. See â The mes,â p. 58. Voic e comma n ds Edit voice command and voice dia ling settings. Se e âÂÂVoice com mands,â p. 7 0.
73 Date and tim e Time an d Date â to set the time and date Time zone â to se t th e ti me zo ne of y ou r loca ti on . If y ou set Network operator tim e > A uto-update , th e local time is shown. Dat e form at âÂÂt o se lect the format to display dates Date s eparator âÂÂto select the date se parator Time format â to select betw e en 24-hour a n d 12-hour tim e form at Time separator âÂÂto sele ct the time sepa ra tor Clock type âÂÂto select w hether the a nalog or digital clock is shown in the standby mode. See âÂÂClock,â p. 65. Clock alarm tone âÂÂto sele ct the alarm clock t one Workdays âÂÂt o specify days for a lar ms re peated only on workdays Network operator t ime ( netw ork se rvic e) â to allo w the netw ork t o upda te ti me, date, and time zone informat io n to your phon e. If you select Auto-update , all active conn e ctions are disconnected. Check any alarms as these may be affecte d. En hanceme nt T o c h a n g e s e t t i n g s o f a n e n h a n c e m e n t , i n t h e Enha nceme nt sett. view , scroll to an enha ncement , suc h as Headset , sel ect Op ti ons > Open and from the foll owing options: Default profile âÂÂto sele ct the profile you want to a ct ivat e each time you connect the enha ncemen t to you r phon e Automa tic answ er âÂÂto set the phone to answer an inc om ing call automatically aft er 5 seco nds when t his e nhancem ent is co nnecte d to your ph one. If t he Ringing type is set to Beep once or Silent , automatic answer cannot be used, and you must answer the phone manually. Lights âÂÂTo se t the phone light s cont inuous ly on while using the e nhancem ent, select On . Secur ity Select Phon e and SIM card , Cert ificat e management , or Security module . Phon e and SI M card You can change the following codes: lock code, (U)PIN code, and PIN 2 code. These code s can o nly i nclude the n umbers from 0 t o 9.
74 Avoid using access codes similar to emergency numbers t o prevent a ccidental dialing of the emergency n um ber. Code in use âÂÂto select the active code , PIN or UP IN , for the active USIM. This is shown only if t he ac tive U SIM su pport s UPIN, a nd the UPIN is n ot rejected. PIN code request or UPIN code request âÂÂto set the phone t o request the code each time the phone is s wit ched on . Som e SIM car ds m ay n o t allow the PIN code requ e st to be turn ed Off . If you selec t Code in us e > UPIN , UPIN code request is shown inste a d. PIN code or UPIN code , PIN2 code , a nd Lock code âÂÂto change the codes Keypad autolock period > Use r defined â to automatically lock t he ke ypa d after a defined period of inactivity Phone autolock period âÂÂto set a time-out after w hich the phone is a utomatically loc ked. T o use the p hone a gain, y ou need t o enter the correc t lock cod e. To t urn off the autolock period, s ele ct None . Lock if SIM card changed âÂÂto set t he phone to prompt for the lock code w he n an unknown, new SIM card is inserted into your phone. T h e phone kee ps a list of SIM cards tha t are recogniz ed as the owner ca rds. Closed user group (network service)âÂÂto specify a grou p of people whom you can call and who can call you. For more inform a tion, contact your service provider. To activate t he default group agreed on with t he service provider, select Defa ul t . If you want to use ano the r grou p (you need to know t he group index number), select On . When calls are limited to closed user groups, calls ma y be possible to the official emergency number programmed into your device. Confirm SIM services (n et work service) â to se t the phone to display confirmation messages when you use a SIM card se rvice Cert ificate m anagemen t A list of a u thority certificates that have been st ore d in your phone is displayed in Certificate management . To see a list of personal ce rtificates if available, scroll right. Digital certificates should be use d if you want to connect to an online bank or another site or r em ote se rver for act ions that i nvolve transferrin g confidential information. They should also be used if you w a nt to reduce the risk of viruses or other malicious sof tw are a nd be sure of the a uth e nticity of software when downloading and installing soft ware.
75 Import a nt: E ven if the use of certificates makes th e risks involved in rem ote connection s and software installation con siderably smaller, they m ust be used correctly in order to ben efit from increased security. The existence of a certificat e does not offer any protection by itself; the certificat e manager must contain corr ect, authentic, or trus ted certificates for incr eased security to be available. Cer tificates have a re stricted lifetime. If "Expir ed certificate" or "Certificate n ot valid yet" is shown even if the ce rtificate should be v alid, check th at the current date and time in you r device are correct. Bef ore chang ing any certif icate settin gs, you must ma ke sure tha t you really trust the owner of the certificate and that th e certificate really be longs to the listed owner. Vi ew certi f ic ate deta ils an d check authen ticit y You can only be sure of the correct identity of a serve r when the signature and the period of validity of a server cert ificate have been checked. Th e p ho ne no tif ie s y ou if th e id enti ty of t he se rv er is not a ut hen tic or if you d o n ot have the corr ect security certifica t e in you r ph one. To check ce rtificate details, scroll to a certificate, and se lect Opti ons > Cer tificate details . While opening the certificate details, the phon e checks t he validity of the certificate and on e of the following notes may appear: Expired certificate â The va l idity period ha s ended for the se lected cert ificate. Certificate not valid yet âÂÂThe validi ty per iod ha s not y et be gun f or the select ed certificate. Certificate corrupted âÂÂThe certificate cannot be used. Contact the cert ifica te issuer. Certificate not trusted âÂÂY ou have not set any application to us e the certificate. Chang e the trust setti ngs Before chan gin g any cert i ficate settings, you must make sure that you really t rus t the owner of the certificate a nd that the certificate re a lly belongs to the list ed owner. Scroll to an authority ce rt ificate, and select Optio ns > Tru st s ett ings . Depending on the certificate, a lis t of the applications t hat can use the se lected certificate is shown. Sec urity modul e View or edit se curity modules.
76 Fact ory se tting s Reset some of t he se ttings to the ir original values. You need the lock code. See âÂÂLock code,â p. 8. Posit ioning With the positioning service you can rec eive information from service providers about local is sues such a s we a ther a nd traffic con dit ions, ba sed on the location of your device ( ne twork service). To enable a positioning method, select Posit ioning met hods , scroll to the positioning method, and se lect Opti ons > Enable . To stop using it, select Opti o ns > D isable . To define th e posit ionin g server access point, select Positioning server > Acce ss point and the de sired a cce ss point . Then sele ct Server address , and ente r the domain name or UR L address of t he server. Phone Select Men u > Se ttings > Phone sett. > Phone an d Call , Call divert , Call barrin g , or Net wor k . Call Send my caller ID (network service)âÂÂto set your phone number to be displayed ( Yes ) or hidden ( No ) from the person whom you are calling. The value may be set by your se rvice provider when you subscribe to the service ( Set by netw ork ). Call wait ing (n etwork s ervic e)âÂÂto set th e netw ork t o notif y you of a new i ncomi ng call while you have a ca ll in progre ss. To re quest the network to activate ca ll waiting, select Act iv at e . To reques t t h e network to deac t ivate call waiting, select Cancel . To check w he ther the f unction is active, select Ch eck statu s . Reject call with SMS âÂÂto enable re je cting phone calls w it h a t ext message. Se e â An swer or reject a c a ll,â p. 23. Message text âÂÂt o ente r a t ext t o be s ent wh en y ou rej ect a call with a te xt message Image in video call âÂÂto select a still image to be shown instead of the video w hen you deny video se n ding in a video c a ll Automatic redial âÂÂto s et the phon e to make a maximum of 10 a t tempts to co nne ct t he c all afte r an un suc ce ss ful cal l at tem p t. P res s th e end ke y to sto p auto ma ti c r edia li ng.
77 Show call duration âÂÂto set t he phone to displa y the call duration during a call Summary after call âÂÂto set th e phon e to brief ly display the approximate duration of the last ca ll Speed dialling > On âÂÂto set the phon e to dia l t he numbers a ssigned to t he speed dialing keys, 2 to 9 , by pressing and holding the corresponding number ke y Anykey answer > On âÂÂto answer an incoming call by brie fly pressing any key, except the ri ght selection ke y, volume ke ys, a n d the end key Line in use (n etwork se rvice)âÂÂshown only if the SIM card supports two subscriber numbers, that is, two phone lines. Select which phone line ( Line 1 or Line 2 ) you want to use for making cal ls and sending short messages. Calls on both lines can be answered irre spe ctive of the selected lin e . You cannot make calls if you select Lin e 2 an d have n ot s ubscri bed to thi s net work serv i c e. To prevent line selection, select Line change > Disable if supported by your SIM card. To change t his setting, you need the PIN2 code. Ca ll dive rt Call divert is a network s e rvice. 1. S elect w hich c a lls you w ant to d ivert: V oice calls , Data and video calls , or Fa x calls . 2. Select the desir ed option. For example, to divert voice calls w h en your number is busy or when you reject an in com ing call, select If b u sy . 3. To set the divert option on or off, select Op ti ons > Ac t iv at e or Can ce l . To check whether t he option is a ctivated, select Check status . Several divert options can be ac tive at the s ame ti me. Call barring and call diverting cannot be active at th e same time. Call barrin g Call ba rring (network se rvice) all ows you to restrict the calls t hat you make and receive wit h you r phone. T o change the settings, you ne ed t he barrin g password from your se rv ice provider. Scroll to the desired barring option, a n d to requ e st the n e twork to se t call restriction on, select Op ti ons > Act iv at e . To set the selected call restriction off, select Cancel . T o check whether the calls a re barred, select Che ck st atus . To change the barring password, select Edit barring password . To cancel all active call barrings , select Cancel all barrin gs . Call barring and call diverting cannot be active at th e same time.
78 When calls are barred, calls may be possible to certain official emergency numbers. Netwo rk Network mode âÂÂTo select which network to use (show n only if supported by t h e service provider). I f you select Dual m ode , t h e device use s t he GSM or UMTS network automatically, a ccording to the network paramet e rs a nd the roaming agreements bet wee n the network operators . Operator selection âÂÂTo set the phone to search for a nd select automatically one of the availabl e networks, se lect Au tomatic . To select the desired n etwork manually from a list of networks, sele ct Ma nual . If the connection t o the manually s e lected network is los t, t he phone sou nds an error ton e and asks you to select a net w ork again. The sele cted network must have a roa min g a greement with your hom e network, that is, the operator whose SI M card is in your phone. Cell info display ( network service)âÂÂTo set the phone to indicate w h en it is used in a cellular network bas e d on microce ll ular network (MCN) technology and t o activate cell info reception, sele ct On . Conne ction Select Men u > Settings > Phon e sett. > Conne ction > Bluetooth , USB , A ccess points , Packet dat a , Da ta call , SIP settings , Co n fi gur at i ons , or APN control . Blu etooth Switch B luet oot h on or off, a nd edit Blu etooth settings. See âÂÂBluetooth conn ectio n,â p. 84. USB Edit USB settings. See âÂÂU SB data cable,â p. 93 . Acce ss points To establish a da ta connection, an access point is re quired. You can define different k inds of access points: ⢠MMS access point to send and receive multimedia messages ⢠WAP access point to view web pages ⢠Int ernet access point (IAP ) (for example , to s end a nd receiv e e-ma il) Check which kind of access point you need w ith your se rvice provide r for the service you wish t o a ccess. For ava ila bility and subscription to da ta connection services, contact you r service provider.
79 You may re ce ive access poin t settings in a messa ge from your service provider, or you may have pr es et acces s point settings in your phone. To create a new a ccess poin t or edit an existing access point, sele ct Op tio ns > New access point or Edit . To cre a te a new a ccess point us ing the settings of an exist ing access point, scroll t o an a ccess point, and select Opti o ns > Duplicate access point . Depending on the connection t ype selected in D ata bearer , on ly ce rtain settings are a vailable. Fill in all fields marked with Must be defined or w ith an as ter isk. Contact your service p rovider for the followin g settings: Data bearer , A ccess point nam e (for packet data only), D ial-up number (for data ca ll on ly), Use r na me , Pa s s w o r d , Auth en ti cati on , Home page , Data call type (for data ca ll only), and Maximum data speed (for data call only) . Conn ection name âÂÂEnte r a des criptiv e name for the connec tion. Prompt password âÂÂIf you must e nter a ne w password every time you log onto a server, or if you do not w ant to sa ve your pa ssword to t he phone, select Yes . If necessary, to define the int ernet pr otocol (IP) version, phone IP addre ss, domain name syst e m (DNS) ser vers, proxy ser ver, and advanced data ca ll settings, su ch as callback, PPP compression , login script, and modem initialization string, sele ct Opti o ns > Ad va n ced se t tin g s . Co ntact y our s ervi ce prov ider f or the co rrect setti ngs. Packe t data The packet data settings affect all access point s usin g a packet data con nection. P acket data connection âÂÂIf you select When av a ilable a nd yo u are i n a netwo rk that s u pports packet da ta, t he phone re gister s t o t he packet data network and sh ort mess ages are se nt usin g a packe t dat a conne ction. If y ou sel ect When need ed , the phone uses a packet da ta connection on ly if you start a n application or function t hat ne eds it. The pa cket da ta connection ca n be close d when it is not need ed by an y appl icat ion. If there ar e no packet dat a services a va ilable and you have chose n When available , the phone periodically tries t o establish a packet data conne ction. Acces s poin t âÂÂT he acce ss poi nt name is ne eded whe n you wa nt to use yo ur pho ne as a m odem wi th you r comp ut er. Data cal l The data call settings affect all access points th a t use a GSM data call.
80 Online tim e âÂÂto se t the data ca ll to di sco nne ct au tom at ic ally af ter a tim e- ou t if the re is no act iv ity . T o en ter a tim e -ou t, sele c t User defined , a nd ente r t h e ti me i n mi nu t es. If y ou s e lec t Unlimit ed , th e da ta ca l l is n ot d isc on ne cte d au tom at ic all y. SI P s ett ings View and edit ses sion initiation protocol ( SIP) prof ile s. Conf igurat ions Certain functions, such a s web brow sing and multimedia messaging, may require configuration settings. You may receive t he settings from your service provide r. See âÂÂConfiguration s et tings, â p. 13. To delete a configuration, scroll to the configuration, and select Opti ons > De le te . Acce ss point n ame cont rol With the access poin t name control s ervice, you can restrict th e use of packet da ta access point s. This setting is only availa ble if you r SIM card su pports the service. To change t h e settings, you need the PIN2 code. Applications To view and edit settings of applications installed to your phon e , select Menu > Se ttin gs > Phone sett. > Applicat ions . â Speech In Speech , yo u can s elect t he defaul t lan guage and voice used for readi ng messages and adjust the voice prope rt ies, su ch as rate and volume. Select Menu > Se ttin gs > Speech . To automatically detect the language of a message and read the message using that language, select Language detection > On . Whe n re adi ng a mes sag e, if the re is no voice available for the language or if Language detection is set to Off , the de fa ul t l an g ua ge i s u se d. To view details of a voice, sc roll righ t, scroll t o t he voice, and s e lect Opti on s > V oice details . To test a voice , scroll to t h e voice, and select Opti on s > Play voice . â Settings w izard Se tt. w iz ard configure s your device for operator ( MMS, GP RS, and inte rnet) and e-mail settings based on y o ur se rvice provide r. Configuring ot h er settings may also be possible .
81 To us e these serv ices, you may have t o cont act y our s ervi ce pro vider to ac tivat e a data connecti on or other services . Select Men u > Settings > Sett. wizard . â Instant messaging Instant m essa ging (IM) allows you t o conve rse w ith ot hers and join discussi on forums (IM groups) with specific t opics (netw ork service). Check the availability of IM services, pricing, a nd ta riffs wi t h your service provider. Service providers also provide instructions on h ow to use their service s. Conne ct to an IM serve r Select Men u > Settings > IM . 1. To log in, select Op tio ns > Log in . 2. Enter your user ID and passw ord. To log out, se lect Opti ons > Log out . IM settings Select Men u > Settings > IM > Op ti ons > Settings . To edit the I M applica tion settings, s e lect IM s e tt i ngs . T o set who is allowe d to se e when you are on line, s elect Show my availability . To set who is allowed to send you messages or in vitat ions, s elect Allow messages from or Allo w invitations from . To ed it IM serv er conn ection set tings, select Servers , scrol l to the se rver, and sel e ct Opti o ns > Edi t . Con tact your service provider for th e settings. To defin e new server settin gs, select Opti ons > Ne w ser ver . To c hoos e the default ser ver, sel ect Defaul t s erve r and the s erve r. To be automat ica lly connec t ed to the IM serve r during the days a nd times you define, select IM login type > Au tomati c . To only be automatically con n ected while in your home network, select Aut o in home netw . . To be automatically connected when you start t he IM application, select On app. start - up . T o conn ect manually, select Manual . To s et da ys and time s wh en to e stabl ish a conne ction auto mati cally, sele ct Automatic login days and A utoma tic log in hr s. .
82 Join and leav e an IM group Select Men u > Settings > IM > IM groups . IM groups a re only available if supported by the se rvice provider. To join an IM gr ou p, select it . To join an IM group not on the list , but whose group ID you know , se l ect Optio ns > Join n e w gr oup , and en ter the group ID . To leave the I M grou p, sele ct Op tio ns > Leave IM group . Search for IM groups and u sers To sear ch for groups, select Men u > Settings > IM > IM groups > Opt ions > Search . You can search IM groups by Group name , Topic , or Members (us er I D). To join or save a gr oup that is found in t h e search, scroll to it, and s ele ct Opti ons > Join or Save . To sear ch for new contacts, se lect IM c on ta c ts > Op tio ns > New IM co nt act > Search from server . T o sta rt a convers ation w ith a new use r, sc roll t o the us er, an d select Op ti ons > O p en c on ver s atio n . To s a ve the n ew contact, se lect Add to IM contacts . Chat in an IM g roup Select Men u > Settings > IM > IM groups . After you join a n IM group, you can view the messa ges that are exchanged in the group, and se nd your own messages. To se nd a message, writ e the message, and pr ess the scroll key. To send a priva te message to a m em ber (if a llowe d in t he group) , select Op tio ns > Send private message , s e lect the re cipient, write th e messa ge , and press the scroll key. To re ply to a pr ivat e mes sag e s en t to you, scro ll to t he me ss age , an d s elec t Opti o ns > Reply . To invite IM contac ts who are online to join the IM group (if al lowed in the group), select Op ti ons > Se nd invitation , select the contacts you want to inv it e, write the invitation message, and se lect Done . Star t and view indiv idual conversa tions Select Men u > Settings > IM > Conversations . This shows a list of the IM users with whom you h a ve a n ongoing conversa t ion.
83 next t o a user indicates that you h ave re ceived a n ew message from that u ser. To vie w an ongoing conve rsation, select th e u ser. To send a message, w rite your message, and press the sc roll key. To retur n to the conversat ions list without closing the conv e rsation, se le ct Back . To start a ne w conve rsation, select Opti o ns > New co nvers ation > Select recipient and from a list of your saved IM contacts t hat are c urrently online; or select Enter us er ID to enter the u ser I D. To close th e conversat ion, select Op tions > E nd con versation . To sa ve a u ser to your I M cont acts, scroll to t he user , and se lect Opti ons > A dd t o IM contact s . To block m essages from a use r, scrol l to the user, and selec t Op ti ons > Blocking options > A dd to blocked list . IM contacts Select Men u > Settings > IM > IM c on ta c t s . You can se e a list of your saved IM contacts. indicates contacts th a t are currently online, and indicates contacts that a re off l ine. To create a new cont a ct, select Op tio ns > New IM c onta ct . Fill in t he Nickname and User ID fields, and select Don e . To s tart o r co ntinue a conv ersatio n wit h a cont act, s croll to the cont act, a nd sel ect Opti o ns > Open con versat ion . Creat e a n e w IM grou p Select Men u > Settings > IM > IM groups > Opt io ns > Create new gr oup . Enter the set t ings for t he group. R e s t r i c t a c c e s s t o a n I M g r o u p To create a closed IM group, create a group members list. Only the users on the li s t are allowed to join the group. Select the IM groups view, scroll to th e grou p, and select Op ti ons > Gro up > Se ttings > Group m embers > Sele cted only .
84 15. Con nect ivit y â PC Suite You can use your phon e with a va riety of PC connectivity and dat a communication appli cations. With PC Suite you can synchronize contacts, calendar and to-do notes a nd notes betw e en your phone a nd a comp atible PC. You may find more informa tion about PC Suit e an d t he download link in t he support area on the Nokia website, www.nokia.com/pcsuite. â Bluetooth connection Bluetooth technology enables wire less connections between electronic devices wit hin a maximum range of 10 meter s (33 feet) . A Blu etooth connec tion c an be us ed to sen d ima ges, vi deos, text, b usines s cards, calend ar not es, or t o conn ect wirelessly to compatible devices using Bluetooth technology, such as compu ters. This device is compliant with Bluetooth Specif ication 2.0 supporting the following profiles: Dial Up Networking, Serial Port, File Transfer, Han ds free, Headset, Basic Imaging, SIM Access, Generic Access, and Adva nced Audio Distribution. To en sure interoperability between other devic es supporting Bl uetooth technology, use Nokia approved enhanceme nts for this model. Check with the manufacturer s of other devices to determine their compatibilit y with this device. There may be restrictions on using Bluetooth technology in some locations. Check with your local a uthorities or s ervice pr ovider. Features using Bluetooth technology, or allowing such fea tures to run in the background while using other features, increase the demand on battery power and reduce the battery life. Blue tooth c onnectio n setti ngs Select Men u > Settings > Conn ectivity > Blue tooth . When you activate Bluetooth technology for the first t ime, you are asked to give a name to y our pho ne. Bluetooth âÂÂto switch Bluetooth on or off. My phone's visibility > Show n to all âÂÂto allow your phone to be found by other Bluetooth devices at a ll times. T o a llow your phone to be found for a defined tim e period, select D efine period . For se curity re a sons i t is advisable t o use the Hidden setting whenever possible.
85 My phone's name âÂÂto define a name for you r phone. Remote SIM mode > On âÂÂt o enable the usage of the SIM card of the phone by another device ( for ex a mple, a car kit) by Bluetooth technology (SIM acces s profile) When the wireless device is in the remote SIM mode, you can on ly use a compatible connected en hancement , such as a car kit, to make or rece ive calls. Your wirele ss device will not m ake any calls , except to t he emergenc y number s programm ed into your dev ice, whi le in this mo de. To make calls from your devic e, you m ust first leave th e remote SIM m ode. If the devic e has been locked, enter the lock code t o unloc k it fir s t. Send d ata There can be on ly one a ctive Bluetooth conn ection at a t ime. 1. Open an application where the item you wish to send is save d. 2. Scroll to the item you want to se nd , and select Opti on s > Send > Vi a Bluetooth . 3. The phon e starts t o search for devices wit hin range . Paired devices are s how n wit h . When searching for device s, som e devices may show only the un ique device addresses. T o f ind ou t t he u nique address of your phone, enter t he code *#2820 # in th e standby mode. If you have searched for device s earlier, a list of t h e device s that were found previously is shown first. To start a ne w search, select More devices . I f yo u switch off t he phone , the list of devices is cleared, a nd the de vice search n eed s to be sta rt ed again before sending data. 4. Select the device w ith which you want to connect. 5. Pair the de vice s ⢠If the other de vice requires pairing before da ta can be transmitted, a ton e sounds and you are asked to enter a pa sscode. ⢠Create your own pa sscode ( 1â 16 digits ) and agre e with t he ow ne r of t he other device to use the same code. You do not have to memorize the passcode. ⢠After pairing, t h e device is sa ved to the P aired devices view. 6. W hen the connec tion has b een suc cessfu lly es tablis hed, t he note Se ndin g data is displayed. Data received u sin g Bluetooth connection can be found in Inbox in Messaging .
86 Paired de v ice s view Paired devices ar e indicated by in the search re su lt list . In the Bluetooth main view, scroll right t o open a list of paired d evices. Do no t accep t Bluet ooth co nnection s from sources yo u do not trust . To pair w it h a device, se lect Opt ions > New paired device . Select the device with which to pair. Ex cha nge passcode s. To cancel pa iring, scroll to the device whose pairing you want to cancel, an d pres s the clear key. If you want t o cancel all pairings, select Opti ons > Dele te a ll . To set a de vice to be authorized, scroll to t he devic e , and sele ct Opti o ns > Set as authorised . Connections between your phone and the authorized device can be made without your know ledge. No se pa rate acceptance or authorization is need ed. Use this sta tus on ly for your ow n devic es to wh ich ot hers do not hav e access, for exam ple, you r PC or devices that belong to som eone you tr ust. is added next to a ut horized devices in t he P aired de vices vie w . If you select Set as unauthorised , each connection request from t he device mu st be accepted separately. Re ceiv e dat a Whe n you rec eive d ata u sing Bl uetoo th tech nology, a tone sounds , and yo u ar e asked if you want to accept the message. If you accept, the item is placed in Inbox in M essaging . Disc onnect Bl uetooth conne ctio n A Bluetooth connection is disconnected automatically a ft er sending or re ce iving data. â Connection manager In the connection manager, you can ident ify t he status of multiple da ta connections, view details on the amount of data sent a nd rec e ived, and end unus ed connec tions . Select Men u > Settings > Conn ectivity > Conn. mgr . . Not e: The actual invoice for calls and servi ces from your service provide r may vary, depending on n etwork features, rounding off for billing, taxes, and so forth. To view connection details, scroll to a conn ection, and select Op tio ns > D etails .
87 To end a connection, scroll to the connection, and select Optio ns > D is conne ct . T o end all connections, select Op tio ns > Disco nnect al l . â Push to talk Push to talk (PTT) (network service) is a real-time voice over IP service (network service) available over a GSM/GPRS network. PTT provides dire ct voice communication connected wit h a single keypress. Before you ca n u se t he PTT s ervice, you must define t he PTT a ccess poin t and PT T setti ngs. In PTT communication, one person talks while the others listen. Speakers take turns res po nding to each other. Only one group m em ber can t alk at a time. The len gth of ti me of each turn i s lim ite d. Phone calls always t ake priority over PTT calls. Besides the packet data counters, the phon e registers only one-to-one calls in the recent calls lists in Lo g . The pa rticipants should confirm the r e ception of any communications where appropriate as there is no other confirmation of w he ther the recip ients hav e hea rd the ca ll. To check availability and cost s, and to s ubscr ibe to t he service, cont a ct your service provider. Note that roa m ing services may be more limited than home netw ork se rvices. Many of the services available for traditional voice cal ls (for example, ca ll mailbox) are not available for PTT commu nications. Define a PTT access point Many service providers re qu ire you to use an internet acces s point for your defau lt access point . Ot her se rvice provide rs allow you to use a W AP access poin t . Settings fo r PTT For PTT s ervice settings, contact your service provider. To view and ch a nge PTT settings, s ele ct Menu > Settings > Connectivity > PTT > Opti o ns > Settings > User settings or Conne ction se tti ngs .
88 User sett in gs Accepted list calls âÂÂTo see a not ifica tion of incom ing calls, se lect Not ify . To a ns w er PTT calls autom atically, select Auto-accept . If you do not want to rece ive PTT calls, select Not allow ed . PTT call alert ton e âÂÂSe lect the t one for incom ing PT T calls. If you want the incoming call alert setting for PTT to follow your profile se ttings, select Set by profile . For example, if your profile is sile nt, PTT is set to do not disturb (DND) and, except for ca llback r equ ests, you a re not a va ilable to others us i ng PTT. Callback request tone âÂÂSe lect a tone for call bac k r eques ts. Application start-up âÂÂTo start PTT automatically, select Alwa ys a uto ma ti c . To sta rt PTT automatically only while in your home network, select Auto. i n home ne tw . . Defaul t nicknam e âÂÂEnter your nic kname s hown to other u sers. Yo ur se rvice provider may have disa bled the e diting of this option . Show my PTT address âÂÂS elec t Never if you want to hide your PTT address fr om others. Show my login status â Select whet her your s tatu s is sh own to o thers . Connect ion sett ings Contact your PTT service provider for the con ne ction se t tings. Log in to PTT Select Men u > Settings > Conn ectivity > PTT . P TT aut om atica l ly l ogs in to th e service when started. When log in is su ccessful, PTT automatically conn ect s to chann els that we re active when the application was last closed. I f the connec tion is lost , t h e device automatically tries to log back in until you e xit PTT. indicates a PTT connection. indicates th a t PTT is se t to do not disturb (DND). Exit PTT Select Men u > Settings > Conn ectivity > PTT > Opt io ns > Ex it . Log out from PTT after exiting application? is displayed. Select Ye s to log out and close the service. If you w a nt to ke ep the a pplication active in the background, select No .
89 Make a one-to-on e call Warning: Do not hold the device nea r you r ear when the loud speaker is in use, because t he v olume may be extremely l oud. 1. S elect Menu > Se ttings > C o nne c tivi ty > PT T > Op tio ns > Contacts , scroll t o the contact you w a nt to t a lk to, a nd press th e call key. 2. W hen th e con necti on h a s been es tab lished, to tal k to the ot her p artici pant , press and hold the call ke y while you ta lk. 3. To end the PTT call, selec t Disc onne ct , or if there are several PTT calls, select Op tion s > Disco nn ect . Ans wer a PT T call If Acce pt ed list calls i s s et to No tif y in Use r settin gs , a shor t tone no tifies you of an incoming call. To accept the call, select Accept . To sil en ce th e ton e, se le ct Sil en c e . To r ejec t th e call , pr ess the end key. Make a P T T gr oup call To call a group, select Opti ons > Contacts , sel ect Opti o ns > Talk to m any , m a rk the contacts you want to call, and press the call key. Ca llba ck re que st s Se n d a ca ll b a ck re q ue s t If you make a one -to-one c all a nd do not get a res p on se, you c an s end a req uest for th e person to ca ll you back. To sen d a c all back r eque st f ro m Contacts , scroll to a conta ct, and select Op tion s > Send callback request . Respon d to a cal lback requ est When someone sen ds you a callback request, 1 n ew callback request is displayed in the standby mode . Se lect Sho w to open Callback inbox . Scro ll to a co ntact , and press t he call key. Cha nnels Whe n you are c onnecte d to a chan nel, all members j oine d to the c hannel hear you t a l k i n g . U p t o f i v e c h a n n e l s c a n b e a c t i v e a t t h e s a m e t i m e . W h e n m o r e t h a n o n e channel is active, select Swap to cha nge th e ch annel y ou want t o tal k to.
90 Cha nnels a re r egist ered wi th a U RL ad dress . One user re giste rs t he cha nnel U R L i n the network by joining t he channel the first tim e . Crea te y our o wn chann el 1. S elect Op tio ns > PTT chann els . 2. S elect Op tio ns > N ew ch annel > Cr ea te new . 3. Ent er a Chan nel name . 4. S elect a Channel privacy level. 5. E nter yo ur own nickname in Nickname . 6. If you w a nt to add a t humbnail image to the group, select Thumbn ail an d an image. 7. S elect Done . When you have created a channel, you are a ske d if you w a nt to send channel i n vitati on s. Cha nn el invit ations are text me ssages. Join a p reconfigure d channel A preconfi gu red channel is a talk group that is set up by your service provide r. Only preconfigured users a re allowed to join and u se the channel. 1. S elect Op tio ns > PTT chann els . 2. S elect Op tio ns > N ew ch annel > Add existing . 3. E nter t he Cha nnel name , Channel address , and Nickname . You can also add a Thumbnail . 4. S elect Done . Respon d to a cha nnel inv itation To save a received channel invitation, select Opti ons > Save ch annel . The ch a n nel is a dded to y our PTT c ontac ts, c hannel s view . PTT se ssion s PTT sessions are displayed as call bubbles in the PTT display, giving inform ation about the st atus of the PTT sessions : Wai t â shown when you pre s s and h old t he call ke y and some body e lse is st ill speaking i n the PTT session Ta lk â shown when you press a nd hold the call key and get t h e perm ission to speak To switch t he loudspeak e r on or off , select Op tion s > A ctivate loudspeaker or Deactivate loudspeaker .
91 To discon ne ct t he selected PTT session, sele ct Opt ions > Di sco nne ct . â Remote synchronization Sync enables you t o synchronize your calendar, contacts, or n otes with various calendar an d address book a pplications on a compa tible computer or on the internet. The synchronization application uses SyncML technology for synchronizat ion. Select Men u > Settings > Conn ectivity > Sync . Create a new synchronization profile 1. If n o prof i les have bee n de fi n ed, the ph one asks you if you want to cre a te a new profile. Select Ye s . To create a new pr ofile in a ddi tion to exist ing on es, select Opti ons > Ne w sync profile . Choose whet he r you w a nt to use the default setting va l ues or copy the values from an e xisting profile to be us ed a s t he basis f or the new profile. 2. De fine th e A pplications t o be synchronized. Select an application, and edit the synchronization settings: In cl ud e i n sy nc â to enable or disa ble the synch ron ization Remote database âÂÂthe name of the used remote dat a ba se Synchronisation type âÂÂSel ect Bot h way s for synchronization of th e da t a on your phone and the r em ote database, To phone only for the sync hroniz ation of the data on your phon e only, or To se r v er on ly f o r the s ync h ro ni zat i on o f th e data on the rem ot e database on ly. 3. De fine th e C on nec tion se tt ings : Server version , Se rver ID , D ata be arer , Host address , Po r t , User nam e , and Pas sw o r d âÂÂContact your service provider or system administrator for the correct settings. Access point âÂÂOnly visible if In ternet is selected as D ata be arer . Se l ect an acc ess po i nt you want to us e for the da ta conn ecti on. Allow sync requests > Ye s âÂÂt o allow that the se rver starts the synchronization Accept all sync requests > No â to require a confirmation be fore the s erver sta r ts th e sy n chr on iza ti on
92 Netw ork auth enti catio n âÂÂOnly visi b le if Interne t is se lected as D at a bearer . To use HTTPS authentication, select Ye s , and ent e r user name and pa ssword in Netw ork user name and Network password . Sync hronize data In the main view, scroll to a pr ofile , and select Opt ion s > Synchronise . The status of the synchronization is shown. After synchronization is complete, select Opt ions > View log t o ope n a log file showing the synchronization s t atus ( Com pl et e or Incomple te ) and ho w many calendar or contac t entries h a ve been added, updat ed, de le ted, or disca rde d (not synchronized) in th e ph one or on the se rver. â Inf rared Use infrare d to connect two devices and tr a nsfer da ta between t h em. With infrared, you can transfer data such as bu siness cards, calenda r n otes, and m edia files with a compatible device. Do not p oint t he infrar ed (IR) bea m at anyon e's eye or a llow it to interfere wi th other IR devices. This device is a Class 1 laser product. Send and receive dat a 1. Ensure th a t t h e infrared por ts of the devices face each other. The positioning of the devices is more importa nt th an angle or dis tance . 2. To turn on infrared on your device, select Menu > Settin gs > Con nect iv ity > Inf rared . T urn on infrared on the ot h er device. Wa it a f e w seconds until a n infrared connection is established. 3. To send, loca te th e desired file in an a pplication or the file m anager, a nd select Op tion s > Sen d > Via infrar ed . If data tr a nsfer is not started soon aft er the activat ion of the infrared port , the connection is ca ncelled and m ust be start e d again. All items received through infrared are placed in the Inbox folder in Messaging . â Modem Before you ca n u se you r phon e as a m odem: ⢠Acqui re the appropr iate da ta commun icatio ns softw are for your comp uter.
93 ⢠Subscribe t o t he appropria t e ne t work se rvices from your service provider or internet se rvice provider. ⢠Install the appropriat e drivers on your computer. Select Men u > Settings > Conn ectivity > Mode m . To connect the phone to a compatible computer using infr a red, press the scroll key. Make sure the infr a red port s of the phone and com put er are directly faci ng each other wi th no obstac les bet ween them. To connect your phon e to a computer using Bluetooth w ireless technology, initiate the connection fr o m the computer. To a ctivate Bluetooth in you r ph one, select Menu > Connectivity > Bluetooth > Bluetooth > On . If you u se a cable to connect your phon e t o a computer, initiate th e conn e ction fr om the co mput er. No te that you m ay no t be a ble to use s ome of th e other commu nica tion featu res when th e phone is used a s a mode m. â USB data cable You can use t he USB data ca ble to t ransfer dat a between the ph on e and a compatible PC. You can also us e the USB data cable wi t h Nokia PC Suite. Select Men u > Settings > Conn ectivity > USB . To s ele ct th e de fault U SB connection mode, select USB m ode and the des i red mode. To h a ve the device ask the purpose of the connection each time t he cable is conn ected, se lect As k o n connection > Ye s . To us e the phone with Nok i a P C Su ite, s elect PC Suite . To synchroniz e media files, such as music, w ith a compatible version of Windows Media Pla yer, s e lect Media player . To access files on t h e inserted memory card as a r em ovable drive, select Dat a tr ans fer . Aft er t ra nsf er rin g da ta, en sur e th at it is s afe to u npl ug the US B da ta cab le fr om the PC . â Dat a trans fer With data tran sfer you can copy or s ynchron ize cont acts , ca l e ndar e ntri es, an d possibly other data, such as video clips and im ages, from a compatible phon e using a Bluetooth or in frared connection. When both Bluetooth and inf ra red are available on both devices, it i s preferable to us e Blu etooth.
94 Depending on the ot h er phone, syn chr onization may not be possible and data can be copied only once . To transfe r or synchronize data, do the follow ing: 1. When using infrare d, place the devices so that the infrared ports face each other, and activate infrared on both devices. Select Menu > Se ttings > C o nn ec tivi ty > Tra nsfer . If you h ave not used Transfer be fore, information about the application is displayed. Selec t Cont in ue to st art tran sfer rin g data . If y ou have used Transfer , select Transfer data . 2. Sele ct whether t o use Bluet ooth or infra red for tran sferring the data. When using Bluetooth, the phones ne e d to be pa ired in or de r to t ransfer data. Depending on the type of t he other phone, an application may be sent and installed on the other phon e to enable the da ta transfer. Follow th e instructions. 3. Select what c ont ent you w a nt to be transferred to your phon e. 4. Content is transferr ed t o your phone. The transfe r t ime depends on the amount of data. You can stop the transfer and continue later. 16. Data manag er â Application manager You can install two t ypes of applications and software t o you r phone: J2ME TM applications based on Java TM tec hnology with the e xtension .jad or .jar. Per sonalJava TM applications cannot be installed on your phon e. Other a pplications a nd soft ware suitable for the Symbi an operating system. The installation files have the .sis extension. Only install software specifically designed for y o ur phone. Installation files ma y be t ransferred to your ph one from a compat ible computer, downloaded during brows ing, or sen t to you in a multim edia message , as an e-mail attachment or by using Bluetooth. You can use Nokia Application In st aller in Nokia PC Suite to install an application to you r phon e or a memory card. To open App. manager , sel e ct Menu > Se ttings > Data mgr . > App. mgr . .
95 Install an application Import a nt: O nly in stall and use applications and other software from trusted sources, such as applicat ions that are Symbian Signed or have passed the Java Ve rif ie d TM testing. Before installation, in App. manager , scroll to the installation file, and select Opti o ns > View details to view information such as the a pplica tion type, version number, and the su pplier or m a nufacturer of t he application. The .jar file is required for installing Java applications. If it is missing, the phone may ask you t o download it. To install an application or software package: 1. Scroll to an installation file. A pplications on the memory card are indicated wit h . 2. S elect Op tio ns > Inst a ll . Alternatively, search the phone memory or t he m e mory car d, select the application, a nd press the s croll ke y to start the installation. During the installation, the phon e shows information a bout the progress of t he installation. If you are installing an application without a digital signature or certification, the phone displays a warning. Continue installation only if you are sure of t he origins and contents of the a pplication. To view extra information about the application, scroll to it, and select Op tion s > Go to web address . This option may not be available with all applications. To see w hat softw a re packages have been installed or removed a nd when , se lect Opti o ns > Vie w log . Remov e an application In th e App. manager main view, scroll to the soft ware package, and select Opti o ns > Rem ove . Appl ication mana ger set tings In App. manager , s el ec t Opt io ns > Se ttings and from the follow i ng settings: Software installation âÂÂto select if y o u want to allow installation of all Symbian applications ( All ) or on ly signed applications ( Signed only ) Online certificate check âÂÂt o select if you wa nt App. manager t o ch eck the on line certificates for an application before installing it
96 Default web address âÂÂdefault address used when checking online certificates Java applications may attem pt to, f or exa mple, e stablish a da t a connection or send a messa g e. To edit the permissions of an installed Java application a nd define which access point the application will use, in the main view, scroll to t he application, and select Op tio ns > Open . â File manager In the f ile manager, you can brows e, open, and manage f iles and folders in the phone memory or on the memory card. To see a list of the folders in the ph one memory, select Menu > Se ttings > Data mgr . > File mgr . . Scroll righ t to see the folders on the m em ory car d. Vie w memory c onsumpt ion Scroll either right or left to view the phone m emory or th e memory card c ontents. To check memory consum ption of t he cu rrent memory, select Op tio ns > Mem o ry details . The phone c a lculates the a pproximate a m ount of fre e me m ory for st oring data and installing new applications. In the m em ory vie ws, you ca n view th e memory consumption of the different applications or file types. If t he phone memory is getting low, remove some files, or move th em to t he me m or y ca rd. â Device manager You may receive serv e r profiles and configuration settings f rom your se rvice provider or company information mana gement department. To open t he device manager, select Me nu > Settings > Data m gr. > D evice mgr . . I f you have n o se rver pr ofiles defined, the phone as ks w het h er you w a nt to def ine one. To connect to a server and r ece ive configuration settings for you r ph one, scroll t o the serve r profile, and selec t Opti o ns > Start configuration . To edit a server profile, select Op tio ns > E dit profile and from th e following setti ngs: Allow configuration âÂÂTo receive configuration settings from t he server, select Yes . Auto-accept all requests âÂÂIf you w a nt th e phone t o ask for confirmati on before accepting a configuration from the se rve r, select No .
97 Contact your se rvice provider, or company inform a tion management de pa rtment for th e other ser ver profile se ttings. â Me mo ry c ard Keep all memory cards out of the re a ch of small children. Select Men u > Settings > Data mgr . > Me mory . For details on inserting a memory card into the phone, see â Get started ,â p. 10. Y ou can use it to st ore your multimedia files such a s video clips, musi c t racks, and sound files, ph otos, and messaging data, and t o back u p in for m ation from phone memo ry. Form at the m emory c ard When a me mory card is format ted, all data on the card is perm ane nt ly l ost. Some memory cards a re su pplied preformatted and others requ ire for matting. 1. S elect Op tio ns > Form at m emory card . 2. S elect Ye s to co nf irm . 3. When formatting is complete , en ter a na me for the me mory card. Back up a nd restore information To back up information from phone memory to the memory card, select Opt ions > Back up phone memory . To re st or e information from the memory card to the phone memory, select Opti o ns > Restore from card . You can only ba ck up t he phone m emory and re st ore it to the same phone. Loc k the me mor y car d To set a pa ssword to help preve n t unauthorized u se, select Optio ns > Set password . Y ou are asked to enter and confirm your pass word. Th e password can be up to eig ht ch aract ers l ong . Unl ock a memo ry ca rd If you i nsert anot her password-prot ected memory card into your phone, you are prompted to e nter the password of t he card. To unlock t he card, select Op tio ns > Unlock memory card .
98 Ch eck me mory con sumpti on To check the me mory consumption and t h e amount of memory ava ila ble on you r memo ry c ard, se l ec t Opti ons > Memo ry de t ails . â Activa tion keys Digita l rights managem ent Content owners may use different type s of digital rights management (DRM) technologies to protect their intellectual prope rty, including copyrights. This device uses various types of DRM softw are to acc ess DRM-pro tected c ontent. With th is device you can ac cess con tent pr otecte d wit h WMDRM 10, O MA D RM 2.0 and OM A DRM 1 .0. If certa in DRM soft ware fails to protect the con tent, content owne rs may ask tha t such DRM softw are's ability to acce ss new DRM-protected content be revoked. Revocation may also prevent renew al of such DRM-pro tected co ntent already in your device . Revocation of such DRM software d oes not affect the use of content protecte d with other types of DRM or the use of non-DRM- protected content. Digital rights managem ent (DRM) prote cted content comes w ith an associated ac tivation key that define s your rights to use the con tent. If your device has OM A DRM protecte d content , to back up both the activ ation keys a nd the content, use the backup feature of Nokia PC Suite. Other transf er methods may not transfer the activation k eys which need to be res tored with the content for you to be able to continue the use of OMA DR M protected content afte r the device memory is formatted. Y ou may also need to res tore the activation keys in case the files on you r device get corrupted. If your device has WMD RM protected conte nt, both the activation keys and the content will be lost if the device mem ory is formatted. You m ay also lose the activa tion keys and the content in case the files on your devic e get corrupted. Losing the activation keys or the content may limit your ability to use th e same cont ent on your device aga in. For more information, conta ct your service provider. Some activation key s may be connected to a specific SIM card, and the protected con tent can be accessed only if the SIM card is inse rted in the device. Select Men u > Settings > Data mgr . > Actv . keys to v iew th e dig i tal r igh ts activation key s saved in your phone. To view valid keys ( ) that are con n ected to one or m ore media files, select Valid keys . Group keys, which contain several ke ys, are indica t ed with . T o view the keys contain e d in th e group key, select the group key. To view invalid ke ys ( ) with which t h e time period for using the file is e xce eded, select In valid keys . To buy more usage time or extend the u sage period for a m edia file, scroll to a key, and select Optio ns > G et act ivation key . I t may not be possible
99 to update a ct ivation keys if web service message reception is disabled. See âÂÂService message s et tings, â p. 39. To view activat ion ke ys th a t are n ot in use, sele ct Not i n u se . U nused a ct ivation keys have no m edia files c onne cted t o the m . To view de tailed informat ion such as the validity status a nd the abil ity to send the file, scroll to an activation ke y, and select it . 17. Batte ry inf ormatio n â Charging and dis c harging Your device is powered by a rechargeable battery. The battery can be charged and discharged hundreds of times, but it will eventual ly wear out. When the talk and standby times are noticea bly shorter tha n normal, replace the batte ry. Use only Nokia a pproved batteries, and recharge your batter y only with Nokia approved chargers designated for this device. The full performance of a new batter y is achieved only after two or thr ee complete charge and disch arge cycles. If a replacement ba ttery is being used for the first time or if the bat tery has not been used for a prolonged period, it may be necessary to connect th e charger, then disconnect and reconnect it to begin chargin g the battery. Unplug the cha rger from the electrical plug an d the device when not in use. Do not le ave a fully charged battery con nected to a charger, since overcharging m ay shorten its lifetime. If left unused, a ful ly charged battery will lose its charge over time. If the battery is com pletely disch arged, it may take several minute s before the char ging indicator appears on the display or before a ny calls can be made. Use the battery only for its inte nded purpose. Never use any charger or batter y that is damaged. Do not short-circ uit the battery. Acc idental short-circ uiting can occur whe n a metallic object such as a coin, clip, or pen causes direct conn ection of the positive ( ) and negative (âÂÂ) terminals of the batte ry. (These look l ike metal str ips on the ba ttery.) This m ight happen, for example, when you ca rry a spare battery in your pocket or purse. Short- circuit ing the termina ls may da mage the bat tery or t he connect ing object. Leaving the battery in hot or cold places , such as in a closed car in summer or winter condition s, will reduc e the capacity a nd lifetime of the battery. Always tr y to keep the battery betw een 15ðC and 25ðC (59ðF an d 77ðF). A device with a hot or cold ba ttery may not
100 work temporarily, even wh en the battery is fully char ged. Battery performance is particularly limited in temp eratures well below freezin g. Do not dispose of batteries in a fire as they may explode. Batteries may also explode if damaged. Dispose of batteries according to loca l regulations. Please recycle when possible. Do not dispose as household waste. Do not dismantle or shred cells or batteries. In the event of a battery leak, do not allow the liquid to come in con tact with the skin or eyes. In th e event of such a leak, flush y our skin or eyes i mmediate ly with wa ter, o r seek med ical hel p. â Nokia batter y authentication guideline s Always u se original Nokia batter ies for your safe ty. To check tha t you are gettin g an original Nokia battery, purchase it from an authorized Nokia dealer, look for the Nokia Original Enhancements logo on the pa ckaging, and inspect the hologram label usin g t he following step s: Successfu l completion of the four ste ps is not a total assurance of the authenticity of th e battery. If you h ave an y reason to believe that you r battery is not an authe ntic, original Nokia battery, you should refrain from using it, and take it to the nearest aut horized Nokia service point or dealer for assis tance. Your authorized Nokia se rvice point or dealer will inspect the batte ry for authen ticity. If authentic ity cannot be v erified, retur n the battery to the place of purchase. Auth entic ate hol ogram 1. When looking at the hologram on the label, you should see the Nokia connecting hands symbol from one a ngle and the Nokia Original Enhanceme nts logo when looking from another angle. 2. When you angle the hologram left, right, down, and up, you should see 1, 2, 3, and 4 dots on each side respectively.
101 3. Scratch the side of the label to reveal a 20-d igit code, for exampl e, 12345 678919 876543 210. Tur n the batte ry so that the numb ers are faci ng upwar ds. The 20- digit code rea ds sta rtin g from the number at th e top row followed by the bottom row. 4. Confirm that the 20- digit code is valid by followin g the instruc tions at www.nokia .com/batteryche ck. To cr eate a t ext message , enter the 20-dig it code, for example , 1234 567891 987654 3210, and s end to 44 7786 200276 . National and interna tional operator charges will apply. You shou ld receive a messa ge indica ting whe ther the cod e can be authentica ted. What if your b a t tery is no t authenti c? If you c annot confirm t hat your Nokia battery with the hologr am on th e label is an authentic Nokia battery , please do not use the batte ry. Take it to the nearest auth orized Nokia s ervice point or dealer for assistance. The use of a battery that is not approved by the manufacturer may be dangerous and may result in poor performance and damage to your devic e and its enhancem ents. It m ay also in validate an y approval or warranty a pplying to the device. To find out more abo ut original Nokia batte ries, visit www.n okia.com/batt ery. 18. Enhan cement s Pra ctical rule s about a cce ssories and e nhancemen ts ⢠K ee p all accessories and enhanc ements out of the reach of small children. ⢠When you disconnect the power cord of any accessory or enhancement, grasp and pull the plug, no t the cord. ⢠Check regularly t hat enhancements insta lled in a vehi c le are mounted and are operating properly. ⢠In s tallation of any complex car enhancements must be made by qualifie d pe rsonnel only. Car e and main te nan ce Your device is a product of superior design and craftsmanship and should be treated with care. The following suggestions will help you protect you r warranty cover age.
102 ⢠K e ep the device dry. Precipita tion, humidity, and a ll types of liquids or moistu re can conta in minerals that will c orrode electr onic circu its. If your device does get wet, remove the battery, and allow the device to dry completely before repla cing it. ⢠Do not use or store the device in dusty, dirty areas. Its moving parts and electronic components can be dam aged. ⢠Do not store th e devic e in hot areas. High t emperatures can sh orten the life of electron ic devices, damage batteries , and warp or melt certain plastics. ⢠Do not store the de v ice in cold areas. When the device returns to its normal te m perature, moisture can form in side the device and damage electronic circuit boa rds. ⢠Do not attem pt to open the device other than as instructed in th is guide. ⢠Do n ot drop , knock, or sh ake the de vice. Ro ugh handlin g ca n break inte rnal circ uit bo ards an d fin e me chan ics. ⢠Do not use h a rs h chemi cals, c leaning solvent s, or strong d eterg ents to c lean the device. ⢠Do not paint th e device. Paint can clog the moving parts and prevent proper operatio n. ⢠Use a soft, clean , dry clo th to clean a ny lenses, su ch as cam era, proximity s enso r, and lig ht senso r lens es. ⢠Use only the supplied or a n approved replacement a ntenna. Unauthorized ante nnas, modifications, or attac hments could damage the device and may violate regulations governing radio devices. ⢠Use chargers indoors. ⢠A lways create a backup of data you w ant to kee p, such as co ntacts an d calendar notes. ⢠To reset the de vice from time to time f or optimum performance, power off the device and remove th e battery. These su ggestion s apply equ ally to your device, battery, ch arger, o r any enhanc ement . If any device is not w orking properly, take it to th e nearest authorize d service facility for service. Di sposa l The crossed-out wheeled-bin symbol on your produc t, literature, or packaging reminds you that in the European U nion all electrical and electronic products, batteries, and accum ulators must be taken to sepa rate collection at the en d of their working life. Do not dispose of these products as unsorted municipal waste. Return the products to c ollection to prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncontr olled waste disposal and to promote the sustainable reuse of material reso urces. Collection inform ation is available from the product retailer, local waste au thorities, national producer responsibilit y organizations, or your local N okia represent ative. For m ore inf ormation, se e product Ec o-Declaratio n or country-spe cific infor mation at ww w.nokia.co m.
103 Add itio nal sa fety infor mation â Smal l children You r device a nd its en hancemen ts may c ontai n small p arts. K eep them o ut of t he reach o f small children. â O perat ing en viro nment This device meet s RF ex posure gu idelines wh en used either in t he nor ma l use positio n against the ear or whe n positioned at lea st 2.2 cen timeters (7/8 in ches) away f rom the body. When a carry ca s e, belt clip, or holder is used for body -worn operation, it s ho uld not co ntain metal and should position the device th e above-stated distance from your body .To transmit data files or messages, this device requir es a quality connection to the network. In some cases, transmission of data files or messages may be delayed until such a conn ection is available. Ensur e the above separation distance instructions are followed u ntil the tran smissi on i s compl eted . Parts of the device are magnetic. Metallic m aterials may be attracte d to the device. Do not place credit cards or other magnetic storage m edia near the device, because information sto r ed on them may be erased. â Medic al de vice s Operation of any radio transmitti ng equipment, including wireless phones, may inter fere with the functionality of inadequately pr otected medical devices. Consult a physician or the manufact urer of the medical device to determine if they a re adequately shielde d from external RF energy or if you have any questions. Switch off your device in health care facilities when any r egulations posted in these are as instruct you to do so. Hospit als or health care facilit ies may be using equipmen t that could be sensitive to external RF energy. Impl anted med ical de vices Manufacturers of medica l devices recommend that a minimum separatio n of 15.3 centim eters (6 inches) should be maintained betwee n a wireless device and a n implanted medica l device, such as a pace maker or implanted ca rdioverter defibrillat or, to avoid potential interference with the medica l device. Per s ons who have such devices should: ⢠Always keep the wi reless device mo re than 15.3 centimeter s (6 inches) from the medi cal device w hen the wir eless device is turned o n. ⢠Not ca rry the wir eless device in a breast pocke t. ⢠Hold th e wireless devic e to the e ar opposite the m edical device to m inimize the potential fo r in te rfer enc e. ⢠Turn the wireles s device off immed iately if there is a ny reason to s uspect th a t interfere nce is taking place.
104 ⢠Read and follow the directions from the manufacture r of their implanted medical device. If you have any questions about using y our wireless device with an implant ed medical de vic e, co ns ult yo ur hea l th c are pr ov id er. Hear ing aids Some digital wireless devices may interfere with som e hearing aids. If interference occurs, cons ult yo ur se rvice p rovide r. â Vehicles RF signals may affect im properly installed or ina dequately shiel ded electronic systems in motor vehicl es such a s electro nic fuel inject ion system s, elec tronic a ntiski d (antiloc k) brak ing syst ems, ele ctron ic s peed con tr ol syst ems, an d air bag s yste ms. Fo r mor e informa tion, check wi th the manu facturer, or its representa tive, of you r vehicle or any equipment that has been added. Only qualified personn el should service the devic e or install the device in a vehicle. Faulty installation or service may be dangerous and may invalidate any warranty that may apply to the devic e. Check regu larly that all wir eless device equipment in yo ur vehicle is mounted and operating pr operly. Do not store or carry flammable liquids, ga ses, or explosive ma terials in the sa me compar tment a s the device, its pa rts, or e nhancem ents. For ve hicles eq uipped with an air bag, remember that a ir bags inflate with great force. Do not place objects, inclu ding ins talled or portabl e wireles s equipm ent in t he area over the air ba g or i n the air bag deployment are a. If in-vehicle wireless equ ipment is improperly ins talled and the air bag inflates, serious injury cou ld result. Using your device while fl ying in aircr aft is prohibited. Switch off you r device b efore boarding an aircraft. The use of wireless teledevices in an aircraft may be dang erous to the operation of the aircraft, disrupt the wireless telephone n etwork, and may be illegal. â Pot entially e xplosive e nvir onments Switch off your device when in a ny area with a pote ntially explosi ve atmosph ere, and ob ey all signs and instruction s. Potentially explosive at mospheres include areas where you would normally be advised to turn off your vehicle engine. Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily in jury or even death. Switch off the device at refueling points such as near gas pumps at service stations. Observe restrictions on the use of radio equipment in fuel depots, storage, and distribution areas; chemica l plants; or wh ere blasting operations are in progress. Areas with a potentially explosive atmosphe re are often, but not always , clearly marked. Th ey includ e below d eck on boat s, chemica l transfer or storage facilities, veh icles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as propane or butane), and areas where the air contains chemicals or particles such as grain, dus t, or metal powders.
105 â Emerge ncy call s Import a nt: W ire less phones, including this device, operate using radio signals, wireless networks, landline network s, and user -programmed functions. Because of this, conn ections in all cond itions cannot be guarantee d. You should never rely sole ly on any wireless device for essential comm unications like medica l emergenc ies. To ma ke an emergen cy call : 1. If the device is not on, switch it on. Check for adequate signal strength. Some networks m ay require that a valid SIM card is properly inserted in the device. 2. Pre s s the end key as many t im es as ne eded to cl ear the d isplay an d ready the dev ice for calls. 3. Ente r the of ficial emergency number for yo ur pre s en t locati on. Em ergency numbers v ary by location. 4. P ress th e call key. If c ert ai n fe atu res are in us e, yo u m ay f irs t nee d to tur n t hos e fe atu re s of f be fo re y ou can make an e mergency c all. If the device is in the offline prof ile mode, you may need to ch ange the profile to activate the phone fun ction before you can make an emergency call. Consult this guide or your service provider for more information. When ma king an eme rgency ca ll, give all the ne cessary inf ormation as accurate ly as possible. Your wireless device may be the only means of com munication at the scene of an accident. Do not end the call until given permiss ion to do so. â Cert ification inf ormation (SAR) THIS MOBI LE DEVICE MEETS G UI DELI NES FOR EXPOSURE TO RA DI O WAVES. Your mobile device is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed not to exceed the limits for exposure to radio wave s recommended by inte rnational guidelines. The se guidelines were developed by the independent s cientific organization ICNIRP and include safety margins designed to assure the protection of all persons, regardless of age and health. The exposure guidelines for mob ile devices employ a unit of measuremen t known as the Specific Absorption R ate or SAR. The SAR limit stated in the ICNIRP gu idelines is 2.0 watts/ kilogram (W/kg) averaged over 10 grams of tissue. T es ts for SAR are conduc t ed using standard operating pos itions with the device trans mitting at its highest certified pow er level in all tested fr equency ba nds. The a ctual SAR level of a n operating d evice can be below the maxim um value be cause t he devi c e is design ed to use o nly th e power re quired t o reach the network. That amount changes depending on a number of factors such as how close you are to a network b a se s tation . The high est SAR va lue under the ICNIRP gu idelines for use of the device at th e ear is 1.24 W/ kg.
106 Use of device a ccessories and enha ncement s may r esult i n differen t SAR val ues. SAR v a lu es may vary depending on national reporting an d testing requirements and the network band. Additional SAR information may be provided under product information at www.nokia.com.
107 Inde x NUME RICS 3-D tone s 59 A access codes barring password 9 change 73 lock co de 8 , 13 module PIN 9 PIN 8 , 13 PIN2 8 PUK 9 PUK2 9 signing P IN 9 UPIN 8 UPUK 9 access points 78 activation keys 98 act ive st and by 16 alarm clock. See clock. application ma nager 94 applications 94 B battery charg ing 12 Bluetooth conne c tio n set tings 84 disconnecting 86 paired devices 86 receiving data 86 sending da ta 85 bookmarks 61 browser. See web. C cache 64 calcula tor 68 calendar 66 call re gi ster. Se e log. callback r equests 88 , 89 calls an swer in g 23 barring 77 confer ence c a ll 23 diverting 77 ending 22 interna tional 21 makin g 21 options during a call 24 reje cting 23 reje cting with SMS 24 speed dial 22 , 42 swapping 24 voi ce dia l 22 voice mailbox 22 waiting 24 camer a 52 ca mer a mo d e 15 certifica tes 74 clock 65 conne c tio n mana ger 86 connec tivity 84 conta cts 40 conver ter 68 copyright protection. See activation keys. D data cable 93 data connection indicator s 17 data transfer 93 device ma nager 96 digital r ights manage ment. See activation keys . downloading 63 E editing v ideos 44 e-mail mailbox 34 settings 33 e-mail m essages deleting 35 retr ievi ng 34 en ha nc em e nt s 73 F file m anager 96 Fl ash P layer 57
108 functional modes 15 G gallery 42 transferring videos 45 GPS data 70 H he lp 20 I IM. S ee i nst ant me ssag ing . indicators 17 infrared 92 inst ant me ss agin g conne c tin g 81 conta cts 83 convers ation 82 groups 82 , 83 settings 81 K keyguar d. See keypad lock. keypad lock 20 L landmarks 70 listening to m usic 46 log 28 M media player. See RealPlayer. me mory car d 97 me mory con sumpt ion phone memory 96 me nu 19 message setting s cell broadcast 39 e-mail 38 multimedia settings 37 other sett ings 40 ser vice mess ages 39 text m essages 36 me ssage s au dio 32 cell broadcast 36 lis tening t o 40 multimedia objects 33 organizing 34 outbox 31 , 35 rece iving 33 sen di ng 31 ser vic e c omm ands 36 ser vi ce me ssa ges 34 SIM m essages 36 spe cial message types 33 writin g 31 mobile browser. See web. mobile s earch 60 modem 92 movies , muvees cu stom muve es 54 qu ic k muve es 54 music mode 16 musi c pla yer downloading music 47 mu sic sho p 47 playlist s 47 transf erring music 48 musi c.See musi c pla yer. N networ k 78 notes 67 àone-t ouch dial. See speed d ial. P phone mode 15 phonebook. See contacts. profiles 58 PTT. See push to talk. push t o talk 87 â 91 R RealPlayer 57 re corde r 56 S services. See web. settings con nec tio n 78 data call 79 date 73 enhanc ements 73 packet data 79
109 phone 71 phone language 72 predictive text input 72 secu rity 73 Setting w izard 80 speec h 80 time 73 writing language 72 SIM card using phon e withou t a SIM card 17 song s transf erring 48 speed d i al assigning a number 41 , 71 calling 22 cha nging a num ber 71 dele ting a num ber 71 standby mode 16 sy nchro nizati on 91 T text input 72 copying text 30 deleting te xt 30 predictive 29 themes 58 to-do 67 tran sfer ring mu sic 48 transferring v ideos 45 tutorial 19 U USB. See data cable. V video call 24 , 25 video call mode 16 video view mode 16 videos transf erring 45 Visua l Radio 49 voic e commands 70 voice dialing 22 voice mailbox 71 voic e recorder. See recor der. volum e 20 W web blogs 63 bookmarks 61 browser settings 64 browsing 62 con nec tin g 61 con nect io n se curi ty 61 disconnecting 64 fee ds 63 saving a page 63 settings 60 viewing a saved page 63 writin g text. See t ext in put.
DECLA RAT ION OF CO NFORM ITY Hereby, NOKIA CORPORATION declares that this RM-230 produ ct is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. A copy of the Declaration of Conformity can be found at http://www.n ok ia.c o m/phones/declaration_ o f_conformity/ é 200 7 No kia. A ll r ights reser ved. Nokia, Nokia Connecting People, Nok ia Care, Navi, and Visual Radio are trademark s or regist ered trademarks of Nokia Corporation. Nokia tune and Visual Radio are sound marks of Nokia Corporation. Other product and company names mentioned herein may be trademarks or tradenames of their respe ctive own ers. Reproduction, transfer, distribution, or storage of part or all of the contents in this document in any form without the prior written permission of Nokia is prohibited. This product includes software licensed from Symbian Software Ltd é 1998-2007. Symbian and Symbian OS are trademarks of Symbian Ltd. US Patent No 58 1 8437 and oth er pen ding patents. T9 text input software C opyright (C) 1997 -2 007. Tegic Communications, Inc. All rights rese rved. Java⢠and all Java-based marks are trademark s or regist ered t r ademarks of Sun Microsy st ems, Inc. This product is licensed under the MPEG-4 Visual Patent Portfolio License (i) for personal and noncommercial use in connection with information which has been encoded in compliance with the MPEG-4 Visual St andard by a c on sumer engaged in a personal and n oncommercial activity and (ii) for use in connection with MPEG-4 video provided by a licensed video provider. No license is granted or shall be implied for any other use. Additional information, including that rela ted to promotional, internal, and commercial uses, may be obtained from MPE G LA, LLC. See <http:// www.mpegla.com>. Nokia operates a policy of ongoing development. Nokia reserves the right to m a ke changes and improvements to any of the products described in this document without prior notice. TO THE M A XIMUM E XTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICA BLE LAW, UNDER NO CIRCUMSTAN CES SHALL NOKIA OR ANY OF ITS LICENSORS BE RESPO N SIBLE FOR ANY LOSS OF D A TA OR INCOME OR ANY SPECIAL, IN CID ENT A L, C ON S EQU EN TIA L O R I ND IRE CT D AMA G ES H OW SO EVE R CAU SE D. T H E C O N T E N T S O F T H I S DO C U M EN T A R E P R O V I D E D " A S I S " . E X C EP T A S R E Q U I R E D B Y A P P L I C A B L E L A W , NO WARRANTI E S OF ANY KIND, EI THER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCL U DING, BUT NOT LI MITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE MADE IN RELATI O N TO THE A CCURACY , RELIABILITY OR CONTE N TS OF THI S DOC UM ENT. NOKIA R ESERVES THE RIGHT TO RE VISE THIS DOCUMENT O R WITHDR AW IT AT ANY TIME W ITHOU T PRIOR NOTICE. The availability of particular products and applications for these products may vary by region. Please check with your Nokia dealer for details, and availability of language options. 0434
This device complies with Directive 2002 /9 5/EC on the restriction of the use of cert a in hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment. Export controls This dev ice m a y c ontain comm odit ies, tec hnology or software subject to export laws and regulations f rom the US and other countries. Diversion contrary to law is prohibited. NO WARRANT Y The third-party applicat ion s provided with your device may have been created and may be owned by persons or entities not affiliated with or related to Nokia. Nokia does not own the copyright s or intellectual property rights to the th ird-party applications. As such, N okia does not t ake any respon sibility for end-user support, functionality of the applicat ion s, or the information in the applications or these materials. Nokia does not provide any warranty for the thir d-pa rty applications. BY USI NG THE APPLICAT IONS Y OU ACKN OWLEDGE THAT THE APPL ICATI ONS ARE PROVID ED AS IS WITHOUT WARR A NTY O F ANY KIND, E X PRESS OR IMPLIE D, TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERM ITTED BY APPLICAB LE LAW . YOU FUR THER AC KNOWLED GE THAT N EITHE R NOKIA NOR ITS AFFILIAT ES MAKE AN Y REPRESENTATI O NS OR WARRANTIE S, E XPRESS OR IMPL I ED, INCL U DING BUT NOT LI M ITED TO WA RRANTIE S OF TI TLE, MERCHA N T ABILI TY OR FIT NESS FOR A PA RTICU LAR PURP OSE , OR THA T THE APPLICATION S W ILL NO T INFRINGE ANY THIRD-PAR TY PATENTS, COPYR IGHTS, TRAD EMARKS, OR OTHER RIG HTS. Mod el : 57 00 9255 338 Dr aft
4 Cont ents For your s afety ................................. 6 General i nformation ........................ 8 Access codes ........ .......... .......... ......... .......... ....... 8 Nokia support a nd conta ct information . ... 9 1. Get s tarted .................................. 10 Insert a (U)SIM card and battery .............. 10 MicroSD c a rd s lot ......... .......... ......... .......... .... 11 Charge t he battery ....... .......... ......... .......... .... 12 Switch the phone on and off . . .......... ......... 13 Set time and date .............. ......... .......... ......... 13 Normal operating position ....... .......... ......... 13 Configur a tion settings .......... ......... .......... .... 13 2. Your ph one ................................. 14 Keys an d parts .......... .......... ......... .......... ......... 14 Modes...... .......... .......... .......... ......... .......... ......... 15 Standby mode ...... .......... .......... ......... .......... .... 16 Indic a tors ......... .......... .......... ......... .......... ......... 17 Menu .. .......... .......... .......... .......... ......... .......... .... 19 Welcome a pplication ........ ......... .......... ......... 19 Tutoria l......... .......... .......... .......... ......... .......... .... 19 Help .............. .......... .......... .......... ......... .......... .... 20 Volume control .............. .......... ......... .......... .... 20 Keypad lock (keygu a rd) ......... ......... .......... .... 20 Connect a compatib le headset .............. .... 21 Connect a USB data c able ....... .......... ......... 21 Attach a wrist s trap ..... .......... ......... .......... .... 21 3. Call fu nctions ............................. 21 Make a voice call .......... .......... ......... .......... .... 21 Answer or reject a c all ..... ......... .......... ......... 23 Make a video call .......... .......... ......... .......... .... 24 Answer a video ca l l . .......... ......... .......... ......... 25 Video sha ring ....... .......... .......... ......... .......... .... 26 Log ...... .......... .......... .......... .......... ......... .......... .... 28 4. Write text ................................... 28 Tradi ti onal text input ....... ......... .......... ......... 2 9 Predic t ive text input ......... ......... .......... ......... 29 Copy and delete text ........ ......... .......... ......... 30 5. Messaging .................................. 30 Write a nd send message s ........ .......... .......... 3 1 InboxâÂÂre c eive me ss a ges .......... .......... .......... 3 3 My folders ...... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... 34 Mailbox ....... ......... .......... .......... .......... .......... ..... 34 Outbox............. .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... 3 5 View m es sa ges on the SI M c ar d ...... .......... 3 6 Cell broa d cas t ......... .......... .......... .......... .......... 3 6 Service command editor ............... .......... ..... 36 Messaging s ettings .......... .......... ............... ..... 3 6 Message r eader ....... .......... .......... .......... .......... 4 0 6. Contacts ..................................... 40 Manage conta cts......... .......... .......... .......... ..... 40 Manage conta ct groups . .......... .......... .......... 41 Add a r ingin g tone ...... .......... ............... .......... 41 Assign speed dialing k eys ........ .......... .......... 4 1 7. Gallery ........................................ 42 Gallery f unctions ......... .......... .......... .......... ..... 42 8. Music player ... ............................ 45 Listen to music........ .......... .......... .......... .......... 4 6 Music menu ........ .......... .......... .......... .......... ..... 46 Playlist s ........... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... 4 7 Music sh o p ..... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... 4 7 Transfer music ......... .......... .......... .......... .......... 4 8 9. Media .............. ............................ 49 Visual R adio ........ .......... .......... .......... .......... ..... 49 Camera ............ .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... 5 2 Movie director......... .......... .......... .......... .......... 54 Videos ..... ......... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... 56 Recorde r ...... ......... .......... .......... .......... .......... ..... 56 RealPlayer....... .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... 5 6 Flash Player ......... .......... .......... .......... .......... ..... 57 10.Perso nalization ......................... 58 Themes ............ .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... 5 8 Profiles ........ ......... .......... .......... .......... .......... ..... 58 3-D tones.... ......... .......... .......... .......... .......... ..... 59
5 11.Web.... ........................................ 60 Mobile Sea rch ...... .......... .......... ......... .......... .... 60 Web.......... .......... .......... .......... ......... .......... ......... 60 12.Organ izer ................................... 65 Clock ... .......... .......... .......... .......... ......... .......... .... 65 Calenda r ...... .......... .......... .......... ......... .......... .... 66 Notes ....... .......... .......... .......... ......... .......... ......... 67 Calculator ......... .......... .......... ......... .......... ......... 6 8 Converter .......... .......... .......... ......... .......... ......... 6 8 13.Applicatio ns .............................. 69 Down l oad!........ .......... .......... ......... .......... ......... 69 My own ........ .......... .......... .......... ......... .......... .... 69 14.Setting s ..................................... 70 Voice c ommands ...... .......... ......... .......... ......... 70 Call ma ilbox ......... .......... .......... ......... .......... .... 71 Speed dial ........ .......... .......... ......... .......... ......... 71 Phone set tings .......... .......... ......... .......... ......... 71 Speech.......... .......... .......... .......... ......... .......... .... 80 Settings wizard.... .......... .......... ......... .......... .... 80 Instant messag ing ........ .......... ......... .......... .... 81 15.Connect ivity .............................. 84 PC Suite .. .......... .......... .......... ......... .......... ......... 8 4 Bluet ooth connection ....... ......... .......... ......... 84 Connect io n m a nager ....... .......... .......... .......... 8 6 Push to talk .............. .......... .......... .......... .......... 87 Remote s y nc hr oniza tion .......... .......... .......... 91 Infrar ed ....... ......... .......... .......... .......... .......... ..... 92 Modem ........ ......... .......... .......... .......... .......... ..... 92 USB data cable........ .......... .......... .......... .......... 93 Data tr an sf er ...... .......... .......... .......... .......... ..... 93 16.Data man ager ........................... 94 Application manager ....... .......... .......... .......... 9 4 File mana ger .. .......... .......... .......... .......... .......... 96 Device ma nager ...... .......... .......... .......... .......... 9 6 Memory card ...... .......... .......... .......... .......... ..... 97 Activation keys........ .......... .......... .......... .......... 9 8 17.Batte ry infor mation ................. 99 Charging a nd discharging........ .......... .......... 99 Nokia ba ttery a uthenti cation guidelin es ....... .......... .......... .......... .......... ....... 100 18.En hancements ........................ 101 Care an d mainten ance ................. 101 Additio nal safet y informa tion .... 103 Index ................... .......................... 107
6 For y our safe ty Read these simp le guidelines. Not following them may be dangerous or illegal. Read the comp lete user g uid e for f urth er in forma tio n. SW ITC H ON SAF E LY Do not switch the device on when wireless ph one use is prohibited or when it may caus e interferen ce or dange r. RO AD SA F ETY CO ME S FIR S T Obey all local law s. Always keep you r hands free to operate th e vehicle wh ile driving. Your first consider ation while driving should be road safety. INT ERF ER E NCE All wireless device s may be susceptible to inte rference, which could affect performance. SWITC H OF F IN HOS PIT ALS Follow any res trictio ns. Switch the device off near medical equipm ent. SWI TCH O FF IN A IRCRAFT Follow any res tricti ons. Wir eless device s can caus e interferen ce in aircr aft. SW ITC H OF F W HEN R EF UEL I NG Do n o t u se the de vice at a refuelin g point. Do not use near fuel or che micals. SWI TCH O FF NEA R BLASTI NG Follow any res tricti ons. Do not use the device w here blasting is in progre ss. USE S ENSIBLY Use only in the normal position as explained in the product docume ntation. Do n ot to uc h the ant en na un nec es sa ri ly. QUA LIF IE D SE R VIC E Only qualified personnel may install or repair this product. ENH ANC EM EN TS AN D B AT TER IES Use only approved enhancemen ts and batteries. Do not connect in compatible products. WAT ER - RESI STA N CE Your device is not water-resis tant. Keep it dry. BAC K- UP CO PIES Remember to make back-up copies or keep a written record of all important information stored in your device.
7 CONN E CTING TO O THER DEVICES When conne cting to any oth er device, read its user gu ide for detailed s afety instructions. Do not con nect incompatib le products. EM ERG EN CY CAL LS Ensur e the phone f unction of the devi ce is swi t ch ed on and in service. Pr ess the end key as man y times as needed to clea r the display and retu rn to the standby mo d e. E nter the em ergenc y number, then press the c all ke y . Gi ve your locatio n. Do not end the call until giv en permission to do so. â About your device The wireless device described in this guide is approved for use on the GSM 850, 900, 1800, and 1900 a n d UMT S 2100 n etwork s. Con tact your s er vice p rovider for mo re inf ormat ion about networks. When using the featur es in this device, obey all la ws and respect lo cal customs, privacy and legitimate rights of others, including copyrigh ts. Copyright protections may prevent some image s, music (in c luding ringing tones), and other content from being copied, modified, transferred, or forwarded. Your device supports internet con nections and other methods of conne ctivity. Like comput ers, you r dev ice may be exp osed to vir uses, malicious mess ages and applica tions, an d other ha rmful conte nt. Exer cise caut ion and ope n mess ages, acce pt connectivit y requ ests, download content, and accept ins tallations only from trustworthy sourc es. To increase the security of your device , consider inst alling antivirus softwa re with a regular update se rvice and using a firewall application. Warning: T o u se any featur es in this devic e, other than th e alarm cl ock, the device mu st be switch ed on. Do n ot switch the de vice on when wire less device u se may cause in terfere nce or danger. â Networ k se rvic es To us e the pho ne you must have serv ice from a wireles s servi ce provide r. Many of the featu res req uire spec ial netwo rk featu res. These f eature s are not availa ble on all networks ; other netwo rks m ay require that you ma ke specific a rrange ments with your ser vice prov ider before y ou can use the ne twork ser vices. Your s ervice pr ovider can give you instructio ns and explain what c harges will ap ply. Some networks may have limitations that affect h ow you can use network se rvices. For instanc e, some networks m ay not su ppor t all language- dependent characters and services. Your service provider may ha ve r equested that certa in features be disabled or not activated in your device . If so, these features will n ot appear on your device menu. Your device may also have a specia l configuration such as ch anges in menu name s, menu order, and icons. Co nt act yo ur se rvic e p ro vid er f or m ore in for ma ti on .
8 This device supports WAP 2.0 protocols (HTTP and SSL) that run on TCP/IP protocols. Some features of this devic e, such as web browsing, e-ma il, push to talk, instant messaging, and multimedia me ssaging, require network support for th ese technologies. â Enhancements, batteries, and charger s Check the model number of any charger before use with this device. This device is intended for use when supplied with power from the AC-3, AC-4, AC-5, DC-4 chargers or CA-44 char ger ada pt er. Warning: U se only batte ries, charge r s, and enhancements approved by Nokia for use with this particular model. The use of any other types may inva lidate any approval or warranty, and may be dangerous. For availability of appr oved enhancem ents, please check with your dealer. Whe n you disconnect the power cord of any enhan cement, grasp and pull the plug, not the cord. Ge nera l info rmat ion Mode l: 5700 â Access codes Lock c ode The lock code ( 5 to 10 digits) helps to protect your phone against unauthorized us e. The pre set cod e is 12 345. Ch ange t he co de, and ke ep the n ew code se cret a nd in a safe place separate from your phone. To change the code and to set the phone to request the co de, s ee âÂÂSe curit y ,â p. 73. If you e nter an incorrect lock code five times in su cce ssion, t he phone ign ores furth er entries of t he code. Wait for 5 minutes , and enter the code again. When the de vice is loc ked, calls m ay be poss ible to the of ficial emergen cy numbe r programmed in to your device. PIN codes The personal identification number (PIN ) code a nd the un iversa l person a l identification number ( UPIN) code (4 t o 8 digits) help to protect your SIM card against unauthorized use. See âÂÂSecu rity , â p. 73. The PIN code is usually supplied wit h the SIM car d. The PIN2 code ( 4 to 8 digits) may be supplied with the SIM card and is required for some fu nct ions.
9 The module PIN is required to access the information in the security module. The module PIN is supplie d with the SI M card if the SIM card has a security module in it. The signing PIN is req uired for the digital signature. The signing PI N is supplied with the SIM card if t he SIM card has a security m odule in it. PUK co de s The personal unblocking key (PUK) code and the universal personal unblocking key (UPUK) code (8 digits) are required to change a blocked PIN code and UPIN code , respectively. The PUK2 code is required to cha n ge a blocked PIN 2 code. If the codes are not supplied with the SIM card, con tact your local service provider for th e codes. Ba rring pa ssw ord The barring passw ord (4 digits) is required w hen using Call barring . See âÂÂCall barring,â p. 77. You can obtain t he pas sw ord from you r service provider. If you enter an incorrect barr in g password three times in succession, t he password is blocked. Contact your service provider. â Nokia support and contact infor ma tion On the web site, you can get information on the u se of N okia product s and services. If you need to contact customer service, check the list of local Nokia contact cent e rs at ww w .nokia.com/custome rse rvice. For mainte nance se rvices, c heck your nearest Nokia se rvice center at www. noki a.com/ rep air. Softw are upd ates Nokia may produce software updates that may offer new features, enhanced functions, or improved performance . You may be able to req uest these updates through the Nokia Software Updater PC application. To update the device software, you need th e Nokia Software Updater application and a com patible PC with Microsoft Windows 2000 or XP operating system, broadband internet acce ss, and a compatible data cable to connect your device to th e PC. To get more information and to dow nload the Nokia Software Updater application, visit www.nokia.com/softwareupdate or your local Nokia web site.
10 1. Ge t st ar ted â Insert a (U)SIM card and battery Always sw itch th e device o ff and disconnect th e char ger befor e removing th e battery . This phone u ses BP- 5M batteries. For availability a nd information on using SIM ca rd services, contac t your SIM card ven dor. This may be the service provider or other vendo r. 1. To open t he back cove r of the phone for th e firs t time, lift it using t he plastic strip shown on the back of the phon e (1). You can then remove the st ri p. To open the ba ck cover later, turn t he low e r part of the phone 90 degre e s le ft or right wh en the n u mber key s of the lower part are on t he same side as the display, and lift the ba ck cover (2). To remove the ba ttery, l ift it a s shown (3). 2. To release the SIM card holder, slide it backwards ( 4), and lift it ( 5). I n se r t t h e ( U ) S I M c a r d t o t h e S I M c a r d ho l d e r ( 6 ) . M a k e s u r e t h a t t h e ( U ) S I M card is pr ope rly insert e d and t hat the golde n-colored contact area on the ca rd is facing dow nwards, and the beveled corner faces upwards.
11 Close the SIM card holder (7), a nd s lide it forward to lock it (8). 3. Replace the ba t tery (9). Replace t he back cov er (10) and (11). â MicroSD card slot Use only compatible microSD cards appr oved by Nokia for use with this device. Nokia uses approved industry standards for memory cards, but some brands may not be fully compa tible with this device. Incompa tible card s may dama ge the car d and the device and corru pt data stored on the card. Keep microSD ca rds out of the re a ch of sm all children. You can ex tend t he avai lable me mory w ith a m icroSD memory card. Y ou can i nsert or remove a microSD card without s w itching the phone off. Import ant: Do n ot re move the memory card in the middle of an operation when the ca rd is being a cces s ed. Removing th e card i n the middl e of an o peration may damage the memory card as well as the de v ice, and data s tored on the ca rd may be cor ru pt ed.
12 Inse r t a micro SD ca rd No te that the m emory car d may b e supplied with the phon e, and ma y alre ady be in sert ed. 1. Open the side door (1). 2. Place the microSD ca rd in the slot wi th th e g old en con ta ct a rea f aci ng down (2). Push t he card ge nt ly t o lock it into place. 3. Close tight t he si de door ( 3). Remove a microSD card 1. Open the side door. 2. Push the card gently to re lease it. Remove mem ory card and press 'OK' is displayed. Pull the c a rd out, and se lect OK . 3. Close tight t he si de door. â Char ge the batter y 1. C onnec t the charger to the wa ll soc ket. 2. Open the side door (1), and connect t h e charger plug to the ch arger connector in the phone (2). 3. After charging, close tight th e side door. If the battery is com p letely discharged, it may take a fe w minut es before the charging indicator appears on th e display or before any calls can be made. The charging time de pends on t he charge r and the battery used. Charging a BP -5M b att ery wi th th e A C-5 ch ar ger ta kes a pp ro xi mat el y 80 mi nute s . 1 2
13 â Switch the phone on and off Press and h old the power key. If the ph one asks for a PIN code, e nt er t he PIN c ode, and select OK . If the ph one asks for the lock code, e nter the lock code, and select OK . The factory s etting for the lock code is 12345. â Set time and date To s et the c or rec t ti me z on e, t ime , and date , s el ect the country you are pres entl y in, then enter the local tim e and dat e. â Normal operating position Use the phone on l y in its nor mal operating posit ion. Not e: As with any r adio transmitting devic e, avoid touching an an t e nna unnec essar ily when the anten na is in use. F or example , avoid touching the cellu lar antenna during a phone c all. Contact with a transmitting or receiving antenn a affects the quality of the radio commu nication, may cause th e device to operate at a higher power level than ot herwise ne eded, a nd may red uce the batt ery li fe. Yo ur dev i ce ha s in ter n al an te n na s. Cellular a ntenna (1) Blue toot h antenn a (2) â Configuration set t ings Before you can use multimedia messaging , instant messaging, push to talk, e-mail, synchronization, st reaming, and the browser, you must ha ve th e prope r conf iguration settings on you r ph one. Your phone may aut omat ically con figur e browser, multimedia messaging, access point , and st re aming settin gs based on the SIM card used. You may a lso rece ive the settings directly as a configuration message,
14 which you save to your phon e. For m ore information on availability, contact you r service provider or n earest a uthorized Nokia deale r. When you receive a configuration message, and t h e settings are not aut om atically saved and a ctivate d, 1 new m essage is displayed. Select Sh o w to open the message. To save the settings, sele ct Opti ons > Save . You may need to ente r a P IN code provided by t he se rvice provide r. 2. Y our p hone â Keys and par ts Power key ( 1) Louds peak er (2) Earpie ce (3) Volume keys (4 ) Left and r ight se lection ke ys (5) Men u ke y (6 ), hereaft er described a s "select Menu " Clear key (7) Call key (8) End key ( 9) Navi⢠scroll ke y (10), hereaft er referred to as scroll key Number keys ( 11) Microphone (12) No kia AV 2 .5-mm c onnector (13) Louds peaker ( 14) Charg er conn ector (15) microSD card s lot (16) USB c onnect or (17) Infra red port (18)
15 Media keys: Rewind, zoom out (19) Play/Pause/Stop, capture ke y (20) Fast forward, zoom in (21) Camera lens (22) Ca me ra fl a s h (2 3 ) â Modes Your phone h a s five f un ctional m odes: phone m ode (1), camera mode (2), music mode (3), video call mode (4), and video view mode. To switch between the modes, turn the lower part o f the phone. There is a short pause befor e a mode is activated. In the ph on e mode, do not t ry t o rotat e the low er part of t he ph one more than 9 0 degrees to th e lef t or 180 de grees t o the right. If you force the lower part of the phone to rotate m ore, the phone will be damaged. Phone mode The phone mode is activated when the number ke ys of the lower part are on the same side as t he display. Camera mode To activat e the ca mera mode while in th e phone mode, t urn the lower part of t he phone 90 degrees t o the left so that the camera lens is poin ting away fr om you when you look at th e display. To take a self portrait, turn the lower part of t he phon e 90 degr e es to the right while in the phon e mode so that the camera lens is pointing toward you w hen you look at the display.
16 Music mod e To activate t he music m ode while in the phone mode , turn t h e lower pa rt of th e phone 180 degrees to the righ t so that the keys u sed t o control music playback are on the same side as the display. Video call mode During video calls, you can let the call recipient to see your face. Tur n the lower part of the phone so that t he ca m era len s is pointing towar d you when you look at the display. You ca n a lso t urn t h e ca m era lens to t he o pposite direction. Vide o view mode When you are viewing a video or still images in t h e phone mode, you can activate th e video view mode. Turn th e lower part of the phone 90 degrees to the left so that the camera lens is pointing away from you. In video v i ew mode the display a utomatically changes to la ndscape, a nd you can put the phon e on the table, for e xample, while viewing. To view the next or previous still images or to fa st forward or re wind the video, press t he fast forward or rewind media key. To play or pause the video, pre ss t he play/pause/stop media ke y. To st op the video, press and h old the play/pause/stop media key. â Standby mode When you have switch e d on the phone, a nd it is re gis t ered to a ne t work, the phone is in t he standby m ode and ready for use. To open t he list of la st dial e d numbers, press the call ke y. To use the voice comm ands or voice dia ling, press a nd hold the right se lection ke y. To change t h e profile, press the power ke y, and select a profile. To star t a con n ection to t he w eb, pres s and hold 0 . Active sta ndby When active st a ndby is e nabl ed, you can use the display for f ast access to frequently used applications. To select whether the active standby is shown, select
17 Menu > Settings > Phone sett. > General > P ersonalis at ion > Standby mode > Act ive standby > On or Of f . To access active standby a pplications, scroll to the application, and select it . In active st a ndby the de fault applications are shown across t he top of the active standby area, a nd calendar, to-do, and playe r events are listed below. To select a n application or event, scroll to it, and se lect it. Offline profile The Off line profile lets you use the phon e wi thout connecting it t o a ne twork. When the O ffline profile is active, the con nection to the w ireless network is turned off, as indicated by in the s i gnal str en gth indicator a re a. All w ireless RF signals to or from your phone are prevented, and you can use your device without a (U)SIM card. Use t he off line profile in radio sensitive environmentsâÂÂon board aircraft or in hospitals. You ca n lis ten to music using the m usic player when the offline pr ofile is active. To leave the Offlin e profile, press the power key, and select another profile. Import ant: I n th e offline profile you cannot make or receive any calls, or use other features tha t require cellular ne twork coverage. Calls may still be possible to the official emergency number programm ed into your device. To make calls, y ou must first activ ate the phone function by changing profile s. If the device has been locked, enter t he lock co de. â Indicators The phone is connected t o a UMTS netw ork. The phone is connect e d to a GSM netw ork. The phone is in offline mode and not connected to a cellu la r network. See âÂÂOffline profile,â p. 17. You recei ved on e or sever al mes sages to th e Inbox folder in Messaging . You received new e-mail in your remote mailbox. Ther e are mess ages wa iti ng to b e sent in Outbox . See â Out box,â p. 35 . You have missed ca lls. See âÂÂRece nt calls, â p. 28. Shown if Ringing t ype is se t to Silent and Me ssage alert tone and E -mail alert tone ar e se t to Of f . S ee âÂÂPr o fil es, â p. 5 8.
18 The phone keypad is l ocked. See âÂÂK eypad lock (keyguard),â p. 2 0. The loudsp eaker is ac tivat ed. An alar m is acti ve. The second phone line is bein g used. See Line i n use in âÂÂCall ,â p. 7 6. / All calls to t h e phone are dive rt ed to your call mailbox or t o another number. If you h a ve two phon e lines, the dive rt indicat or is for th e firs t lin e and for th e second. A he ad se t is co nne c ted to th e p ho n e. A loopset is conn e cted to the ph one . The conne ction to a Bl uetoot h hea dset ha s been lost. / A data call is active. A GPRS packet data connection is active. indicates the connection is on hol d and t hat a con nect ion is availa ble. A packet dat a connection is a ctive in a part of the ne twork t hat supports EGPRS . ind icate s the conne ction is on hold and t hat a connec tion is available. The icons indicate that EGPRS is available in the netw ork, bu t your device is not ne cessarily using EGPRS in the data tra n sfer. A UMTS packet data connection is a ctive. indicates th e connection is on hold and that a connection is available. Bluetooth is switched on. Data is being tr a nsmitted using Bluetooth. See âÂÂBluetooth connection,â p. 84. An infrared connection is active. When infrared is act ive, but t he re is no connection, the indicator blinks. A U SB c onn e ctio n is a ctiv e . Other indicators may also be shown. For push t o talk indicators, see â Push to talk,â p. 87.
19 â Menu In the menu you can access the functions in your ph one. To access t he main menu, press t he men u key; he reafter described a s "select Menu ". To open an application or a folder, scroll to it, an d press the scroll key. To change t h e menu view, select Me nu > Optio ns > Change Menu view and a view type. If you ch a nge the order of the fun ctions in the menu, the order may differ from the default orde r descr ibed in this user guide. To close an application or a folde r, select Back and Ex it as many times as nee ded to return to the standby mode, or select Opt io ns > Ex it . To display and switch betwe en open applica t ions, select and hold Me n u . T he application switching window ope ns, showing a list of open a pplications. Scroll to an application, and select it. To mark or unmark an item in applications, press # . To ma rk or unma rk several cons ecuti ve it ems, pr ess and hol d # , and scroll up or down . Leaving applications running in the background increases the dem and on battery power and reduces the battery life. â W e lcome application We lc o m e appli cation st arts when you switch on your phone for t he first t ime . With th e We l c om e application, you can access t h e following applications: Tu t o ri a l âÂÂLearn about the featu re s of your phone and how to use them. Se ttin gs w i zar d âÂÂConfigure connection settin gs. Dat a tr ans fer âÂÂCopy or synchronize dat a from othe r compatible phones. To open Welcome later, select Menu > Applications > We lc o me . â Tu t o ri a l Tu tor ial con ta in s an i ntr od uc tio n to the pho ne fe at ure s a nd a tuto ri al to t eac h ho w to u se t he p h one. The tuto ri al star ts a uto mat ic all y w hen you tur n on yo ur ph one for t he f irs t ti me . To s ta rt th e tu tor ial you rs elf , se le ct Menu > Tu to r i a l and a tut oria l i tem.
20 â He lp You r devic e has c ontext -sensit ive h elp. You can access t he hel p from a n application or from the main menu. To access help when an application is open, se le ct Op tion s > Help . To s w itc h between help and the application that is open in the background, sele ct and hold Menu . S e lec t Optio ns and from the following opt i ons: T opic list âÂÂto view a list of available topics in the appropriate category Help c ate gory l is t âÂÂto view a list of help categories Search by keyword âÂÂto search for help topics using ke yw ords To o pen he lp fro m th e main menu, se lect Menu > Applications > He lp . In the list of help categories, select t he desired application t o view a list of he lp t opics. To switch between the he lp category li st, indicate d w ith , and a keyw ords list, indicated with , scroll left or right. T o di splay the related help text, se lect it. â V olume control To adju st the e arpiece or lou dspeaker volu me during a call or when listening t o an audio file, pr ess the volume keys. To activate t h e loudspeaker durin g a call, se lect Loudsp eaker . To deactivate t he loudspeaker dur ing a call, select Ha ndset . Warning: Do not hold the device nea r you r ear when the loud speaker is in use, because t he v olume may be extremely l oud. â Keypad lock (keyguard) To prevent a ccidental keypresses, you can lock the keypad. To lock t he keypad in t he phone mode , press the left selection key a nd * withi n 1.5 seconds. T o set t he ph one to aut omat ically lock t he keypad after a ce rtain time, select Menu > Settings > Phone sett. > General > Security > Phone an d SIM card > Keypad autolock period > User de fined and the de sired tim e . To lock the ke ypad in m usic mode, pres s the power key quickly, and select L ock keypad . To unlock the ke ypa d in the phon e mode, select Unlock , and press * withi n 1.5 seconds. To unlock the ke ypa d in music mode, se lect Unlock > OK .
21 When the keypad lock is on, calls may be possible to the of ficial emergency number programmed into your device. â Connect a compatible hea dset Do not connect pr oducts that create an output signal as this may cause damage to the device . Do not conne ct any vo ltage source to the N okia A V connector. When c onnec ting any externa l devic e or any headset, other than those approv ed by Nokia for use with this device , to the Nokia AV connec tor, pay special attention to volum e levels. â Connect a USB data cable To set the default USB connection mode, select Menu > Settings > Conn ectivity > USB > USB m ode and the de sired mode . To set whether t he d efault mode is activated automatically, se lect Ask on connection > No . â Atta ch a w rist s tra p Conn ect the w rist strap a ccor din g to the graphic. 3. Call func tions â Make a voice c all 1. In th e sta ndby mode , ent er t he phon e number, in cluding the area code . Press the c lear key to r emove a numbe r. For international calls, press * twi ce f or the in te rn atio nal p re fi x (th e character re pla ces the int ernational acce ss code), and enter the cou nt ry code, area code (omit the le ading zero if necessary), and ph one number. 2. To call th e n umber, pre ss the call key. To adjust the volum e during the ca ll, pres s the volume keys. 1 2
22 3. T o en d the ca ll, o r to cancel t he c all a t tempt, pre ss the end k ey. To make a call from Con tacts , se l ect Menu > Con tacts . Scroll to the desired name; or ent er the firs t letters of t he name, and scrol l to the desired name. T o call the number, pre ss the call ke y. To call your call mailbox (network service), press and h old 1 in the standby mode. You must define th e mailbox number before you can call your mailbox. See âÂÂCall mailbox,â p. 7 1. To call a recent ly dia led number, pre ss the ca ll key in t h e standby mode . The list of the last 20 numbers you called or attempted to call is shown. Scroll to the n umber you want, and pre ss the call ke y. To make a push to talk call, se e âÂÂPu sh to talk,â p. 87 . Speed dialin g You can assign a phone number to one of t h e spee d dia ling keys 2 to 9 . S ee â Assign speed dia ling keys,â p. 4 1 , or âÂÂSpe ed dial,â p. 7 1. Call a speed dialing number in either of the following ways: ⢠Press the s pe ed dialing key, t hen the call key. â¢I f Speed diallin g is se t to On , press a nd hold the spee d diali ng key un til t h e call begins. To set Speed dialling to On , s e lec t Me nu > Settings > Phone sett. > Phone > Call > Spee d dialling > On . Voic e dia ling A voice tag is a dde d automatically to all entries in Contacts . Use long names, and a void sim ilar names for di fferent n umbers. Mak e a voi ce d i ali ng c all Voi ce tags a re sensiti ve to ba ckgroun d noise. Us e voice t ags in a quiet en vironm ent. Not e: Usin g voice tags may be difficult in a nois y environment or during an emergency, so y ou should not rely solely upon voice dialing in all circumsta nces. 1. In th e sta ndby mode , press and hold the r ig ht selection key. A short tone is played, a nd Speak now is displayed. If y ou are using a compat ible h eadset with t he hea dset key, press and hol d the heads et key.
23 2. Speak the voice command clearly. The phone pla ys the voice comm and of the best match. After 1.5 s econds, th e phone dials the num ber; i f the result i s not the correct one, be fore dialing select Next an d an othe r entry . Using voice commands to ca rry out a phone function is s imila r to voice dialing. See âÂÂV oice commands,â p. 70. Make a confere nce call (network service) 1. Make a call to the f irst pa rticipant. 2. To make a call to another pa rticipant, select Op tio ns > Ne w ca ll . The first call is automatically put on hold. 3. To join the first participant in the conference call when the new call is answered, se lect Opt ions > Conference . To add a new pers on to the call, repeat st ep 2, and select Op tion s > Conference > Add to con ference . The phone supports conference ca l ls bet w een a maximum of six participants, including yourself. 4. T o hav e a pr ivate c onv ersat ion wit h on e of th e pa rtic ipants , sele ct Op ti ons > Conference > Privat e . Select a pa rt icipant and Pri va te . The conference call is put on hold on your phone. T he other participants can still cont inue the conference call. To return to the conference call, s ele ct Opti ons > A dd t o conference . 5. To drop a pa rticipant, select Op tions > Conf erence > Drop participant , scroll to the participant, and select Dr op . 6. T o en d the co nfere nce call, pres s the e nd key . â Ans wer or rej ect a cal l To answer a ca ll, press the call ke y. To adjust the volu me during the call, press the volume ke ys. To mu te th e ring ing t one, s elec t Sile n ce . Tip : If a compati ble headse t is conne cted to th e phon e, pr ess th e heads et key to answ er and end a ca ll. To r ejec t th e call , pr ess the end key, o r sel ect Optio ns > Reject . Th e cal ler hear s a busy tone. If you have acti va ted t he Call divert option If busy to divert calls, rejecting the call diverts the call.
24 To send a t ex t messa ge to t he caller infor min g why you cannot a nswer t h e call, select Op ti ons > Se nd text message . Yo u can activa te th e text messa ge r eply an d edit t he text in the mes sage . Se e Reject call with SMS and Message text in âÂÂCall,â p. 76. Call waiting ( n etwork service) During a call, to answer the waiting call, press the call ke y. The first ca ll is pu t on hold . To end th e active cal l, pr ess t he en d key. To ac t ivate th e Call wait ing functio n, select Menu > Se ttings > Ph one s e tt. > Phone > Call > Call waiting > Act iv ate . To s witch between the t wo calls, select Swap . Optio ns duri ng a ca ll Many of t he optio ns tha t you ca n use during a call a re net work servi ces. Fo r availability, contact your service provide r. Select Optio ns during a call for some of the follow ing options: Tr a n s f er â to connect a ca ll on hold t o an a ctive call and d isconnect yourself Replace âÂÂto end an active ca l l and replace it by a nswering the waiting call Send DTMF âÂÂto se nd DTMF tone str ings (for example, a password). Ent er the DTMF string or search for it in Contacts . To ente r a wa it ch arac ter ( w ) or a pau se char acter ( p ), press * repea tedly. To se nd the t one, se lect OK . Tip : Yo u can ad d DT MF t one s to th e Phone number or DT M F f i e l d s i n a contact card. â Make a video call When you make a vide o call, you can see a real-time, two-way vide o between you and the recipient of the call. The live video image or video im age captured by t he camera in your device is shown to the video call recipient. To be able to make a video call, you may need t o have a USIM card and be in the coverage of a UMTS network. For ava ila bility of and s u bscription to video ca ll services, cont a ct your service prov i der. A video call can only be made between two parties. T he video ca ll ca n be m ade to a compatible mobile ph one or an I SD N client. Video calls ca nn ot be m ade while there is another voice , video, or data call act ive.
25 You are not rece ivin g video (the re cipient is not sending video or the ne t work is not transmitting it) . You have denie d vide o sending from your device. 1. Enter t he phone n umber in th e standby mode; or select Me n u > Contacts , and sc rol l to th e desi red con ta ct. 2. S elect Op tio ns > Call > Video call . Starting a video call may take a while. W aitin g for video image is shown. If the call is not su ccessful (for example, video c a lls are not su pporte d by t h e network, or the re ceivin g de vice is not compatible), you are asked if you want to try a normal call or send a message instead. The video call is act ive whe n you se e two vide o images, and hear t he sound through the loudspeaker. T he call re cipien t may de n y video sending ( ), in which case you hear the sou nd and ma y se e a still image or a gre y background graphic. During video ca lls while the ph on e is in phone mode, t urn the low er part of the ph on e so that t he camera len s is pointing toward you to let the call recipient to see your face, or tu rn the lower part to opposit e direct ion to show the view aw ay f rom you . To increase or decrease the volume during a call, press the volume keys. To change between showing v i deo or o nly hearing sound, se lect Enable or Dis a bl e > Se nding video , Se nding audio , or Sen ding aud. & video . To zoom your own image, se lect Zoom in or Zoom out . T he zoom indicator is shown on the top of t he display. To switch the plac e s of t he sent a nd received v i deo images on t he display, select Change im age order . Even if you have denied video sending during a video ca ll, the call w i ll still b e charged as a vide o call. Check the pricing with your network operator or service prov i der. To en d the vi deo c all, pres s the end key. â Answer a video call When a video call a rrives, is displayed. Press t h e call key to an sw er the video ca ll. Allow video im age to be sent to caller? is sho wn. If you selec t Ye s , the image captured by the ca mera in your device is shown to the caller. If you se lect No , or do nothing, video sending is not activated, and a grey scre en is shown in place of the video.
26 Even if you have de n ied video sending during a vide o call , t h e call is still charge d as a video ca ll. Check the pricin g w ith you r service provider. To end t h e video call, pre ss the end key. â Video sharing Use Video sharing t o send live video from your mobile device to another compatible mobile device during a voice c a ll. Vide o sharing requir ements Because Video sh aring requires a 3 G universal mobile tele communications system (UMTS) connection, your ability to use Video sharing depends on 3G network availability. Contact your service provider for qu estions about network availability and fees asso ciated with thi s appl icati on. To use V ideo sharing you must do th e following: ⢠Ensure that you r de vice is s et up for pers on-t o-person conn e ctions. ⢠Ensure you have an acti ve UMTS connection and are wit h in UMTS network coverage. If you s tart the sharing session while you a re with in UMTS network coverage and a handover t o G SM occurs, t he sharing s ession is discontinued, but your voice call con t inues. ⢠Ensure that both t he sen der and recipient are re gi stered to t he U MTS network. If you invite som eone to a sha rin g session and that personâÂÂs phone is turned off, or the person is n ot within UMTS network coverage, they do n o t k now that you are sending an in vitation. However, you receive an error message that t he recipient cannot a cce pt the invitation. Settings A person - to-person conn ection is also known as a session initiation protocol (SIP) connection. T he SIP profile settings must be configured in your device be fore you can use Video sh aring . Ask your service provider for the SIP profile settings, and save them in your device. You r se rvice pr ovider may s end you the set ting s over the air. If you know a r ecipie ntâÂÂs SIP a ddress, you can enter it on your c ont act card for t hat person. Select Menu > Con tac t s , a cont act, and Op ti ons > Edit > Op ti ons > Add detail > SIP or Share view . Enter the SIP address in the form at
27 sip:username@domainname (you can use an IP address instead of a domain name ). Share l ive v ideo To receive a sharing session, the re cipient must install Video sharing and config ure the required se ttings on their mobile device. Y ou and the re cipien t mu st both be registe re d t o the service before y o u can st art sharing. To re ce ive share invitations, you must be regi st ered to the serv ice, have an act ive UMTS connection, and be w it hin the UMTS network cove rage. 1. When a voice call is a ctive, select Optio ns > Share video > L ive video . 2. The phone se nds the in vitat ion to t h e SIP addre ss you have added to t he contact card of the recipient. If the re cipien t has se veral SIP addresses in the contact card, sele ct t he SIP ad dress to whi ch yo u want to sen d th e inv itati on, a nd Select to send the in vita tio n. If the SIP a ddress of the recipient is not a vailable, e n ter a SI P address. Select OK t o se nd the i nv ita tio n. 3. Sharing begins automatically when th e recipient accepts t he in vitation. The loudspeaker is a ct ive. Y ou can also use a headset t o con tinue your voice call while you share live video. 4. S elect Pa u s e to pause the sharing session. Select Cont in ue to resume sha ring. 5. To en d the sharing sessi on, se lect Stop . To en d th e v oic e cal l, pre ss t he en d key. Accept an invi tation When someone sen ds you a share invi t ation, a n invitation message is displ ayed showing the sen derâÂÂs name or SIP address. If your device is not set t o Sile nt , it ring s w hen y ou receive an invitati on. If some one sends you a share invit a tion and you are not wit hin UM TS n et work coverage, you will not know that you re ce ived an invitation. When you receive an invitation, select from t he following: Accept âÂÂto begin t he sharing ses sion and activate the view mode. Reject âÂÂto declin e the i nvit a ti on. Th e send er rece ives a mess age that yo u rejec ted the i nvit at ion. You can also pr ess the end ke y to de cline the sharing session and disconnect the voice ca ll.
28 To end t he s ha ring se ssion, select Sto p . â Log In the log, you can monitor phone calls, text m essages, packe t dat a con ne ctions, and fax and da t a calls re gistered by the phone. Connections to your remote mailbox, multimedia messaging cen t er, or brow ser pages are shown a s data calls or packet data conn ections in the general communications log. Not e: The a ctual invoic e for c alls and s ervices from your ser vice provide r may v ary, depending on network fe atures, rounding off for billing, taxes, and so forth. Not e: Some tim ers, including the life timer, may be rese t during service or softwa re upgrades. Recent calls The phone regis t ers t he phone n umbers of misse d, received, and dialed ca lls, and the approximate durat ion of your calls. The phone re gisters missed an d received calls only if t he network supports t he se function s, and the phone is switched on and withi n th e net work se rvic e ar ea. To view r ecent calls ( network service) , select Men u > Log > Recent calls and a c al l type . To clear all recent call lists in the Recent calls view, s e lect Op tion s > Cl e ar recen t calls . T o clea r on ly one of t he call regi sters , op en th e regi ster y ou wa nt to erase, and s elect Opti ons > Clear list . General log To view the ge neral log, se le ct Menu > Log , and scroll right. To filter the log, select Opti ons > Filter and the filt er t ype. To er a s e all the lo g co ntent s per manentl y, s elect Optio ns > Clear log > Yes . 4. Writ e text When you write text, appears on the top righ t of t he display, indicat ing predictive text input, or appears, indicating traditional text input. To set t h e
29 predictive text in put on or off when writing text, press * , and se lect Act iva te pre dic tive text or P red ict iv e text > Off . , , or is displayed next t o the text input indicat or, indicating the cha ra cter ca se. To change the cha racter case, pre ss # . indicates the n umber m ode. To change be tween letter and n um ber mode, press # r e peatedly until number mode is a ct ive; or pres s * , and selec t Number mode or Al ph a mode . â T r aditional text input Press a nu mber key, 1 to 9 , repe atedly unti l the de sir ed ch aract er appe ars . Not all characters available under a n um ber key are printed on the key. The availability of characters depe nds on the se lected writing langu a ge. See Writing language in âÂÂLangu age, â p. 72 . If t he nex t le tt er y ou w an t is on t he sam e k ey as t h e pr ese n t on e, wa i t unt il the cursor appears ( or scroll forward to end the time-out period), a nd enter the letter. To i nsert a number, press and hol d the number key. The most commo n punctuation marks and special characters are available unde r the 1 key. For m ore characters, pre ss and hold * . To er a s e a cha racte r, p ress the cl ear key. T o eras e more char acte rs, p ress an d hold the c lear key. To ins ert a space, press 0 . To move the c ursor to t he nex t line, press 0 thr ee ti mes. â Predictive text input To enter any letter with a single ke ypress, use predictive tex t input. To select th e predictive te x t input, press * , and select Activat e pr e dic tive t ext . This acti vates predictive text input for all e ditors in the phone. 1. To write th e des i red word, pr ess the keys 2 âÂÂ9 . Press each key only once for one letter. Th e w ord change s after every keypres s. For t he most common pu nctuat ion marks , pre ss 1. For more punct uation marks and special characters , press and hold * . To er ase a ch aract er, p ress th e clear key. To erase more c hara cte rs, pr ess and ho ld the c le ar key. 2. W hen you h ave fi nished t he word and it is correct, to con firm it, scroll forward or insert a space.
30 If the wo rd is not c orrect, to view the ma tching words the d icti onary has fo und one by one, pre ss * repeatedly. If the ? c har ac te r is show n afte r t he wo rd, th e wo rd you i nte n ded to w rite is not in the dictionary. To add a word t o the dictionary, select Spell . En t er t he word (up to 32 letters) using traditional text input, and select OK . T he wo r d i s added to the dictionary. W hen the dict i onary becomes f ull, a new word replaces the olde st added word. Writ e co mpound wo rds Write the first half of a compou nd word, and scroll forward to confirm it. Write the las t part of the compound word, and to complete the compou nd wor d, press 0 t o ad d a spac e. â Copy and delete text 1. To selec t letters and words, pre ss and hold # , and at the same time scroll lef t or right. As the selection moves, text is highlighted. To s e lect lines of text, pres s and hold # , and at the same time scroll up or down. 2. To copy the text to t he clipboard, press and hold # , and at t he sam e t ime s elect Copy . If you want to del ete the se lect ed tex t fr om the docume nt, p ress t he c lear key. 3. To insert the text, scroll to the insertion point, press and hold # , and at the same ti me sele ct Pas te . 5. Messagi ng You can create, send, receive, view, e dit, and organize text messages, multimedia messages, e-mail messages, presentations, and docume nts. You can also r eceive messages and da ta using B luetooth wireless technology, receive and forward picture messages, rece ive service messages and cell broadcast messa ges, and send service commands. To open t h e Messaging menu, s elect Menu > M essaging . You ca n see t he Ne w message functi on and a list of defa u lt folde rs:
31 Inbox âÂÂcontains received messages except e-mail and cell broadcast messages. E-mail messa g es ar e sa ved in th e Mailbox folder. To read cell broadca st messages, select Op tion s > Cell br oadcast . My f o lde r s âÂÂfor organizing your me ssages int o folde rs Mailbox âÂÂf o r c o n n e c t i n g t o y o u r r e m o t e m a i l b o x t o r e t r i e v e y o u r n ew e - m a i l messages or viewing your previously retrieved e- m ail messages offline. After you define settings for a new mailbox, the name given to that m a ilbox is displayed instead of Mailbox . Dra fts âÂÂsaves draf t messages that have n ot been sent. Sent âÂÂsaves the me ssages t hat a re sent, exclu d ing me ssages sent usin g Blue toot h. Outbox âÂÂtemporarily saves the messages waiting t o be sent. Reports (ne twork serv ice) âÂÂsave s the d eli very report s of the t ext me ssag es, special me ssage types such as busin ess cards, and m ult imedia messages you have sent. Receiving a delivery report of a m ultimedia messag e that has been sent to an e-mail address may n ot be possible. â Write and send messages Your device supports the send ing of text messages beyond the charact er limit for a single messa ge. Longer messages a re sent as a series o f two or m ore messages . Your ser vice prov id er m ay c harg e ac co rdin gly. Ch ar acter s th at u se a cce nt s or othe r ma rks , an d ch ar acter s from some language options, take u p more s pace, limiting the n umber of charac ters that can be se nt in a sing le m essa ge. The wir eless network ma y limit the size o f MMS messa ges. If t he inserted pictur e exceeds this limit, the device may make it smal ler so that it can be sen t by MMS. Only devices tha t have compatible f eatures can rec eive and display multim edia messages. The appearance of a message may vary depending on th e receiving device. Before you ca n send and receive an SMS message , a m ultimedia message, or an e-mail, or connect t o your r em ote mailbox, you mu st have t he corr ect connection settings in place. Se e âÂÂMessaging settings,â p. 36. 1. To crea te a message, select Menu > M essaging > New message an d the message type. To cre ate an Audio message , see âÂÂN okia Xpress a udio messaging,â p. 32.
32 2. Press t he scroll key to select t he recipie nt s or grou ps from Contacts or enter the phone number or e- mai l address of the recipient in the To fie ld. Separa te re ci pien ts w ith a s emi col on (;). 3. When creating an e-mail or multimedia message, scroll down to the subject field, and write th e message subject. 4. Scroll down t o t he message f ield, and write the message. When you write text messages, the message length indicator shows how many characters you can enter in the me ssage. For example, 10 (2) me a ns t hat you can still add 10 charac t ers for the t e xt to be s e nt as t w o separate text messages. To us e a templa te fo r the text mess age, s elect Opt ions > Ins e rt > Templat e . To create a presentation based on a template to be sent as a multimedia message, select Optio ns > C rea te p re s enta t ion . T o use a text temp late for t he multimedi a message, select Op tio ns > Insert object > Te m p l a te . To add a media object to a m ultimedia message, select Optio ns > In se rt object > Image , Sound clip , or V ideo clip . To create a nd add a new media object, select Op tion s > Ins ert ne w > Image , Sound cl ip , Video clip or Slide . When sound is added, is show n. To add a media object to an e - mail, select Opti on s > In s e rt > Image , Sound clip , Video clip , No te or Templat e . 5. To sen d the message, sele ct Optio ns > Send . Nokia Xpress audio messagi ng Audio messages are multimed ia messages that consist of a single sound clip. To create a nd sen d a n audio me ssage: 1. S elect Menu > Me ssaging > New message > Au dio message . 2. In th e To field, press t he scroll ke y to choose the recipients fr om Con tacts , or enter the phone n um ber or e -mai l addr ess. Scroll down to the messa ge fi e ld. 3. To recor d a new sound cli p, press the scrol l key, or se lect Opti ons > Insert sound clip > New sound cli p . T he recording starts. To use a previously recorded sound clip, select Optio ns > Insert sou nd clip > From Gallery , scroll to the sound clip, and select it. The sound clip has to be in .amr format. To play the sound clip on the loudspeaker, select Opt ions > Play sound clip .
33 4. To sen d the message, sele ct Optio ns > Send . E-mail se ttings Before you use e-mail, you must do th e following: ⢠Configure an internet a cce s s poin t (IAP) correctly. See âÂÂConnection,â p. 78. ⢠Define your e-mail settings correctly. See âÂÂE-m ail settings,â p. 33. Follow the instructions given by your e-mail se rvice provider and in t ernet service provider. â InboxâÂÂreceive messages Select Men u > Messaging > Inbox . Wh en th e re a re unr ea d me s sag es i n th e in b ox , the ic on c ha ng es t o . To open a rec eived message, select Me nu > M essaging > Inbox and th e desir e d message. Import a nt: Exercise caution w hen opening messages. Multimedia me ssage objects may contain maliciou s software or otherwise be harmful to your device or PC. View multimedia objects To v iew t he lis t of medi a obj ects that ar e inc luded i n th e multi medi a mes sage, open the message, and select Opt ions > Obje cts . You can save th e file in your phone or send it using Bluetooth tech nology or as a multimedia message to another compatible de vice. Speci a l messa ge type s Your phone can r ece ive many kinds of messages, s uch as ope rator logos, business cards, calendar entries, and ringing tones. To open a rec eived message, select Me nu > M essaging > Inbox and th e desir e d mes sage. You can save t he spec ial mes sage c ontent to yo ur phone . For example , to save a rece ived calendar en try to th e cale ndar , select Opti ons > Save to Calendar . Not e: The picture messa ge function can be used only if it is supported by your service pr ovider. Only compa tible devices that offer pic ture message features can re cei ve an d di splay pi cture mes sage s. T he app ea rance of a mes sag e may var y depending on th e receiving device.
34 Service m essages Service messages (network service) are notifications (for e xample, news headlines) t ha t may contai n a text message or the address of a browser ser vice. For availability and subscription, cont act your se rvice provider. â My f olders You can orga nize your mess ages into fo lders, create new fol ders, a nd r ename an d delete folders. Select Men u > Messaging > My folde rs . To creat e a fold er, s elect Op tion s > Ne w folder , a nd ent er a name f or th e fol der. â Mailbox Select Men u > Messaging > Ma ilbox . Whe n you op en Ma ilbox , C onnect to mailbox? is displaye d. Sele ct Ye s to connect to your m ailbox (network ser vice) or No to view previously retrieved e-mail messages of fline. To connect to t he mailbox a fterwards, s e lect Opti ons > Conne ct . When you create a new m ailbox, t he name you give t o the mailbox replaces Mailbox . You can hav e up t o six mailb oxes. When you are online, t o end the da ta connection to the remote mailbox, select Opti o ns > Disco nnect . Retrieve e-mail messages from the mailbox Import a nt: E xerci se cautio n when o pening mes sages. E -mail m essages may contain malicious software or otherwise be harmful to your device or PC. 1. S elect Menu > Me ssaging > Mailbox > Op ti ons > Connect . 2. S elect Op tio ns > Re tr ieve e-mail and from t he followin g options: Ne w â to retrieve all n e w e-mail messages to your phone Selected â to retrieve only t he e-mail messages that have be en marked All âÂÂto retrieve all m es sages from the mailbox 3. After you retrieve the e-mail messages, you ca n continue view ing them on line. Select Op tio ns > D isconne ct to close t he connection a nd to view the re trieved e-mail messages and headings off line.
35 4. To open an e-mail message, select it. If the e-mail message has not been retrieved and you a re offline a nd select Open , y ou are asked if you want t o re tri eve thi s me ss ag e fr om the m ail bo x. To vie w e-mail attachm ents, indicated with , select Opti o ns > Attach ments . You can retrie ve, open, or save a ttachments in supported formats. Delete e-mail messages To delete an e-mail message from the phone and retain it in the remote mailbox, select Menu > Messaging > M ailbox > Opt ions > Dele te > Phon e only . Th e e-mail heading stays in your phone. To remove the heading as well, delete the e-mail m essage from your re mote mailbox first , then conn ect your ph one to the remote mailbox t o update the st atus. To delete an e-mail from the phon e and the r e mote mailbox, select Op tio ns > Del ete > Phone and server . To cancel deletion of an e-mail from both the phone and server, s croll t o an e-mail that has be en marked t o be deleted durin g the next connection, and se lect Opti o ns > Restore . â Out box The outbox folder is a temporary storage place for messages that are waiting to be sent. To access t he outbox folder, select Me nu > Messaging > Outbox . Message statuse s: Sending âÂÂThe phone is sending th e message. Waiting or Queued âÂÂThe phone is waiting to se nd messages or e -mai l. Resend at ... (time)âÂÂSending fa ile d. The ph one tries to sen d t he message aga in after a t ime -out pe riod. To retry sending t he message im mediately, sele ct Opti o ns > Send . Defe rred âÂÂT o pu t documents to be on hold while they are in t he outbox folde r, scroll t o a m essage that is bein g se nt, and select Opt ions > Defe r se nding . Failed âÂÂTh e maxim um numb er of sendi ng at tempt s has b een reached.
36 â View messages on the SIM card Before you ca n view SIM messages, you ne e d to copy t hem to a folder in you r phone. 1. S elect Menu > Me ssaging > Op tion s > SIM messages . 2. Ma rk the mess ages you want to copy. 3. To copy t he marked messages, se lect Opt ions > C opy , and t he f older to whi ch you want to copy the messages. â Cell broadcast You may be a ble to receive messages, such a s w eathe r or traffic conditions from your ser vice pro vide r (ne twork serv ice). T o turn on t he servi ce, s ee Cell broadcast in âÂÂCell broadcast se t tings,â p. 39. Select Men u > Messaging > Op ti ons > Cell broadcast . A packet data conne c t ion ma y prevent cell broadcast reception. â Service command editor To enter a nd send service comm ands ( also known a s USSD commands) such as activati on com mands for network services to your ser vice provider, select Menu > Messaging > Optio ns > S ervi ce comman d . To send t he comma nd, s elect Opti o ns > Send . â Messaging settings Text message settings Select Men u > Messaging > Op ti ons > Settings > Te xt message and from the following options: Message centres âÂÂlists a ll the defin e d message cent e rs Mes sage ce ntre in us e âÂÂdefines which message center is used for delivering text messages and special message t ype s such as business cards Character encoding > Full support âÂÂto select all characters in the message to be sent as vie wed. If you select Reduced support , char act ers wit h acc ents an d othe r marks may be c onverted to other chara cters. Receive report ( netw ork service)âÂÂWhe n set to Ye s , the status of t he sent m e ssage ( Pen di n g , Failed , Deliv ered ) is s hown in Reports .
37 Message validity âÂÂIf the recipient of a message cannot be reached wit hin the validity period, th e messa ge is removed from t h e message se rvice cen t er. Note that the ne twork must su pport this feat ur e. Message sent as âÂÂto de fine how th e message is sent. De fault is Text . Preferred connection âÂÂYo u ca n send t ext message s usin g the normal GSM net wor k or, if su pported by the network , packet data. Reply via same ce ntre (n etwork service)âÂÂI f you select Ye s , and the recipient replie s to your me ss a ge, t he re turn me ss a ge is se nt using the sa me message ser vice center number. Some ne t works do n ot provide this opt ion. Multimedia me ssaging settings Select Men u > Messaging > Op ti ons > Settings > Multimedia m essage and from the fo llo w ing o pti on s: Image size âÂÂDefine the size of the image in a multimedia mess age. If you s ele ct Original , the image is no t scaled. MMS cr e ation mode âÂÂIf you select Gu id ed , the phone informs you if you try to send a me ssage that may not be su pport ed by t he recipie nt . T o set the phone to prevent you from sending messages that are not supported, se l ect Rest rict ed . I f you select Free , me ssage creation is not res tricted, but the recipient may n ot be able to view your message. A ccess point in use âÂÂS elect w hich acces s poin t is used a s the prefe rred connec tion for multimed ia messaging. Multimedia retrie val âÂÂTo receive multimedia messages only when you are in your home network, select Au t o i n ho m e net w. . To always receive multimedia messages, select Al ways au tomatic . To retrieve messages manually, select Manual . T o n ot receive any multimedia messages or advertisements, select Off . Allow anon. msgs. âÂÂTo re ject messages comi ng from an anonymous sender , select No . Rece ive a dver ts âÂÂDefine wheth er you w ant to allow reception of multimedia message adver tisements. Receive report âÂÂIf y ou want the s t atus of t he sent message ( Pe n d i n g , F ailed , or Del iver ed ) to be shown in Report s , select Ye s . Receiving a deliv e ry report of a multimedia me ssage t hat has be en sent to a n e -mail a ddress may not be possi ble. Deny re port s ending > Ye s â to deny se nding delivery reports
38 Message validity (network service )âÂÂIf the recipient of a message cannot be reached within the validity period, the message is removed fr om the multimedia message ce n ter. E-mail se ttings Sett ings for mailb oxes Select Men u > Messaging > Op ti ons > Settings > E- mail > Mail boxes an d a mailbox. If no mailbox set t ings have bee n defin e d before, you a re asked if you want to def ine the sett ings. Con ne cti on s ett in gs > Incomin g e-mai l and Outgoing e-ma il âÂÂTo define the correct settings, contact your e-mail service provider. User setti ngs Select Use r se tt ing s and from the following settings: My n ame âÂÂEnter the name to be displayed in outgoing e -mai l. Send message ( network servic e)âÂÂTo set wh en yo ur e- mail mes sage s are s ent, select Immediately or Dur ing nex t conn. . Send copy to se lf âÂÂSel ect Ye s to send a copy of the e-mail to the a ddress defi n ed in My e-mail address . Include signature âÂÂSe lect Ye s to attach a signature to your e-mai l messages and to c rea te or e dit a si gn at ure te xt. New e- ma i l al ert s âÂÂTo not receive alerts about new e-mail, select Off . Retrie val setti ngs Select Re trieval settings and from the follow ing set t ings: E-mail to retr ieve âÂÂTo only re t rieve headers, select Headers only . To limit how much data is retrieved, select Size limit , and ent e r the m aximum amount of da ta per messa g e in kilobytes. To re t r ieve messages and attachments, sele ct Msgs. & attachs. . The Size limit an d Msgs. & attachs. options are only available with POP3 mailboxes. Retrieval amount âÂÂTo limit the number of messages t o ret rie ve from t he inbox of the re m ote ma i lbo x, sel ec t From Inbox > No. of e-ma ils and enter the m aximum number of me ssages to retr ieve. You can al so limit the number of messages to retrieve from other subscribed f o lders in From folders (only IMAP4 mail boxes).
39 IMAP4 folder path (only IMAP4 mail boxe s)â De f ine the folder path for IM AP4 mailboxes. Folder subs cript ions (only IMAP4 mailboxes)âÂÂSelect the mai lbox folders you want to subscribe to. To subscribe to or unsubscribe from a folder, sc roll to it, and select Opti o ns > Subscribe or Cancel subscription . Autom atic re trieval Select Automa tic r etr ieval and from the following settings: E- mail no tifi catio ns âÂÂTo automatically retrieve the headers to your device when you receive a notification of new e -mail in your remote mailbox, select Auto-update or O nly in hom e netw . . E-mail retrieval âÂÂT o have e - mail headers automatically retrieved at set intervals, select Enabled , or if you onl y wa nt head ers to be re tri eved i n your home ne twork , select Only in home netw. . Headers can be aut omat ically re tr ieved f or two mailboxes at m ost. You ca n set on which days, at w hat tim es, and how frequently the header s ar e retr ieved in Retrieval days , Retrieval hours , a nd Retrieval in terval . E- mail no tifi catio ns and E-mail r etrie val c a n no t b e a c t i v e a t t h e s a m e t i m e . Service message settings Select Men u > Messaging > Op ti ons > Settings > Service message and f rom the following settings: Service messages âÂÂAllow or den y t he re ce ption of service messages. Download messages âÂÂDownload messages autom a tically or manu a lly. Cell broadcast settin gs Check with your service provide r whether cell broa dca st (network service) is available and what the available topics and re la ted topic nu m bers are. Select Men u > Messaging > Op ti ons > Settings > Cell broadcast and fr om the following settings: Reception âÂÂSel ect On or Off . Lang uage âÂÂSelect in which languages cell br oa dcast messages are received. T opic detection âÂÂTo automatically save pre vious ly unknown topic num be rs in received cell broadcast mes sa ges, select On .
40 Other sett ings Select Men u > Messaging > Op ti ons > Settings > Other and from the following setti ngs: Save sent messages â Selec t to save a c opy o f eve ry se nt t ext m essag e, mu ltime dia message, or e-mail t o the Sen t folder. Number of saved msgs. âÂÂDefin e how many sent messages are saved to the se nt items folder at a time. When the limit is reached, the oldest message is deleted. Memo ry in us e â Sel ec t w het he r to sav e m e ssa ges to t he ph one me mo ry or memo ry c ard. â Mes sage re ader With Msg. reader , you can listen t o received text, multimedia, and e-mail messages. To listen to a message in Inbox or Mailbox , scroll to the m essage or mark the messages, a nd sele ct Opti ons > Lis ten . To skip t o the ne xt m e ssage, scroll down. Tip : Wh en 1 new message or Ne w e- mai l is displayed in t h e standby mode, to listen to the re ceived messages, press and hold the lef t selection key until Msg. reader starts . 6. Cont acts You can sav e and ma nage con tact informat ion, s uch as n ames, phone num bers, and addre sses. â Manage contacts Select Men u > Contacts . To add a n ew co ntact , select Op tion s > Ne w c ont act . Fill in t h e fields you want, and s elect Do ne . To edit a contact, scroll to it, and s e lect Op tion s > Edit . To assign default numbers and addresse s t o a contact, se lect it, and select Opti o ns > Defa ult s . Scroll t o the de sire d defa u lt option, a nd select Assign .
41 To copy names and numbers from a SIM car d t o your phone, sele ct Opti ons > SIM contacts > SIM directory . Scroll to the name you want to copy or mark the desired names, and select Opti on s > Copy to Con tacts . To copy a ph one , fa x, or pager number from conta ct s to you r SIM car d, scroll to the contact you w a nt to copy, and select Opt ions > C opy > To SIM directory . To view the l ist of fixed dia ling n umbers, select Opti ons > SIM contacts > Fixed dialling . This setting is only shown if supported by you r SIM card. â Manage contact groups Create a con t act group so that you can send t ext or e - mail messages to several re cipient s at the s ame ti me. 1. S elect Menu > Cont acts . 2. Scroll to t he right, a nd select Opti ons > New group . 3. Enter a name for the group, and select the group. 4. S elect Op tio ns > Add me mbers . 5. Mark the cont acts you want to add to the group, an d select OK . â Add a ringing t one You can se t a r ingin g tone (also a video ringing tone) for e a ch contact a n d group. 1. S elect Menu > Cont acts . 2. T o add a ringi ng tone to a contact , sel ect t he con tact, Opti ons > Ri nging to ne , and the desire d ringin g tone. To add a ringing t one to a group, scroll righ t to the groups lis t , and scroll t o a contact group. Se le ct Opt ions > R i ngi ng t one and the ringing tone for t he group. To remove t he personal or group ringing tone, sele ct Def ault ton e as a ringin g ton e. â Assign speed dialing keys ⢠Speed dialing is a quick way to call frequently us ed n umbers. Y ou can assign a phone number to the spee d dialing keys, 2 to 9 . T h e 1 ke y is reserved f or the call mailbox . Speed dia ling has to be activated before using spee d dialing. To ac tivate the s peed dia ling , sel ect Menu > Settings > Phone sett. > Phone > Call > Speed dialling > On .
42 1. S elect Menu > Cont acts and a co ntact. 2. Scroll to a number, and select Op ti ons > Assign speed dial . Scroll to the desired speed dialing key, and se le ct Assi gn . When you return to the cont act information view, next to the nu mber indicates th e assigned speed dial. To call the contact by speed dialing, in the standby mode, press th e spe ed dialing key and t he call key, or pre ss a nd h old t he speed dialing ke y. 7. Galle ry Use Ga llery to sa ve and organize your images, videos, music tr a cks, sou nd clips, playlists, streaming links, .ram files, and presentations. Select Men u > Gallery . To op e n a fol de r (suc h as Images ), select it. To open a file, select it. The file ope n s in its corresponding application. The videos you dow nload or t ransfer to your phone are saved in V ideos . To a ccess Videos in the sta ndby m ode, s ele ct Vi deos , or sele ct Me nu > G allery > Vi de os , or select Menu > Media > Videos . You can tra n sfer videos t o y ou r phone from a compat ible PC, and download vide o clips from com pa tible internet vide o services to your phone using pa cke t data. â Gallery functions To set an ima ge as a w allpape r, se lect Images , and scroll to the image. Select Opti o ns > Use im age > Set as wallpape r . To assi gn the im age to a con tact, select Assign to cont act . To set a vide o as a video ringing tone, select V ideos , and scroll to the video. Select Opti o ns > Use video > Set as ringing tone . T o assign t he vide o for a contact, select Assign to cont act . To copy files to phone mem ory or to the memory card, scroll to the file or mark the files, and select Opti ons > Organise > Copy to phone mem. or Co py to me mory card . To create image or video folders and m ove files to them, select Images or Videos , and s croll to a file. Select Opti o ns > Organise > Ne w fold er and the memory, and enter a name for t he folder. Ma rk the fil es you want t o move to t he f older, a nd select Op ti ons > O rganise > Mov e t o f ol der and t he f older.
43 View vide os and images When you are viewing videos or st ill images in the phone mode, you can activate the video vie w mode. Turn t he lower pa rt of the phone 90 degrees to the left so that the camera le ns is pointing away from you. In vide o vie w mode th e display automatically changes to landscape, and you can put the phon e on the table, for example, w hile vie wing. To view the next or previous still images, press the f a st forward or rewind med ia key . To fast f o rward or re w ind the video, pres s th e fa st for w ard or rewind media key. To play or paus e the vide o, press th e play/pause/st op m edia key. To s top the video, press and h old the play/pause/stop media key. Edit images To edit image s in Ga llery , scroll to t he image, and select Op tion s > Edi t . To crop an image, select Opti o ns > Apply effect > Crop . To crop the image size manually, select Manual or a prede fin ed aspect ratio from the list. If you select Man ual , a cr oss appears in the upper le ft corne r of the image. Scroll t o se lect th e area to crop, and select Se t . Another cross appears in the lower right corne r. A gain select the area t o be cropped. To a dju st the firs t selected area, select Ba ck . Th e selected areas f orm a rectangle, w hich forms t h e cropped image. If you select ed a pr edefi ned asp ect ra tio, se lect the upp er lef t corn er of th e area to be cropped. T o resize the highlighted area, use the scroll ke y. T o freeze the se lected area, press the scr oll key. To mo ve th e area withi n th e pict ure, u se t he scroll ke y. T o select the area to be cr opped, press the scroll key. To r educe rednes s of th e eyes in an i mage, se lect Opti o ns > Apply effect > Re d eye reduct ion . Move the cross ont o the eye, and press the scroll key. A loop appears on the display. T o re si z e the loop t o fit the size of the eye, scroll up, dow n, lef t , or right. To reduce the redness, press t he scroll ke y. Shortcuts in the image editor: ⢠To view an image in the full scre en, pres s * . To r eturn t o the nor mal vi ew, pres s * aga in. ⢠To rotate an ima ge clockwise or counterclockwise, press 3 or 1 . ⢠To zoom in or out , press 5 or 0 . ⢠To move on a zoomed image, scroll up, down, left, or r ight .
44 Edi t videos To edit videos in Gallery and crea te cust om video clips, s croll to a video clip, and select Op ti ons > V ideo e dit or > Optio ns > Edit video clip . In the video editor you can see two timelines: video clip timeline and sou nd clip timeline. The images, t e xt, and transitions added to a video are shown on the video clip timeline. To switch between the timelines, scroll up or down. Modify video To modify the vide o, select from the following Edit video clip options: Cut âÂÂTrims the video clip in the cut vide o clip vie w. Add colour effect âÂÂInse rts a color eff e ct on the vide o clip. Use slow motion âÂÂSlows the speed of the vide o clip. Mute sound or Unmu te sound â Mutes or u nm utes the original vide o clip sound. Mo ve âÂÂMov es th e vid eo cl ip t o the s elec ted l ocati on. Adjust volume âÂÂAdjusts the volume level. Remove âÂÂRemoves the video clip from the video. Duplicate âÂÂMakes a copy of t h e sele ct ed video c li p. Edi t text (shown only if you added te x t)âÂÂTo m ove, remove, or duplicat e t ex t; change the color and style of the text; defin e how long it stays on the screen; a nd ad d effe cts t o th e tex t. Edit image (shown only if you added a n image)âÂÂTo move, remove, or du plicate an image; define h ow long it s t ays on t he scre e n; and se t a background or a color effect t o the image . Edit sound clip (shown only if you have a dde d a sound clip) â To cut or m ove the sound clip, to adjust its length, or to r emove or duplicat e the clip. Edi t tr an siti on âÂÂThere are t hre e t ypes of transitions: a t t he start of a video, at t he end of a vide o, and transitions between video clips. You can select start t ransition when the firs t transition of the video is active. Insert âÂÂSel ect Video clip , Image , Text , Sound clip , or New sound cli p . Mo vie âÂÂP revie w the movie in the full scr een or a s a t humbnail , sa ve or send th e movie, or cut the movie to a proper size f or s ending it in a multimedia message. To take a sna psh ot of a video clip, in the cut vide o view, se lect Opti ons > Tak e snapshot . In the thumbnail preview view, press the scroll ke y, and se l ect Take snapshot .
45 To save your video, se lect Opti ons > Mo vie > Save . To define the Memor y in use , select Op ti ons > Se ttings . To send t he video, sele ct Se n d > V ia multimedia , Via e-m ail , Via Bluetooth , or Via infrared . Contact your service provider for det a ils of the m aximum multimedi a message size that you can send. If your video is too large to send in a multimedia message, appears. Transf e r vide os from PC To transfe r videos from a compatible PC, use a com patible USB cable or Blue tooth connectivity. The requ ire ments of t he PC for video tra nsfer: ⢠Microsoft Windows XP operat ing system (or later) ⢠Nokia PC Suite 6.82 or la ter ⢠Nokia Video Manager application (a add-on application to PC Suit e ) To transfer videos use N okia Video Manager, connect the compatible USB cable or activate Bluetooth con n ection, and sele ct PC Suite as th e connection m ode. To change t he default U SB connection mode, se lect Menu > Settings > Connectivity > USB > USB mode . Nokia Video Manager is opt imized for transcoding and t ransfering video files. For information about transfe ring video with Nokia Video Manager, see t he Nokia Video Manager help. Download files Select Men u > Gallery , the folder f or the file type you want to download, a nd the download function (for example, Images > Downl. graphics ). The browser opens. Choose a bookmark f or the site to dow n load from . 8. Musi c p lay er Warning: L i sten to mu sic at a moderat e level. Continuous e xposure to high vo lume m a y d a m a g e y o u r h e a r i n g . D o n o t ho l d t h e d e v i c e ne a r y o u r e a r w he n t he loudspea ker is in use, because the volume may be e xtremely loud. To activ ate music m ode a nd st art Music playe r , turn the lower part of the phone to the right so that the playback control keys ar e on th e sa m e side as t h e displa y.
46 You can li sten to mus ic al so when the Offline profile is activated. See âÂÂOffline profile,â p. 17. To add songs to your device, see âÂÂTransfer music,â p. 4 8. For more information about copyright protecti on , see âÂÂActivation keys,â p. 9 8 . â Listen to music 1. A cti va te the m usi c m ode . 2. In Music me nu , select the category, such as All s ongs or Albums . 3. Select the music you w a nt to play. Use the media ke ys to con t rol p layback. ⢠Press the play/pause/stop key to play or pause a song. Press and hold the key t o stop the playba ck. ⢠Press t he rewin d key to rewind the song or to skip backwards. ⢠Press t he f a st for ward key to fast for ward the song or to skip forward. You can also us e the scroll key to cont rol t he player . To adjust the volu m e, use the volu m e ke y. To switch random play ( ) on or off, select Opt io ns > Shuffle . To re pe at the current song ( ) , al l songs ( ) , or to swit ch repeat off, select Opti o ns > Repeat . To modify the tone of the music playback, select Opti ons > Equaliser . To modify the bala nce loudness or st ereo widening, select Op tio ns > Audio settings . To view a visualization during playba ck, select Op tio ns > Star t visualisation . To retu rn to the standby mode and leave th e playe r in the ba ckground, pres s the end ke y. I f Active stan dby is On , the currently playing song is displa yed in the standby mode. To a ccess the music player from the standby mode, se lect th e currently playing s ong. To s w itch to another ope n applica tion, pres s and hold Menu . â Music menu To s elec t more mus i c to p lay in Now playing vie w, select Opti ons > Go t o Mu sic menu . To return to the Now p layi ng vie w, select Op tion s > Go to Now playing .
47 The music menu sh ow s the music a vailable in the phone and com pa tible memory card (i f inserted). All so ngs lists al l music. To vie w sorted songs, sele ct Albums , Artist s , Genres , or Com posers . To view playlists, select Playlists . To re fresh t he l ib r ary af ter you have upda ted t he song select ion in your ph one, select Op ti ons > Refresh Mu si c l ibrary . â Playlists To view and manage playlists, in the music menu, select Playlists . The following playlists appear a u tomatically: Most played tracks , R ecently played songs , a nd Recent additions . To view details of t he playlist, select Opti o ns > Playlist details . Creat e a pl aylis t 1. S elect Op tio ns > Cre ate playlist . 2. E nt er a name for th e pla ylist, and se lect OK . 3. S elec t arti sts to find t he so ngs y ou want to inc lude i n the play list. Press the scroll key to add items. T o show the song list un der a n artist title, s croll right. To hide the song list, scroll left. 4. When you have made your selections, select Done . If a com patible m emory card is inserted, the playlist is saved t o the memory card. To add more songs later, when viewing the playlist, select Op tion s > Add s ongs . To add songs , album s, a rt ists, gen res, a nd composers t o a playlist from the diff erent v iews of the m usic menu , select an i tem and Opt ions > Add to a playlist > Saved playlist or New playlist . To remove a song from a playlist, select Opti on s > Remo ve from pl aylis t . This deletion does not delete the song from the phone ; it on l y re moves it fr om the playlist. To reorder songs in a play li s t , scrol l to the song you want to move, and sele ct Opti o ns > Reorder list > Gr ab , scroll to a new position, and select Drop . â Mu sic sh op In th e music sh op (network service ) you can sear ch, browse, and pu rchase music for downloading to your phone . T h e variety and a ppearance of mu sic shop services may vary. For m ore information and availability of m usic shop, contact your service proder.
48 You must have music shop se ttings and valid internet conn ections in order to use this service. For more details, see â Music shop set t ings,â p. 48, and â Access points,â p. 78. To go to mu sic sh op, in th e Musi c player , selec t Op ti ons > Go to Musi c shop Music shop se t tings The availability and appearance of the music shop settings may vary. The settings ma y al so be p red ef in ed, an d y ou c an no t ed it th e m. In the music sh op, you may be able to edit the se t tings by sele cting Opti ons > Se ttin gs . If the sett in gs are not predefined, you may be asked to en t er the f ol lowing setti ngs: Addre ss âÂÂY ou mu st define t he w e b address of t he music shop s e rvice. Default acc. pt. âÂÂSel ec t t he ac ce ss p oi nt to us e w hen co nne c tin g to th e mus ic shop. User nam e âÂÂEnte r your user na me for t he mus ic shop. Pa s s w o r d âÂÂEnter your pa ssword f or the music shop. If User name and P assword fields are le ft empty, y ou may have to enter th em at login. â Tr a n sf e r m us i c You can buy music protected with WM DRM from online music shops, and transfer the mu si c to y our ph one . To transfe r m usic from a compatible PC or other compatible device s, use a compatible USB cable or Bluetooth connectivity. You can also IR connection. For details, s e e âÂÂBluetooth con n ection,âÂÂ, p. 84, or âÂÂInfra re d,â p. 92. Y ou cann ot transfer WMDRM protected mu sic files using Bluetooth or I R connection. To re fresh t he l ib r ary af ter you have upda ted t he song select ion in your ph one, i n the Mus ic menu , se l ect Optio ns > Refresh Music librar y The requ ire ments of t he PC for music purch ase a nd tr a nsfer: ⢠Microsoft Windows XP operat ing system (or later) ⢠Compatible version of Windows Me dia Player application ⢠Nokia PC Suite 6.82 or la ter
49 Transfer music f rom PC You can us e thre e diff erent methods to t ransfer mus ic: ⢠To view your ph one on a PC as a n external hard drive wh ere you can transfer any data files, m a ke the connection wi t h a compatible USB cable or Blu e tooth connectivity. If you are using t he USB cable, sele ct Da ta tran sf er as the connection mode. A compa tible memo ry car d needs to be i nsert ed in the p hone. You cann ot transfer WMDRM protected mu sic files using D ata tra nsfe r . ⢠To synchronize music with Windows Me dia Player, connect t he compatible USB cable and select Media player as t h e connection mode. A com pa tible memo ry ca rd need s to be ins erted i n th e phon e. To use Nokia Music Manager in Nokia PC Suit e, connect the compa tible USB cable or a ctivate Bluetooth connection, and select PC Suit e a s the connec tion mode. You cannot tr a nsfer WMDRM protecte d m usic files usin g PC Suite . To change t he default U SB connection mode, se lect Menu > Settings > Connectivity > USB > USB mode . Both Windows Media Player and Nokia Music Manager in Nokia PC Suite have been opti m ized f or transfer ring music file s. For infor mation about tra nsferring music with Nokia Music Ma nager, se e the Nokia PC Suit e user guide. Music tr ansfer with Windows Me dia Player The fun ct ionality of t he music synch ronization may vary be tween differen t versions of t he Windows Media Pla yer application. For m or e information, se e the corresponding Windows Media Player gu ide s and helps. 9. Media â Visual Radio You can us e the Visual Radi o appl icati on as an FM ra dio w ith au tomatic tu ning and preset st a tions or w ith parallel v isual information related to the radio program if you tune in to st a tions that offer Visual Ra d io serv i ce. T he Visua l Radio se rvice us es packe t data (n etwork ser vice) . To use t h e Visu a l Radio service, the following requirements must be m et:
50 ⢠The radio station and your service provider m ust su pport t his service. ⢠Your intern e t access poin t must be defined for a ccess to the network operatorâÂÂs Visual Radio server. ⢠The radio station m ust have th e correct Visual Radio service ID defined and have Visual Radio se rvice enabled. Visual Radio ca nnot be sta rt ed when t he phone is in th e offline mode. The FM radio depends on an a ntenna other than the wir eless device antenna. A compa tible headset or enhanc ement needs to be atta ched to the device for the FM radio to function properly. Warning: L i sten to music a t a moderat e level. Continuous e xposure to high vo lume m a y d a m a g e y o u r h e a r i n g . D o n o t ho l d t h e d e v i c e ne a r y o u r e a r w he n t he loudspea ker is in use, because the volume may be extrem ely loud. You can make a call or answer an incoming call while listening to the radio. The radio is turned off when there is an act ive call. To open Vi su al Radio, select Me nu > Me dia > R adio . To turn th e radio off , select Ex it . Tune a nd save a r a di o station To start the stat ion search wh en the r a dio is on, s e lect or . Searching stops when a station is found. To sa ve the station, select Op t i ons > Save station . S e lec t a locat ion for the st ation . En ter the n ame o f the st ation , and select OK . Radi o functions To adjust th e volume, pres s the volume keys. Select or to scroll t o the next or previous saved st a tion. The buttons are inactive if there a re n o saved stations. Whe n usin g a co mpatib le he adse t, pres s the h eadset key to s croll to th e next saved radio station. To save th e cur rent station, sele ct Optio ns > Save station , a preset position, and ent er the st at io n nam e . To s et the stat ion fr equency manuall y, sel ect Optio ns > Ma nual tuning . To listen t o the ra dio in the background and go to the st a ndby mode, se lect Opti o ns > Play in background .
51 Station l ist When the radio is on, select Op tion s > Stations . The station list is used for managing the saved r a dio stations. Stat ion s etup Scroll to a s t ation in the station list, pr es s the scroll key, and select Edi t to ch ang e the s ta ti on pa ra me ter s. View visu al cont ent To check availability and cost s, and to s ubscr ibe to t he service, cont a ct your service provider. To view visu a l content of the current stat io n, s e lect . If the visual se rvice ID w as not sa ved in the station list , you are asked f or the visual service ID. Enter t he visual service I D, and select OK . If you do not have the visual service ID, select Retri eve to access t he stat ion directory (network se rvice). To e nd th e v isua l conte n t fee d bu t n ot th e FM rad io, sel ec t Close . To set ligh t settings a nd th e power save r time-out, select Op tion s > Di spl ay settings . Visual Radio setti ngs When the radio is on, select Op tion s > Settings and the following: Start-up tone âÂÂto e nable or disable t he start - up tone Auto-st art service âÂÂto e nable or disable the automatic display of visual content Acces s poin t âÂÂto select the access point Station d ir ec tory With the station direct ory (network service) you can select Visual Radio enabled or traditional radio stations from a list, grou pe d in folders. To check availability and cost s, and to s ubscr ibe to t he service, cont a ct your service provider. Acc ess fro m the visua l c ontent vi ew To re tr ie ve the visual service ID and to start visual conten t for the c urrently t uned radio sta t ion, select and Retrieve . Af ter t he con nec tio n to the stat io n
52 directory is established, select the nearest location to your current position from a list of f olders, and pre ss the scroll key. The device compares the frequen cie s of the listed radio stations with t h e currently tune d in f requenc y. If a matchi ng frequ ency is foun d, the visual servic e ID of the tuned radio st a tion is displa yed. Select OK to start viewing the vis ua l content. If there is mor e than one radio sta t ion with matching fr equencies, the radio stations and their visual service ID are displa yed in a list. Select the des ired radio station. The tuned radio station a nd the vis ual serv i ce ID are displayed. Select OK to start vie wing the vis u al content. Acce ss from op tions To access the station directory ( ne twork service) from the station list, sele ct Opti o ns > St ation dire ct ory . Aft e r the co nne cti on to th e stat io n di re cto ry , se lec t th e n ea res t loc a tio n to yo ur current position from a list of loca tions. Radio stations that provide visual con tent are indicated with . Select the des ire d radio s t ation and from the following options: Listen âÂÂto tune to the high lig hted ra dio st ation. To c onfirm the f requenc y sett ing, select Yes . Start visual service â to open t he visual content of the sele cted radio station (if avai lable ) Save âÂÂt o save t h e details of the selected radio sta t ion to the st a tion list Deta il s âÂÂto vie w chann el infor mation â Camera To activat e the ca mera mode while in th e phone mode, t urn the lower part of t he phone 90 degrees t o the left so t hat the camera le ns is pointing away fr om you when you look at t he display. To take a self por tr ait, t urn the lower part of t he phone 90 degrees to th e right so that the camera lens is pointing t ow ard you when you look at th e display. on the upper lef t of th e display indicates t h e still image mode. To capture an imag e, press th e ca pt ure key. You can al so capture an image by pressing t he scroll key. The image is sa ved to Images in Galler y , and the im age is displayed. To return to the viewfinder, s elect Back . T o del ete the im a ge , pre ss th e clear key.
53 To zoom in or ou t, press the fa st forward or re w ind m edia key. To capture images se que ntially, select Opti ons > Sequence mode > On , or press 4 . When you press t he scr oll ke y, the came ra captures six images in short intervals and d ispl ays the im age s in a gri d. To t urn the fla sh on, s elect Opti on s > Flash > On . If you select Au tomatic , flash is us ed aut omatic ally when n eces sary. Keep a saf e dis tance when us ing the flas h. D o not us e the flash on people o r a ni mals at close ra nge . Do n ot c ove r th e fla sh whi le tak ing a pic tur e. In dim lighting, to use n ight mode, select Opti ons > Night mode > On , or press 1 . To us e the s elf-t imer, selec t Opti ons > Self-t imer and the time y ou wa nt th e camera to wait bef ore capturing the image. Press t he scroll ke y, a nd the t imer starts. To adjust the white balance or color tone, select Op tio ns > Ad jus t > White balance or Colour tone . To record a video, select Opt ions > Vide o mode , or scroll right . on the u pper left of the display in dicates the video mode. To start the recording, press t he capture ke y or t he scroll key. To pause the recor ding, press the capture key. To stop the r ecordin g, pre ss and hold the capture key. To use the pa norama mode, sele ct Opti o ns > P anorama mode , or scroll right. on the u pp er left of the display indicates t he panorama mode . Press the capture key t o start capt u ring a panorama image. The panorama preview is shown on the display. Tur n slowly to the right or le ft. Y ou cann ot ch a nge the direction. You turn t oo fast if the arrow on the display is red. To stop the panorama, pres s the capt ure ke y again . Came ra settings Your device supports an ima ge capture resolution of 1600 x 1 200 pixels. You can change camera settings for still images. In the camera mode, select Opti o ns > Settings > Image and fr om the following s e ttings: Image quality and I mage resolution âÂÂThe better th e image quality and the high e r the resol utio n, th e mo re memory th e imag e cons umes. Show captured image âÂÂTo not displa y th e image after capturing, select No . Default image name âÂÂC ha ng e ho w the ca ptu r ed i ma ge s ar e n am ed . Memo ry in us e âÂÂSel ect whe ther y ou want t o sa ve you r imag es in t he p hone memo ry or on the memory c ard.
54 You can change ca me ra s e ttings for vide os. In the camera mode , select Op t i ons > Se ttin gs > Vide o and from the following set t ings: Lengt h âÂÂIf set to Max im um , the length of t he re corde d video is only restricted by the avai lable memory . If set to Short , the recording time is optimized for MMS sending. Video resolution âÂÂSelect b etween two video resolu t ions. Default video name âÂÂSe lect how th e vide o cl ips ar e named . Memo ry in us e âÂÂSelect whether you want t o save your video clips in t he phone memo ry or on the memory c ard. â Movie director A muvee is a s hort, edited video clip that can contain video, image s, music, and text. Quick m uvee is cre ated automatically by Mo vie director after you se lect the st yle f or the m uvee . Movie director us es the d efault musi c and t ext a ssocia ted with the chose n style. In a cu stom muvee you ca n select your own video and music clips, images and style, and add an opening a nd closing message. You can se nd muvees with MM S. A muvee can be saved in Gallery in .3gp file format. To create muve es, select Me nu > Media > Movi e . Mark images and vide os, and select Op ti ons > Cre ate muvee . Create a qui ck mu vee 1. To creat e a quick muvee, select Menu > Media > Mo vie . Se lect the videos for the muvee, and scroll right to select t he images, and select Op tio ns > Cr eate muve e . 2. S elec t a sty le fo r the muvee f rom t he sty le l ist. Create a cu sto m mu vee 1. To creat e a a cus tom muvee, s ele ct Menu > Media > Movi e . Select the videos for the muvee, and scroll right to se lect the images, and select Opti on s > Create muvee . The style se l ection view open s. 2. Scroll to t he desire d style, and select Opti ons > Customise . 3. In Videos & images , reorder and edit the selected items, or add or remove items from your muvee. You can define the order in wh ich the f ile s are played in the
55 muvee. Select the file you want to move . Scroll to the file below which you want to place t he marked file , and press the scroll key. To add or re move images a nd videos from the m uvee, select Op tio ns > A dd/Remove . In Music , select the music for the muvee. To add albums and thei r con tent to t he muvee, in t he image or vide o clip list view, select Op tion s > Albums . In Message you can add an open ing and closing text to a muvee. In Le ngt h , you can de fine th e length of t he muvee. Se lect from th e following: Multime dia message âÂÂto o ptimiz e th e leng th of t he muv ee for MMS sendi ng Auto -selec t âÂÂto include all the selected images and video clips in the muvee Same as music âÂÂto set the muvee du ration to be the s a me as t he chosen m usic clip User define d âÂÂto de fine the lengt h of the muvee 4. S elect Op tio ns > Cre at e m uve e . The pre view view ope ns. 5. To preview the custom muvee before saving it , select Opti ons > Play . 6. To sa ve the m uvee, sele ct Opti on s > Save . To create a new custom muvee by usin g the same styl e settings, sele ct Opti ons > Recreate . Sele ct content To edit the selected video clips, in t he Videos & images folder, select Op tion s > Select contents . You can se lect wh ich pa rt s of t he video clip you want to include or exclu de in the mu vee. In the sli de, g reen indic ates inclu ded, r ed in dicat es excluded, and gre y indicates neutral parts. To include a part of the video clip in the muvee, scr oll to the part, and se le ct Opti o ns > Include . To ex clude a part , select Opti ons > Exc lude . To ex clude a shot, select Op ti ons > Exc lude sh ot . To let Movie dir ector randomly include or e x clude a certa i n part of the video clip, scroll t o the part, and select Opt io ns > Mark as ne utral . To randomly include or exclude parts of t he clip, select Optio ns > Mark all as neu tral . Sett ings In the s tyle sele ct ion view, sele ct Optio ns > Customise > Settin gs to edi t th e following options: Memo ry in us e âÂÂSelect where to s a ve your m uvees.
56 Resolution â Select the res olut ion of you r muvees . Sele ct Auto matic to use t he optimal resolution ba sed on t he number and length of the video clips you have select e d. Defaul t muve e name âÂÂSe t a de fault name f or the m uvees. â Videos To access t he videos folder in Gallery , select Menu > Me dia > V i deos . â Recorde r The voice r e corder allows you t o recor d phone conversations and voice m emos. If you record a phone con versation, all pa rties hear a beeping sou nd during recording. Recorded files are stored in Gallery . See â Gal lery ,â p. 42. Select Men u > Me dia > Rec or der . To r ecord a sou nd clip, select Opti ons > Record sound clip , or select . To listen to the recording, select . â RealPlayer With RealPlayer, you can play m e dia files such a s video clips saved in the phone memory or memory ca rd, or s t ream media files over t he air by opening a streaming link. RealPlayer does not su pport all file formats or all t he varia t ions of file formats. To open RealPlayer, select Menu > Media > Re alPlayer . To play a me dia file, select Opti o ns > Open > Most recent clips or Saved clip . To s tre am con t ent o ve r t h e air : ⢠Select a streaming link saved in the gallery. ⢠Open a streaming link while browsing th e web. To st ream l iv e cont ent, you must first c onfi gure your d efaul t acce ss point . See â Access points, â p. 78. Cont act your serv ice provi der for more i nforma tion. In RealPlayer, you can only open an rtsp:// URL address. You ca nn ot open an ht t p:/ / URL addr es s; howev er, Re alPlay er re cogn izes an h ttp link to a .ram file si nce a .ram file is a text file containing an rtsp link. Warning: Do not hold the device nea r you r ear when the loud speaker is in use, because t he v olume may be extremely l oud.
57 With RealPlayer, you can play m e dia files such a s video clips saved in the phone memory or memory ca rd, or s t ream media files over t he air by opening a streaming link. To open RealPlayer, se lect Menu > Media > Re alPlayer . RealPlayer does not su pport a ll file for m ats or a ll t he variations of file formats. Play media file s To play a media file in RealPlayer, select Opti o ns > Open and from the following: Most recent clips âÂÂto play me dia files t hat you have recently played Saved clip âÂÂto play m edia files saved in the phone or me mory ca rd To s tre am con t ent o ve r t h e air : ⢠Select a streaming link saved in the gallery. A conn e ction to the streaming ser ver is esta blis hed. ⢠Open a streaming link while browsing th e web. To st ream l iv e cont ent, you must first c onfi gure your d efaul t acce ss point . See â Acce ss point s,â p. 78. Many service provid ers re quire y ou to use an int ernet access point (IAP) for your default acce ss point. Other service providers allow you to use a WAP access point . Contact your service provider f or m ore information. In RealPlayer, you can only open an rtsp:// URL address. You ca nn ot open an ht t p:/ / URL addr es s; howev er, Re alPlay er re cogn izes an h ttp link to a .ram file si nce a .ram file is a text file containing an rtsp link. Warning: Do not hold the device nea r you r ear when the loud speaker is in use, because t he v olume may be extremely l oud. Shortc uts during play Scroll up t o seek forward or down to see k back in the media file. Press t he volume ke ys to in crease or decrease th e soun d volu me. â Flash Play er With Flash Pla yer , you can view, play, and interact with flash files made for mobile devices. Select Men u > Me dia > Flash Player . To open a folder or play a flash file , select it.
58 10 . P e r s o n a l i z a t i o n â Themes To change t h e look of your phon e display, act ivate a theme. A theme can include the standby mode wallpaper and powe r saver. You can edit a theme to personalize your phone furth er. Select Men u > P ersonalis. > Themes . T o se e a lis t o f the available themes, select General . T he acti ve theme is indicat ed by a check mark. To p revie w a theme , scro ll to t he theme , a n d se lect Opt io ns > Preview . To ac tiva te the previ ewed t heme, sele ct Set . In Them es , you can also set the menu view type , set a custom wallpaper, an d personalize the l ook of t he power saver. Audi o theme To apply or e dit an audio th e me, select Menu > P e rsonalis. > Th emes > Audio them es . To apply an audio theme, select Active audio theme and the desir ed the me. You can per sonal ize t he sound s ass ociat ed with an eve nt o r functi on. To s av e th e p ers on al iz ed t he m e, i n the Audio theme s main vie w , select Opti o ns > Sa ve th eme and enter a name f or the t heme. â Profiles In Profiles , you can a dju st a n d personalize t he phon e tones for different events, environments, or ca ller groups. You can see t he currently se lected profile at the top of the displa y in t he standby mode . If the Ge neral profile is in use, only the cur ren t date is s hown. Select Men u > P ersonalis. > Profiles . To activate t h e profile, se lect t he profile and Ac ti va t e . Tip: To quickly change to Silent profile from any ot h er profile , in the standby mode , press a nd hold # . To personalize a profile , select the profile, P ersonalise and from th e following options:
59 Ringi ng tone âÂÂTo set the ringing tone for voice calls, choose a ringing tone from the list. Pre ss a ny key to stop the soun d. Y ou can a lso change ringing tones in contacts. See âÂÂA dd a ringing tone,â p. 41. Video call tone âÂÂSelect the rin ging tone for video calls. Say caller's name âÂÂSe lect On to ha ve the p ho n e say the ca ller âÂÂs na me whe n t he phone is ringing. Ringing type âÂÂW hen As ce n di ng is selected, the ringing volume starts from level one and increases level by level to th e set volume level. Ringing volume âÂÂSet the volume level for the r ingin g and message alert tones. Message alert tone âÂÂS et th e alert tone for t ext a nd mul timed ia me ssages . E-mail alert to ne âÂÂSet the al ert tone for e-ma il message s. Vibrating alert âÂÂS et the p hone to vi brat e to a lert for incomin g calls and me ssages. Keypad tones âÂÂSet the volum e level for keypad tones. War n i n g to n e s âÂÂActivate or deactivate warning tones. Ale rt for âÂÂSe t the phon e to r ing on ly upon calls f rom phone numbers that belong to a sele ct ed contact grou p. Phone calls coming from people out side the sele ct ed group have a sile nt a lert . Profile name âÂÂName the profile. This setting is not s h own for the General and Offline profiles. When using th e Offline profile, the phone is n ot connected to the G SM network. If no SIM card is installed, to use some functions of t he phone, start th e ph one in Offline . Import a nt: In the offline profile you cannot make or receive any calls, or use other features tha t require cellular ne twork coverage. Calls may still be possible to the official emergency number programm ed into your device. To make calls, y ou must first activ ate the phone function by changing profile s. If the device has been locked, enter t he lock co de. â 3-D tones With 3-D to nes you c a n app ly thr ee-dime nsional sound effect s to ring ing to nes. Not all ringing tones support 3-D effects. To edit 3-D tone settings, sele ct Menu > P ersonalis. > 3- D to nes . To en a ble the 3 -D e ffects , sel ect 3-D t one s > On . To change the rin gi ng to n e, select R inging t one and the des ired ringing tone.
60 To change the 3-D effect that is a pplied to the ringing t on e, select Sound tra je ctor y and the desired ef fe ct. To m odify the effect, sele ct T ra jec to ry sp ee d , Doppler effect , o r Reverberation . Doppler effect may not be available for all effects. To l is ten to th e r in gin g to ne wi th th e 3 -D eff ect , sel ec t Opti ons > Pl ay t on e . If you ena ble the 3-D tone s but d o not s elect any 3 -D ef fect, st ereo wideni ng is applied to the ringing tone. 11 . W e b â Mobil e Sear ch Use Mobile Search to get a ccess to search engines, and find and connect to local services, websites, images, and mobile content. You can use t he application to find and ca ll local restaurants and sh ops, and use the advanced mapping technology to assist you in f inding their location. Select Men u > Web > Searc h . When you open Mobile Search, a list of categories is dis pla yed. Select a category (fo r exa mple, images ), and ente r your text into the search field . Sel ect Search . The search re sults are dis pla yed on t he screen. For additional h elp and inst ructions on the application, select Opti ons > Help . For more information on t he application, visit a ls o ww w.mobilesearch.nokia.com/. â We b To browse web pages wr itten in X HTML, WML, or H T ML, select Men u > Web > Browse r , or press and hold 0 in the st andby m ode. Check the availability of se rvices, pricing, and tariffs w ith your service pr ovider . Service providers also give you instruct ions on how t o use the ir services. Set up the phone fo r the brow ser ser vice Your device may con figur e the WAP or internet access point automatically ba sed on your SI M card. You can us e Settings wizard to configure W AP or inter n et access point settings. See âÂÂSettin gs wizard,â p. 8 0.
61 You may receive service settings in a configuration message fr om the service provider. To define a n access poin t manua lly, se e Access point s in âÂÂConn ectio n,â p. 78. Make a connection To access w eb pages, do th e follow ing: ⢠Select the home page ( ) of your ser vice provider. ⢠Select a bookm a rk from the bookmarks view. ⢠In the bookmarks view , en ter the address of the web page, and sele ct Go t o . Bookmarks Your device may have preinsta lled bookmarks and links for third-par ty internet sites. You may al so access ot her third- party site s thro ugh your device . Thir d-party s ites are n ot affiliated with Nokia, and Nok ia does not e ndorse or assume liabili ty for them. If you choose to acces s such site s, you sh ould t ake preca ut ions for se curity or content. Bookmarks are indicat ed by the following icons: The st a rting pa ge defin ed for the default a ccess poin t. The automatic bookmarks folde r contains bookmarks ( ) that are collec t ed automatically when y o u browse pa ge s. Any bookmark showing t he tit le or internet address of the bookmark. and may be replaced with the websiteâÂÂs icon. Add boo k marks m anua lly 1. In the bookm arks view, select Opti ons > B ookmark manager > Add bookmark . 2. Fill in the fields. 3. S elect Op tio ns > Save . Send bookmark s Scroll to a bookmark or mark several bookmarks, s elect Opt ions > Tools > Send and an option. Co nnection securit y If the security indicator is displayed during a connection, the data transmission between the device a nd the internet gateway or server is encrypted.
62 The security icon does not indicate that the data transmiss ion between the gateway and the conten t server (or pla ce where t he reques ted resou rce is s t or ed) is se cure. Th e service provider secures the data tra nsmission between the gatewa y and the content server. To view details a bout the conn e ction, encrypti on statu s, and informat io n about ser ve r a ut hen tic a tio n, se lec t Op ti ons > T ools > P age info . Securit y features ma y be required for some services, such as banking se rvices. For such connect ions you need security cer tificates. For more inf ormation , cont act your service prov i der. See a lso âÂÂCertificate management,â p. 74. Browse web p a ges Keys a nd co mmands for brow sing To open a link, make selections, or check box e s, press t he scr oll ke y. To go to t he previous page while brow sin g, sele ct Back . I f Back is not available, select Op ti ons > N avigation options > Histor y t o vie w a chronological list of the pages visite d during a browsing session. To ch oose the desired page, scroll le ft or right, and sele ct it. The history list is cle are d e ach time a session is closed. To save a bookmark wh i le browsing, sele c t Opti o ns > Save as bookmark . To r et ri eve the l a test co nt ent fro m the s erv er , se lec t Opti on s > Navigat ion options > Reload . To open t he browser toolbar, scroll to an empty par t of th e page, and press the scroll key. Keypa d shor tcuts w hile br owsin g 1 âÂÂOpen your bookmarks. 2 âÂÂSearch for keyw ords in t he current pa ge . 3 âÂÂRe turn t o the p revi ous p a ge . 5 âÂÂList all open windows. 8 âÂÂShow the page overview of the current page. Press 8 again to zo om i n an d view the desire d se ction of the page. 9 âÂÂEnt er a new web addres s. 0 âÂÂG o to the star t pag e. * or # âÂÂZoom the page in or out.
63 Mi ni ma p Min i ma p helps you navigate web pages t hat contain la rge amount of information. Set Min i ma p on in browser settings. Se e âÂÂBrowse r settings,â p. 64. Scroll through a large w eb pa ge, and Min i m a p opens and displays an ove rview of the web page you are browsing. To move in Mi ni map , scroll. When you stop scrolling, Mini map disappears and t he area outlined in Mi ni ma p is displayed. Page overview With P age o vervi ew , you ca n move more qu ickly to the des ired part of a web page. Page overview may not be a vailable on all pa ges. To show the page overview of the cu rrent page, press 8 . To find the desired spot on the page, scroll up or down. Press 8 again to zoom in and view the desir ed section of the page. Web feeds and blogs Web feeds a re .xml file s on we b pages that are widely used to share t he latest entr y headlines or full text , for exa mple, recent news in th e form of news feeds. Blogs or weblogs a re web diaries . M ost of the web feeds use RSS a nd ATOM technologies. The browser a utomatically detects if a web pa ge contain s w eb fee ds. To subscribe to a w eb f e ed, sel ec t Op t i ons > Subscribe a nd a feed, or click on th e link. To vie w the web fe eds you h a ve subs cribe d to, in t he bookm a rks view , select Web feeds . To update a web fe ed, select it, and Opti ons > Refresh . To define how the we b feeds are updated, select Optio ns > Settings > We b f ee d s . Sav ed pages You can save pa ges a n d view them later offline. To save a page while brows ing, select Opti ons > Tools > Save page . To o pen t he Saved pages view, in t he bookmarks view, select Saved pages . To open a page, sele ct it. To star t a con ne ction to t he browser service and retrieve the page again, select Opti o ns > N avigation options > Reload . T he phone st ays on line after you reload the page. Download You can download ite ms su ch as ringing tones, images, operat or logos, software, and video clips u sin g the mobile br ow ser.
64 Once downloaded, items are handle d by the respective applications on your phone, for e xample , a dow nloaded photo is saved in Gallery . Import a nt: O nly in stall and use applications and other software from trusted sources, such as applicat ions that are Symbian Signed or have passed the Java Ve rif ie d TM testing. End a connection To end the connect ion and vie w the browser page offline, select Opt ions > Tools > Di sconnect . To quit browsing and to return to t he standby mode , select Opt ion s > Exit . Empty the cache A cache is a me mory location that is us ed to store data tempo rarily. If you have tried to access or have a ccessed c onfidential informa tion requiring passwords, empty the cache after each us e. The i nformati on or serv ices you have acces sed are s tored in the cac he. To empt y th e cache, sel ect Menu > Web > Br o wser > Option s > Cle ar privacy data > Clear cache . To clear a ll privacy da ta, including the cache, cookies, form data pa sswords, and browsing history, select Menu > We b > Browser > Opti on s > Clear privacy data > All . Browser settings Select Optio ns > Settings > Ge neral , P age , Privacy or Web f ee d s , and from the following: Gene ral Acces s poin t âÂÂSel ect t he d efault acces s po int. Homepage âÂÂDefine the address of the desired homepage. Min i ma p âÂÂSet on or off. History list âÂÂSelect whether a list of the pages you have visited during the curr ent browsing session ar e displa ye d when you s ele ct Back . Securit y warnin gs â Hide or sh ow security not ifications. Java/Ecma Script âÂÂEnable or dis a ble the use of scripts.
65 Page Load images and sounds âÂÂSel ect w hether to v iew pic tures and h ear so unds w hen you are brow sing. If you select No , t o later load images and sounds during browsing, select Opti on s > Tools > Load images . Screen size âÂÂChoose how to use the display area for viewing pages. Defaul t enco ding âÂÂWhe n you selec t Automa tic , th e br ows er au to ma tica l ly tr ie s t o choose the correct character encoding. Block pop-ups âÂÂAllow or block a u tomatic opening of different pop-ups while browsing. Automatic reload âÂÂEnable or disa ble automatic ref re sh of brow ser pages. Font size âÂÂS ele ct th e font size . Priv acy Auto. bookmarks âÂÂSe lect On if you want the bookmarks to be automatically sa ved in th e Auto. bookmarks folder when you visit a page. When you select Hi de folder , the bookmarks are st ill automatically added to t he folde r. Form data saving âÂÂIf you do not want t he data you e nt er t o different f orms on a web page to be sa v e d and used n e xt time the page is entered, select Off . Cookies âÂÂEna ble or dis a ble the receivin g a nd sen din g of cookie s (a me a ns for co nte nt pro vi de rs to i den t ify u s ers an d th eir pr efe r enc e s for fre q uen tly u sed content). Web fe eds Automatic updates âÂÂDefine whether you want the web feeds t o be updat ed automatically or n ot , and how oft en you want to update them. Setting th e application to retrieve w eb feeds automatically may involve t he transmission of large amounts of da ta through your service pr ovider' s ne tw ork. Conta ct your service provider for information about data transm ission charges. Acc. poin t for auto-update âÂÂSe lect the desired access point for updating (onl y avai lable wh en Automatic updates is on). 12. Organi zer â Clock Select Men u > Organiser > Clock .
66 Clock settin gs To change the time or dat e, select Op tion s > Se ttings . F or m ore i n for m at i on ab o u t the setti ngs, s ee âÂÂD ate and time,â p . 73. Set an alarm 1. To se t a new alarm , scroll right to Alar m , and select Opti ons > New alarm . 2. Ent er the alarm time, selec t wheth er a nd w hen th e alar m is repe ated, and select Do ne . When an alar m is a ctiv e, is shown . To ca nce l an al arm , scr oll to the alar m, an d selec t Optio ns > Remove alarm . T o deac tiva te a repe ated ala rm, sele ct Op tio ns > D eact ivate alarm . Turn o ff the alarm Select Stop to t urn off the a larm. Select Snooze to st op th e alar m for 5 m inutes , after which i t res umes. If the alarm time is r eached while the device is switched off, th e device switches itse lf on and starts sou nding the alarm tone. If you s elect Stop , th e device asks whether yo u want to activate th e device fo r calls. Sele ct No to switch off the device or Ye s to m ake and receive calls. Do not select Yes when wire less phon e use m ay caus e interfe rence or da nger. World clock To open the world clock v iew, scroll right t o Wor l d . To add cities to t he list, select Opti o ns > Add city . To set you r cu rren t city, scroll to a city, and select Opti ons > Set as curre nt city . The city is displayed in the clock main vie w, and the time in your device is changed according to t h e city sele cted. Chec k t hat t he time is corr ect and matches your tim e zo ne . â Calendar Select Men u > Organiser > Calen dar . In the calen da r, you ca n kee p t rack of your appointments, meetings, birt hdays, ann iversar ie s, and oth er ev ent s. You can also s et a cal enda r alar m to rem ind yo u of upc oming even ts.
67 Create calen dar entr ies 1. S elect Op tio ns > New en t ry an d an en try t ype. Anni versary ent rie s are r epeat ed ev ery yea r. 2. Fill in the fields. Repeat âÂÂPress the scroll key to change the e nt ry to be repeated. A repeating entry is indicated by in the day view. Repe a t unt il âÂÂSe t an ending date for t he rep eated entr y, f or exam ple, the la st date of a weekly course you are t aking. This option is sh own only if you h a ve se lec ted t o re pea t th e ev e nt. Synchronisation > Privat e âÂÂAfte r sync hroniza tion th e calenda r ent ry can b e s e e n o n l y b y y o u , a n d i t i s n o t s ho w n t o o t h e rs e v e n i f t h e y ha v e o n l i n e a c c e s s to vi ew the calend ar. Public âÂÂThe c alenda r ent ry is shown to others w ho have access to view you r calen dar online. No ne âÂÂThe ca le ndar entry is n ot copied when you synchronize your calendar. 3. To sa ve the e ntry, se lect Done . Ca lenda r view s Press # in t he mo nt h, w ee k, or da y v iew s to auto m ati cal ly hi gh lig ht the c ur ren t date. To create a meeting entry, press a ny number ke y ( 0 âÂÂ9 ) in any calendar view. To go to a cer tain date, select Opt io ns > Go t o date . W r ite the da te, a nd sel ect OK . To-do Select Optio ns > To-do view . In th e To- do view , yo u can keep a l ist o f ta sks that y ou need to do . Creat e a to-do note 1. To sta r t to w rite a to -do no te, p re ss an y n umb er key ( 0 âÂÂ9 ). 2. W ri te th e task in the Su bject field. Se t a due dat e and a prior ity for the task. 3. T o sa ve the to-do note, selec t Do ne . â Not es Select Men u > Organiser > Notes . To w rit e a new n ote , star t w rit ing . To s ave th e no te , se le ct Done .
68 You can sa ve pl ain te xt fil es (. txt f ormat) you rec eive t o Not es . â Calculator Select Men u > Organiser > Calculator . 1. E nter t he first number of your calculat ion. 2. Scroll to an arithmetic function, and select it. 3. E nter the second number. 4. T o exec ute the cal culatio n, sele ct . To add a decimal, pre ss # . Not e: This calculator has limited accuracy and is designed for simple ca lculations. â Converter Select Men u > Organiser > Converter . In th e convert er, you can conve rt measure me nt para meters such as Le ngth from one un it to anot her, for ex ample , Ya r d s to Metre s . The conve rt er has lim ite d accura cy and rounding errors may occur. Set a ba se c urre ncy and exchange rates Before you can convert curr ency, you need to choose a base currency (usua l ly your domestic curre ncy) and add exchange rates . The rate of t he base cur rency is al ways 1. The base cu rrenc y det ermi nes the conversion rates of t he other cu rrencies. 1. S elect Curren cy as th e me asur eme nt type , and sele ct Opti ons > C urre ncy rates . 2. To change t he base currency, scroll t o t he cu rre ncy ( usually your domestic currency), and select Op tio ns > Se t as base currency . 3. Add e xchange rate s, scroll to the curren cy, and enter a n ew rate, th a t is, how many units of t he curre ncy equal one unit of t h e ba se currency you selected. 4. After you in s e rt all th e required exchange rates, you can convert currency. Not e: When y ou chan ge base c urrenc y, you m ust ent er new exchange r ates becau s e a ll p revious ly set e xchange r a tes are clear ed.
69 Conv ert un its To convert cu rre ncy, you m ust first set the exchange rat e. See âÂÂSet a base currency and exchange ra tes,â p. 68. 1. S elect Ty p e a nd the type of me asurement to convert, and select OK . 2. Sele ct the first Un it fi eld, the u nit from whic h you want t o conver t, and OK . 3. S elect t he nex t Un it field and the unit to w hich you want to co nvert. 4. I n the fir st A mount fie ld, ente r t he valu e to b e co nverted. The o ther Amo unt field changes a utomatically to show the con verted value. Press # to add a decimal and press * for the , - (fo r tempera ture) , and E (exponent) symbols. The conversion or der changes if you write a va lu e in the second A mount field . Th e result is shown in the first Amoun t fie l d. 13. App lic ation s â Download! Download! (n e twork service) is a mobile content shop ava ila ble on your device. You may be able to down load som e con tent f re e of ch a rge. With Download! you can discov er, pre view, buy, d ownload, and upgra de con tent, services, and applications. The items are categorized under catalogs and folders provided by diff erent service providers. Th e ava ilable conten t depends on your service provider. Select Men u > Applications > D ownload! . Download! us es yo ur ne twork servi ces to acc ess the most up-t o-dat e conte nt. F or information on additional items available through Download! , contact you r service provider , or t he supplier or manufactu re r of th e item. â My own To access th e applica tions you have down loaded in your phon e, se le ct Menu > Applications > My o wn .
70 GPS data This featu re is not designed to support positioning requ ests for r elated calls. Contact your se rvice provider for more information a bout how you r ph one complies with government regulations on location-based emergency ca lling services. GPS data is a GPS application t hat enables you t o view you r curren t location, find your way to a desired location, and track dist a nce. The applica t ion requires a Blue toot h GPS e nhancement to o perate. You m ust als o have Bl uetoot h GPS positioning method enabled in Menu > Settings > Phone sett. > Gener al > Po s i t i o n i n g > Posit ionin g methods . Select Men u > Applications > My own > GPS data . In GPS data an d Lan dma rks , coordinates are ex presse d in degree s and decima l degrees format us ing WGS-84 coordinat e system. Landm arks Landmarks are coordinates to geographic loca tions t hat you can save to your device for lat er use in diffe rent location-bas e d service s. You can c re ate landmarks using a Bluetooth GPS enhancement or n etwork (network service). Select Men u > Applications > My own > Lan dmar ks . 14. Sett ings â V oice commands To select t he fu n ctions t o us e by voice comm and, sele ct Me nu > Settin gs > Vo i c e comm. . The voice commands for changing profiles are in t he Profiles folder. To act ivate a new v oice co mma nd for an appli cati on, sele ct Opti ons > New application and the application. To manage the voice commands, scroll to a function, select Op t i ons a nd from the following options: Change command or Remove application âÂÂto change or deactiv a te the voice command of the selecte d fun ction Playback âÂÂto play the a ctivated voice com m and To use voice commands, se e âÂÂVoice dia ling,â p. 22.
71 To change voice comm and settings, se lect Optio ns > Settings and from the following options: Synt hesiser âÂÂt o a ctiv a te or de acti va te the t ex t- to-s pe ech sy nt hezi se r t h at say s out loud the recognized voice command Remove voice adapts. âÂÂto r ese t t he v oi ce ad ap ta tion s . The pho ne a d apts to t he us erâÂÂs v oice to bett er recogni ze th e voi ce co mmands. â Call mailbox Call m ailbox is a ne twork service. Contact your service provide r for the ca ll mailbox num ber. To define the call mailbox number if no number is set, select Menu > Settings > Call mailbox , a nd w he n Voice mailbox numbe r: is displa yed, enter the voice mailbox num ber. To change t h e call mailbox number, sele ct Menu > Se ttings > C all mailbox > Opti o ns > Chan ge number , an d enter the nu mber. â Speed dial To assign phon e numbers to t he speed dialing keys, se l ect Me nu > Settin gs > Speed dial , scroll to a k e y icon, and select Opti ons > A ssign . Se le ct the conta c t and t he num ber f or th e speed dial . To view the nu mber assigned to a spe ed-dialing key, sc roll to the key icon, and select Option s > View numbe r . To change or remove the number, select Change or Remove . â Phone settings Gene ral Select Menu > Settings > Phone sett. > Gene ral > Personalisation , D ate and time , Enhan ceme nt , Security , F act ory settings , or Po si ti o nin g . Pers onalisation Select Displ ay , Standby mode , Tones , L anguage , T hemes , o r Vo i c e c o m m s . . Display Light sensor âÂÂto adju st the light se nsor that observes the l ighting condit io ns and adjusts t he brightness of the display
72 Font size âÂÂto select the font size used in list s and editors P ower saver time- out âÂÂto set the time-out per iod a fte r w hich t h e power sa ver is act ivated Welcome note / logo âÂÂto set the welcome note or logo wh ich is displayed briefly each time you switch on the phone. Light tim e-out âÂÂto set the t im e-out for the display light Sta ndby mode Act ive standby âÂÂto enable or disable active s t andby. See âÂÂActive standby ,â p. 16. Shortcuts âÂÂto assign shortcuts for t he right and left selection ke ys, scrolling in different dir e ctions or pre ssing t he scroll ke y in t he standby mode. The s croll ke y shortcuts are not available if Active st andby is On . Act ive standby apps. âÂÂto select the application short cu ts t o a ppear in the active standby. This setting is available only if A ct ive s tandby is s e t to On . Operator logo âÂÂthis setting is visible on ly if you have re ceived and sa ved an operator logo. You ca n select wh ether t he operator logo is shown. Ton es Change the tones of the clock, ca l endar and currently active pr ofile. See âÂÂProfiles,â p. 58. Lang ua ge Phone language âÂÂto change the language for t he displa y texts in you r phone. This change may a lso affect the format used fo r date and time and t he sepa rators used, for example, in calculations. If you select Auto ma tic , the phone se lects t he language according t o the inf orm ation on you r SIM car d. A fter you h a ve change d the display t ext language, the phone restarts. Writing language âÂÂt o ch ange the writing language of you r ph one. Ch anging the la ngu age aff ect s th e ch ar acte rs and spec ia l ch aract ers ava ila bl e whe n wr it ing tex t an d th e pr e dic tiv e te xt dict i on ary use d. Pre dic tive text âÂÂto s et predictive t e xt input On or Of f for all editors in the phone. Select a language for e nterin g predictive text from th e list. Them es Apply themes. See â The mes,â p. 58. Voic e comma n ds Edit voice command and voice dia ling settings. Se e âÂÂVoice com mands,â p. 7 0.
73 Date and tim e Time an d Date â to set the time and date Time zone â to se t th e ti me zo ne of y ou r loca ti on . If y ou set Network operator tim e > A uto-update , th e local time is shown. Dat e form at âÂÂt o se lect the format to display dates Date s eparator âÂÂto select the date se parator Time format â to select betw e en 24-hour a n d 12-hour tim e form at Time separator âÂÂto sele ct the time sepa ra tor Clock type âÂÂto select w hether the a nalog or digital clock is shown in the standby mode. See âÂÂClock,â p. 65. Clock alarm tone âÂÂto sele ct the alarm clock t one Workdays âÂÂt o specify days for a lar ms re peated only on workdays Network operator t ime ( netw ork se rvic e) â to allo w the netw ork t o upda te ti me, date, and time zone informat io n to your phon e. If you select Auto-update , all active conn e ctions are disconnected. Check any alarms as these may be affecte d. En hanceme nt T o c h a n g e s e t t i n g s o f a n e n h a n c e m e n t , i n t h e Enha nceme nt sett. view , scroll to an enha ncement , suc h as Headset , sel ect Op ti ons > Open and from the foll owing options: Default profile âÂÂto sele ct the profile you want to a ct ivat e each time you connect the enha ncemen t to you r phon e Automa tic answ er âÂÂto set the phone to answer an inc om ing call automatically aft er 5 seco nds when t his e nhancem ent is co nnecte d to your ph one. If t he Ringing type is set to Beep once or Silent , automatic answer cannot be used, and you must answer the phone manually. Lights âÂÂTo se t the phone light s cont inuous ly on while using the e nhancem ent, select On . Secur ity Select Phon e and SIM card , Cert ificat e management , or Security module . Phon e and SI M card You can change the following codes: lock code, (U)PIN code, and PIN 2 code. These code s can o nly i nclude the n umbers from 0 t o 9.
74 Avoid using access codes similar to emergency numbers t o prevent a ccidental dialing of the emergency n um ber. Code in use âÂÂto select the active code , PIN or UP IN , for the active USIM. This is shown only if t he ac tive U SIM su pport s UPIN, a nd the UPIN is n ot rejected. PIN code request or UPIN code request âÂÂto set the phone t o request the code each time the phone is s wit ched on . Som e SIM car ds m ay n o t allow the PIN code requ e st to be turn ed Off . If you selec t Code in us e > UPIN , UPIN code request is shown inste a d. PIN code or UPIN code , PIN2 code , a nd Lock code âÂÂto change the codes Keypad autolock period > Use r defined â to automatically lock t he ke ypa d after a defined period of inactivity Phone autolock period âÂÂto set a time-out after w hich the phone is a utomatically loc ked. T o use the p hone a gain, y ou need t o enter the correc t lock cod e. To t urn off the autolock period, s ele ct None . Lock if SIM card changed âÂÂto set t he phone to prompt for the lock code w he n an unknown, new SIM card is inserted into your phone. T h e phone kee ps a list of SIM cards tha t are recogniz ed as the owner ca rds. Closed user group (network service)âÂÂto specify a grou p of people whom you can call and who can call you. For more inform a tion, contact your service provider. To activate t he default group agreed on with t he service provider, select Defa ul t . If you want to use ano the r grou p (you need to know t he group index number), select On . When calls are limited to closed user groups, calls ma y be possible to the official emergency number programmed into your device. Confirm SIM services (n et work service) â to se t the phone to display confirmation messages when you use a SIM card se rvice Cert ificate m anagemen t A list of a u thority certificates that have been st ore d in your phone is displayed in Certificate management . To see a list of personal ce rtificates if available, scroll right. Digital certificates should be use d if you want to connect to an online bank or another site or r em ote se rver for act ions that i nvolve transferrin g confidential information. They should also be used if you w a nt to reduce the risk of viruses or other malicious sof tw are a nd be sure of the a uth e nticity of software when downloading and installing soft ware.
75 Import a nt: E ven if the use of certificates makes th e risks involved in rem ote connection s and software installation con siderably smaller, they m ust be used correctly in order to ben efit from increased security. The existence of a certificat e does not offer any protection by itself; the certificat e manager must contain corr ect, authentic, or trus ted certificates for incr eased security to be available. Cer tificates have a re stricted lifetime. If "Expir ed certificate" or "Certificate n ot valid yet" is shown even if the ce rtificate should be v alid, check th at the current date and time in you r device are correct. Bef ore chang ing any certif icate settin gs, you must ma ke sure tha t you really trust the owner of the certificate and that th e certificate really be longs to the listed owner. Vi ew certi f ic ate deta ils an d check authen ticit y You can only be sure of the correct identity of a serve r when the signature and the period of validity of a server cert ificate have been checked. Th e p ho ne no tif ie s y ou if th e id enti ty of t he se rv er is not a ut hen tic or if you d o n ot have the corr ect security certifica t e in you r ph one. To check ce rtificate details, scroll to a certificate, and se lect Opti ons > Cer tificate details . While opening the certificate details, the phon e checks t he validity of the certificate and on e of the following notes may appear: Expired certificate â The va l idity period ha s ended for the se lected cert ificate. Certificate not valid yet âÂÂThe validi ty per iod ha s not y et be gun f or the select ed certificate. Certificate corrupted âÂÂThe certificate cannot be used. Contact the cert ifica te issuer. Certificate not trusted âÂÂY ou have not set any application to us e the certificate. Chang e the trust setti ngs Before chan gin g any cert i ficate settings, you must make sure that you really t rus t the owner of the certificate a nd that the certificate re a lly belongs to the list ed owner. Scroll to an authority ce rt ificate, and select Optio ns > Tru st s ett ings . Depending on the certificate, a lis t of the applications t hat can use the se lected certificate is shown. Sec urity modul e View or edit se curity modules.
76 Fact ory se tting s Reset some of t he se ttings to the ir original values. You need the lock code. See âÂÂLock code,â p. 8. Posit ioning With the positioning service you can rec eive information from service providers about local is sues such a s we a ther a nd traffic con dit ions, ba sed on the location of your device ( ne twork service). To enable a positioning method, select Posit ioning met hods , scroll to the positioning method, and se lect Opti ons > Enable . To stop using it, select Opti o ns > D isable . To define th e posit ionin g server access point, select Positioning server > Acce ss point and the de sired a cce ss point . Then sele ct Server address , and ente r the domain name or UR L address of t he server. Phone Select Men u > Se ttings > Phone sett. > Phone an d Call , Call divert , Call barrin g , or Net wor k . Call Send my caller ID (network service)âÂÂto set your phone number to be displayed ( Yes ) or hidden ( No ) from the person whom you are calling. The value may be set by your se rvice provider when you subscribe to the service ( Set by netw ork ). Call wait ing (n etwork s ervic e)âÂÂto set th e netw ork t o notif y you of a new i ncomi ng call while you have a ca ll in progre ss. To re quest the network to activate ca ll waiting, select Act iv at e . To reques t t h e network to deac t ivate call waiting, select Cancel . To check w he ther the f unction is active, select Ch eck statu s . Reject call with SMS âÂÂto enable re je cting phone calls w it h a t ext message. Se e â An swer or reject a c a ll,â p. 23. Message text âÂÂt o ente r a t ext t o be s ent wh en y ou rej ect a call with a te xt message Image in video call âÂÂto select a still image to be shown instead of the video w hen you deny video se n ding in a video c a ll Automatic redial âÂÂto s et the phon e to make a maximum of 10 a t tempts to co nne ct t he c all afte r an un suc ce ss ful cal l at tem p t. P res s th e end ke y to sto p auto ma ti c r edia li ng.
77 Show call duration âÂÂto set t he phone to displa y the call duration during a call Summary after call âÂÂto set th e phon e to brief ly display the approximate duration of the last ca ll Speed dialling > On âÂÂto set the phon e to dia l t he numbers a ssigned to t he speed dialing keys, 2 to 9 , by pressing and holding the corresponding number ke y Anykey answer > On âÂÂto answer an incoming call by brie fly pressing any key, except the ri ght selection ke y, volume ke ys, a n d the end key Line in use (n etwork se rvice)âÂÂshown only if the SIM card supports two subscriber numbers, that is, two phone lines. Select which phone line ( Line 1 or Line 2 ) you want to use for making cal ls and sending short messages. Calls on both lines can be answered irre spe ctive of the selected lin e . You cannot make calls if you select Lin e 2 an d have n ot s ubscri bed to thi s net work serv i c e. To prevent line selection, select Line change > Disable if supported by your SIM card. To change t his setting, you need the PIN2 code. Ca ll dive rt Call divert is a network s e rvice. 1. S elect w hich c a lls you w ant to d ivert: V oice calls , Data and video calls , or Fa x calls . 2. Select the desir ed option. For example, to divert voice calls w h en your number is busy or when you reject an in com ing call, select If b u sy . 3. To set the divert option on or off, select Op ti ons > Ac t iv at e or Can ce l . To check whether t he option is a ctivated, select Check status . Several divert options can be ac tive at the s ame ti me. Call barring and call diverting cannot be active at th e same time. Call barrin g Call ba rring (network se rvice) all ows you to restrict the calls t hat you make and receive wit h you r phone. T o change the settings, you ne ed t he barrin g password from your se rv ice provider. Scroll to the desired barring option, a n d to requ e st the n e twork to se t call restriction on, select Op ti ons > Act iv at e . To set the selected call restriction off, select Cancel . T o check whether the calls a re barred, select Che ck st atus . To change the barring password, select Edit barring password . To cancel all active call barrings , select Cancel all barrin gs . Call barring and call diverting cannot be active at th e same time.
78 When calls are barred, calls may be possible to certain official emergency numbers. Netwo rk Network mode âÂÂTo select which network to use (show n only if supported by t h e service provider). I f you select Dual m ode , t h e device use s t he GSM or UMTS network automatically, a ccording to the network paramet e rs a nd the roaming agreements bet wee n the network operators . Operator selection âÂÂTo set the phone to search for a nd select automatically one of the availabl e networks, se lect Au tomatic . To select the desired n etwork manually from a list of networks, sele ct Ma nual . If the connection t o the manually s e lected network is los t, t he phone sou nds an error ton e and asks you to select a net w ork again. The sele cted network must have a roa min g a greement with your hom e network, that is, the operator whose SI M card is in your phone. Cell info display ( network service)âÂÂTo set the phone to indicate w h en it is used in a cellular network bas e d on microce ll ular network (MCN) technology and t o activate cell info reception, sele ct On . Conne ction Select Men u > Settings > Phon e sett. > Conne ction > Bluetooth , USB , A ccess points , Packet dat a , Da ta call , SIP settings , Co n fi gur at i ons , or APN control . Blu etooth Switch B luet oot h on or off, a nd edit Blu etooth settings. See âÂÂBluetooth conn ectio n,â p. 84. USB Edit USB settings. See âÂÂU SB data cable,â p. 93 . Acce ss points To establish a da ta connection, an access point is re quired. You can define different k inds of access points: ⢠MMS access point to send and receive multimedia messages ⢠WAP access point to view web pages ⢠Int ernet access point (IAP ) (for example , to s end a nd receiv e e-ma il) Check which kind of access point you need w ith your se rvice provide r for the service you wish t o a ccess. For ava ila bility and subscription to da ta connection services, contact you r service provider.
79 You may re ce ive access poin t settings in a messa ge from your service provider, or you may have pr es et acces s point settings in your phone. To create a new a ccess poin t or edit an existing access point, sele ct Op tio ns > New access point or Edit . To cre a te a new a ccess point us ing the settings of an exist ing access point, scroll t o an a ccess point, and select Opti o ns > Duplicate access point . Depending on the connection t ype selected in D ata bearer , on ly ce rtain settings are a vailable. Fill in all fields marked with Must be defined or w ith an as ter isk. Contact your service p rovider for the followin g settings: Data bearer , A ccess point nam e (for packet data only), D ial-up number (for data ca ll on ly), Use r na me , Pa s s w o r d , Auth en ti cati on , Home page , Data call type (for data ca ll only), and Maximum data speed (for data call only) . Conn ection name âÂÂEnte r a des criptiv e name for the connec tion. Prompt password âÂÂIf you must e nter a ne w password every time you log onto a server, or if you do not w ant to sa ve your pa ssword to t he phone, select Yes . If necessary, to define the int ernet pr otocol (IP) version, phone IP addre ss, domain name syst e m (DNS) ser vers, proxy ser ver, and advanced data ca ll settings, su ch as callback, PPP compression , login script, and modem initialization string, sele ct Opti o ns > Ad va n ced se t tin g s . Co ntact y our s ervi ce prov ider f or the co rrect setti ngs. Packe t data The packet data settings affect all access point s usin g a packet data con nection. P acket data connection âÂÂIf you select When av a ilable a nd yo u are i n a netwo rk that s u pports packet da ta, t he phone re gister s t o t he packet data network and sh ort mess ages are se nt usin g a packe t dat a conne ction. If y ou sel ect When need ed , the phone uses a packet da ta connection on ly if you start a n application or function t hat ne eds it. The pa cket da ta connection ca n be close d when it is not need ed by an y appl icat ion. If there ar e no packet dat a services a va ilable and you have chose n When available , the phone periodically tries t o establish a packet data conne ction. Acces s poin t âÂÂT he acce ss poi nt name is ne eded whe n you wa nt to use yo ur pho ne as a m odem wi th you r comp ut er. Data cal l The data call settings affect all access points th a t use a GSM data call.
80 Online tim e âÂÂto se t the data ca ll to di sco nne ct au tom at ic ally af ter a tim e- ou t if the re is no act iv ity . T o en ter a tim e -ou t, sele c t User defined , a nd ente r t h e ti me i n mi nu t es. If y ou s e lec t Unlimit ed , th e da ta ca l l is n ot d isc on ne cte d au tom at ic all y. SI P s ett ings View and edit ses sion initiation protocol ( SIP) prof ile s. Conf igurat ions Certain functions, such a s web brow sing and multimedia messaging, may require configuration settings. You may receive t he settings from your service provide r. See âÂÂConfiguration s et tings, â p. 13. To delete a configuration, scroll to the configuration, and select Opti ons > De le te . Acce ss point n ame cont rol With the access poin t name control s ervice, you can restrict th e use of packet da ta access point s. This setting is only availa ble if you r SIM card su pports the service. To change t h e settings, you need the PIN2 code. Applications To view and edit settings of applications installed to your phon e , select Menu > Se ttin gs > Phone sett. > Applicat ions . â Speech In Speech , yo u can s elect t he defaul t lan guage and voice used for readi ng messages and adjust the voice prope rt ies, su ch as rate and volume. Select Menu > Se ttin gs > Speech . To automatically detect the language of a message and read the message using that language, select Language detection > On . Whe n re adi ng a mes sag e, if the re is no voice available for the language or if Language detection is set to Off , the de fa ul t l an g ua ge i s u se d. To view details of a voice, sc roll righ t, scroll t o t he voice, and s e lect Opti on s > V oice details . To test a voice , scroll to t h e voice, and select Opti on s > Play voice . â Settings w izard Se tt. w iz ard configure s your device for operator ( MMS, GP RS, and inte rnet) and e-mail settings based on y o ur se rvice provide r. Configuring ot h er settings may also be possible .
81 To us e these serv ices, you may have t o cont act y our s ervi ce pro vider to ac tivat e a data connecti on or other services . Select Men u > Settings > Sett. wizard . â Instant messaging Instant m essa ging (IM) allows you t o conve rse w ith ot hers and join discussi on forums (IM groups) with specific t opics (netw ork service). Check the availability of IM services, pricing, a nd ta riffs wi t h your service provider. Service providers also provide instructions on h ow to use their service s. Conne ct to an IM serve r Select Men u > Settings > IM . 1. To log in, select Op tio ns > Log in . 2. Enter your user ID and passw ord. To log out, se lect Opti ons > Log out . IM settings Select Men u > Settings > IM > Op ti ons > Settings . To edit the I M applica tion settings, s e lect IM s e tt i ngs . T o set who is allowe d to se e when you are on line, s elect Show my availability . To set who is allowed to send you messages or in vitat ions, s elect Allow messages from or Allo w invitations from . To ed it IM serv er conn ection set tings, select Servers , scrol l to the se rver, and sel e ct Opti o ns > Edi t . Con tact your service provider for th e settings. To defin e new server settin gs, select Opti ons > Ne w ser ver . To c hoos e the default ser ver, sel ect Defaul t s erve r and the s erve r. To be automat ica lly connec t ed to the IM serve r during the days a nd times you define, select IM login type > Au tomati c . To only be automatically con n ected while in your home network, select Aut o in home netw . . To be automatically connected when you start t he IM application, select On app. start - up . T o conn ect manually, select Manual . To s et da ys and time s wh en to e stabl ish a conne ction auto mati cally, sele ct Automatic login days and A utoma tic log in hr s. .
82 Join and leav e an IM group Select Men u > Settings > IM > IM groups . IM groups a re only available if supported by the se rvice provider. To join an IM gr ou p, select it . To join an IM group not on the list , but whose group ID you know , se l ect Optio ns > Join n e w gr oup , and en ter the group ID . To leave the I M grou p, sele ct Op tio ns > Leave IM group . Search for IM groups and u sers To sear ch for groups, select Men u > Settings > IM > IM groups > Opt ions > Search . You can search IM groups by Group name , Topic , or Members (us er I D). To join or save a gr oup that is found in t h e search, scroll to it, and s ele ct Opti ons > Join or Save . To sear ch for new contacts, se lect IM c on ta c ts > Op tio ns > New IM co nt act > Search from server . T o sta rt a convers ation w ith a new use r, sc roll t o the us er, an d select Op ti ons > O p en c on ver s atio n . To s a ve the n ew contact, se lect Add to IM contacts . Chat in an IM g roup Select Men u > Settings > IM > IM groups . After you join a n IM group, you can view the messa ges that are exchanged in the group, and se nd your own messages. To se nd a message, writ e the message, and pr ess the scroll key. To send a priva te message to a m em ber (if a llowe d in t he group) , select Op tio ns > Send private message , s e lect the re cipient, write th e messa ge , and press the scroll key. To re ply to a pr ivat e mes sag e s en t to you, scro ll to t he me ss age , an d s elec t Opti o ns > Reply . To invite IM contac ts who are online to join the IM group (if al lowed in the group), select Op ti ons > Se nd invitation , select the contacts you want to inv it e, write the invitation message, and se lect Done . Star t and view indiv idual conversa tions Select Men u > Settings > IM > Conversations . This shows a list of the IM users with whom you h a ve a n ongoing conversa t ion.
83 next t o a user indicates that you h ave re ceived a n ew message from that u ser. To vie w an ongoing conve rsation, select th e u ser. To send a message, w rite your message, and press the sc roll key. To retur n to the conversat ions list without closing the conv e rsation, se le ct Back . To start a ne w conve rsation, select Opti o ns > New co nvers ation > Select recipient and from a list of your saved IM contacts t hat are c urrently online; or select Enter us er ID to enter the u ser I D. To close th e conversat ion, select Op tions > E nd con versation . To sa ve a u ser to your I M cont acts, scroll to t he user , and se lect Opti ons > A dd t o IM contact s . To block m essages from a use r, scrol l to the user, and selec t Op ti ons > Blocking options > A dd to blocked list . IM contacts Select Men u > Settings > IM > IM c on ta c t s . You can se e a list of your saved IM contacts. indicates contacts th a t are currently online, and indicates contacts that a re off l ine. To create a new cont a ct, select Op tio ns > New IM c onta ct . Fill in t he Nickname and User ID fields, and select Don e . To s tart o r co ntinue a conv ersatio n wit h a cont act, s croll to the cont act, a nd sel ect Opti o ns > Open con versat ion . Creat e a n e w IM grou p Select Men u > Settings > IM > IM groups > Opt io ns > Create new gr oup . Enter the set t ings for t he group. R e s t r i c t a c c e s s t o a n I M g r o u p To create a closed IM group, create a group members list. Only the users on the li s t are allowed to join the group. Select the IM groups view, scroll to th e grou p, and select Op ti ons > Gro up > Se ttings > Group m embers > Sele cted only .
84 15. Con nect ivit y â PC Suite You can use your phon e with a va riety of PC connectivity and dat a communication appli cations. With PC Suite you can synchronize contacts, calendar and to-do notes a nd notes betw e en your phone a nd a comp atible PC. You may find more informa tion about PC Suit e an d t he download link in t he support area on the Nokia website, www.nokia.com/pcsuite. â Bluetooth connection Bluetooth technology enables wire less connections between electronic devices wit hin a maximum range of 10 meter s (33 feet) . A Blu etooth connec tion c an be us ed to sen d ima ges, vi deos, text, b usines s cards, calend ar not es, or t o conn ect wirelessly to compatible devices using Bluetooth technology, such as compu ters. This device is compliant with Bluetooth Specif ication 2.0 supporting the following profiles: Dial Up Networking, Serial Port, File Transfer, Han ds free, Headset, Basic Imaging, SIM Access, Generic Access, and Adva nced Audio Distribution. To en sure interoperability between other devic es supporting Bl uetooth technology, use Nokia approved enhanceme nts for this model. Check with the manufacturer s of other devices to determine their compatibilit y with this device. There may be restrictions on using Bluetooth technology in some locations. Check with your local a uthorities or s ervice pr ovider. Features using Bluetooth technology, or allowing such fea tures to run in the background while using other features, increase the demand on battery power and reduce the battery life. Blue tooth c onnectio n setti ngs Select Men u > Settings > Conn ectivity > Blue tooth . When you activate Bluetooth technology for the first t ime, you are asked to give a name to y our pho ne. Bluetooth âÂÂto switch Bluetooth on or off. My phone's visibility > Show n to all âÂÂto allow your phone to be found by other Bluetooth devices at a ll times. T o a llow your phone to be found for a defined tim e period, select D efine period . For se curity re a sons i t is advisable t o use the Hidden setting whenever possible.
85 My phone's name âÂÂto define a name for you r phone. Remote SIM mode > On âÂÂt o enable the usage of the SIM card of the phone by another device ( for ex a mple, a car kit) by Bluetooth technology (SIM acces s profile) When the wireless device is in the remote SIM mode, you can on ly use a compatible connected en hancement , such as a car kit, to make or rece ive calls. Your wirele ss device will not m ake any calls , except to t he emergenc y number s programm ed into your dev ice, whi le in this mo de. To make calls from your devic e, you m ust first leave th e remote SIM m ode. If the devic e has been locked, enter the lock code t o unloc k it fir s t. Send d ata There can be on ly one a ctive Bluetooth conn ection at a t ime. 1. Open an application where the item you wish to send is save d. 2. Scroll to the item you want to se nd , and select Opti on s > Send > Vi a Bluetooth . 3. The phon e starts t o search for devices wit hin range . Paired devices are s how n wit h . When searching for device s, som e devices may show only the un ique device addresses. T o f ind ou t t he u nique address of your phone, enter t he code *#2820 # in th e standby mode. If you have searched for device s earlier, a list of t h e device s that were found previously is shown first. To start a ne w search, select More devices . I f yo u switch off t he phone , the list of devices is cleared, a nd the de vice search n eed s to be sta rt ed again before sending data. 4. Select the device w ith which you want to connect. 5. Pair the de vice s ⢠If the other de vice requires pairing before da ta can be transmitted, a ton e sounds and you are asked to enter a pa sscode. ⢠Create your own pa sscode ( 1â 16 digits ) and agre e with t he ow ne r of t he other device to use the same code. You do not have to memorize the passcode. ⢠After pairing, t h e device is sa ved to the P aired devices view. 6. W hen the connec tion has b een suc cessfu lly es tablis hed, t he note Se ndin g data is displayed. Data received u sin g Bluetooth connection can be found in Inbox in Messaging .
86 Paired de v ice s view Paired devices ar e indicated by in the search re su lt list . In the Bluetooth main view, scroll right t o open a list of paired d evices. Do no t accep t Bluet ooth co nnection s from sources yo u do not trust . To pair w it h a device, se lect Opt ions > New paired device . Select the device with which to pair. Ex cha nge passcode s. To cancel pa iring, scroll to the device whose pairing you want to cancel, an d pres s the clear key. If you want t o cancel all pairings, select Opti ons > Dele te a ll . To set a de vice to be authorized, scroll to t he devic e , and sele ct Opti o ns > Set as authorised . Connections between your phone and the authorized device can be made without your know ledge. No se pa rate acceptance or authorization is need ed. Use this sta tus on ly for your ow n devic es to wh ich ot hers do not hav e access, for exam ple, you r PC or devices that belong to som eone you tr ust. is added next to a ut horized devices in t he P aired de vices vie w . If you select Set as unauthorised , each connection request from t he device mu st be accepted separately. Re ceiv e dat a Whe n you rec eive d ata u sing Bl uetoo th tech nology, a tone sounds , and yo u ar e asked if you want to accept the message. If you accept, the item is placed in Inbox in M essaging . Disc onnect Bl uetooth conne ctio n A Bluetooth connection is disconnected automatically a ft er sending or re ce iving data. â Connection manager In the connection manager, you can ident ify t he status of multiple da ta connections, view details on the amount of data sent a nd rec e ived, and end unus ed connec tions . Select Men u > Settings > Conn ectivity > Conn. mgr . . Not e: The actual invoice for calls and servi ces from your service provide r may vary, depending on n etwork features, rounding off for billing, taxes, and so forth. To view connection details, scroll to a conn ection, and select Op tio ns > D etails .
87 To end a connection, scroll to the connection, and select Optio ns > D is conne ct . T o end all connections, select Op tio ns > Disco nnect al l . â Push to talk Push to talk (PTT) (network service) is a real-time voice over IP service (network service) available over a GSM/GPRS network. PTT provides dire ct voice communication connected wit h a single keypress. Before you ca n u se t he PTT s ervice, you must define t he PTT a ccess poin t and PT T setti ngs. In PTT communication, one person talks while the others listen. Speakers take turns res po nding to each other. Only one group m em ber can t alk at a time. The len gth of ti me of each turn i s lim ite d. Phone calls always t ake priority over PTT calls. Besides the packet data counters, the phon e registers only one-to-one calls in the recent calls lists in Lo g . The pa rticipants should confirm the r e ception of any communications where appropriate as there is no other confirmation of w he ther the recip ients hav e hea rd the ca ll. To check availability and cost s, and to s ubscr ibe to t he service, cont a ct your service provider. Note that roa m ing services may be more limited than home netw ork se rvices. Many of the services available for traditional voice cal ls (for example, ca ll mailbox) are not available for PTT commu nications. Define a PTT access point Many service providers re qu ire you to use an internet acces s point for your defau lt access point . Ot her se rvice provide rs allow you to use a W AP access poin t . Settings fo r PTT For PTT s ervice settings, contact your service provider. To view and ch a nge PTT settings, s ele ct Menu > Settings > Connectivity > PTT > Opti o ns > Settings > User settings or Conne ction se tti ngs .
88 User sett in gs Accepted list calls âÂÂTo see a not ifica tion of incom ing calls, se lect Not ify . To a ns w er PTT calls autom atically, select Auto-accept . If you do not want to rece ive PTT calls, select Not allow ed . PTT call alert ton e âÂÂSe lect the t one for incom ing PT T calls. If you want the incoming call alert setting for PTT to follow your profile se ttings, select Set by profile . For example, if your profile is sile nt, PTT is set to do not disturb (DND) and, except for ca llback r equ ests, you a re not a va ilable to others us i ng PTT. Callback request tone âÂÂSe lect a tone for call bac k r eques ts. Application start-up âÂÂTo start PTT automatically, select Alwa ys a uto ma ti c . To sta rt PTT automatically only while in your home network, select Auto. i n home ne tw . . Defaul t nicknam e âÂÂEnter your nic kname s hown to other u sers. Yo ur se rvice provider may have disa bled the e diting of this option . Show my PTT address âÂÂS elec t Never if you want to hide your PTT address fr om others. Show my login status â Select whet her your s tatu s is sh own to o thers . Connect ion sett ings Contact your PTT service provider for the con ne ction se t tings. Log in to PTT Select Men u > Settings > Conn ectivity > PTT . P TT aut om atica l ly l ogs in to th e service when started. When log in is su ccessful, PTT automatically conn ect s to chann els that we re active when the application was last closed. I f the connec tion is lost , t h e device automatically tries to log back in until you e xit PTT. indicates a PTT connection. indicates th a t PTT is se t to do not disturb (DND). Exit PTT Select Men u > Settings > Conn ectivity > PTT > Opt io ns > Ex it . Log out from PTT after exiting application? is displayed. Select Ye s to log out and close the service. If you w a nt to ke ep the a pplication active in the background, select No .
89 Make a one-to-on e call Warning: Do not hold the device nea r you r ear when the loud speaker is in use, because t he v olume may be extremely l oud. 1. S elect Menu > Se ttings > C o nne c tivi ty > PT T > Op tio ns > Contacts , scroll t o the contact you w a nt to t a lk to, a nd press th e call key. 2. W hen th e con necti on h a s been es tab lished, to tal k to the ot her p artici pant , press and hold the call ke y while you ta lk. 3. To end the PTT call, selec t Disc onne ct , or if there are several PTT calls, select Op tion s > Disco nn ect . Ans wer a PT T call If Acce pt ed list calls i s s et to No tif y in Use r settin gs , a shor t tone no tifies you of an incoming call. To accept the call, select Accept . To sil en ce th e ton e, se le ct Sil en c e . To r ejec t th e call , pr ess the end key. Make a P T T gr oup call To call a group, select Opti ons > Contacts , sel ect Opti o ns > Talk to m any , m a rk the contacts you want to call, and press the call key. Ca llba ck re que st s Se n d a ca ll b a ck re q ue s t If you make a one -to-one c all a nd do not get a res p on se, you c an s end a req uest for th e person to ca ll you back. To sen d a c all back r eque st f ro m Contacts , scroll to a conta ct, and select Op tion s > Send callback request . Respon d to a cal lback requ est When someone sen ds you a callback request, 1 n ew callback request is displayed in the standby mode . Se lect Sho w to open Callback inbox . Scro ll to a co ntact , and press t he call key. Cha nnels Whe n you are c onnecte d to a chan nel, all members j oine d to the c hannel hear you t a l k i n g . U p t o f i v e c h a n n e l s c a n b e a c t i v e a t t h e s a m e t i m e . W h e n m o r e t h a n o n e channel is active, select Swap to cha nge th e ch annel y ou want t o tal k to.
90 Cha nnels a re r egist ered wi th a U RL ad dress . One user re giste rs t he cha nnel U R L i n the network by joining t he channel the first tim e . Crea te y our o wn chann el 1. S elect Op tio ns > PTT chann els . 2. S elect Op tio ns > N ew ch annel > Cr ea te new . 3. Ent er a Chan nel name . 4. S elect a Channel privacy level. 5. E nter yo ur own nickname in Nickname . 6. If you w a nt to add a t humbnail image to the group, select Thumbn ail an d an image. 7. S elect Done . When you have created a channel, you are a ske d if you w a nt to send channel i n vitati on s. Cha nn el invit ations are text me ssages. Join a p reconfigure d channel A preconfi gu red channel is a talk group that is set up by your service provide r. Only preconfigured users a re allowed to join and u se the channel. 1. S elect Op tio ns > PTT chann els . 2. S elect Op tio ns > N ew ch annel > Add existing . 3. E nter t he Cha nnel name , Channel address , and Nickname . You can also add a Thumbnail . 4. S elect Done . Respon d to a cha nnel inv itation To save a received channel invitation, select Opti ons > Save ch annel . The ch a n nel is a dded to y our PTT c ontac ts, c hannel s view . PTT se ssion s PTT sessions are displayed as call bubbles in the PTT display, giving inform ation about the st atus of the PTT sessions : Wai t â shown when you pre s s and h old t he call ke y and some body e lse is st ill speaking i n the PTT session Ta lk â shown when you press a nd hold the call key and get t h e perm ission to speak To switch t he loudspeak e r on or off , select Op tion s > A ctivate loudspeaker or Deactivate loudspeaker .
91 To discon ne ct t he selected PTT session, sele ct Opt ions > Di sco nne ct . â Remote synchronization Sync enables you t o synchronize your calendar, contacts, or n otes with various calendar an d address book a pplications on a compa tible computer or on the internet. The synchronization application uses SyncML technology for synchronizat ion. Select Men u > Settings > Conn ectivity > Sync . Create a new synchronization profile 1. If n o prof i les have bee n de fi n ed, the ph one asks you if you want to cre a te a new profile. Select Ye s . To create a new pr ofile in a ddi tion to exist ing on es, select Opti ons > Ne w sync profile . Choose whet he r you w a nt to use the default setting va l ues or copy the values from an e xisting profile to be us ed a s t he basis f or the new profile. 2. De fine th e A pplications t o be synchronized. Select an application, and edit the synchronization settings: In cl ud e i n sy nc â to enable or disa ble the synch ron ization Remote database âÂÂthe name of the used remote dat a ba se Synchronisation type âÂÂSel ect Bot h way s for synchronization of th e da t a on your phone and the r em ote database, To phone only for the sync hroniz ation of the data on your phon e only, or To se r v er on ly f o r the s ync h ro ni zat i on o f th e data on the rem ot e database on ly. 3. De fine th e C on nec tion se tt ings : Server version , Se rver ID , D ata be arer , Host address , Po r t , User nam e , and Pas sw o r d âÂÂContact your service provider or system administrator for the correct settings. Access point âÂÂOnly visible if In ternet is selected as D ata be arer . Se l ect an acc ess po i nt you want to us e for the da ta conn ecti on. Allow sync requests > Ye s âÂÂt o allow that the se rver starts the synchronization Accept all sync requests > No â to require a confirmation be fore the s erver sta r ts th e sy n chr on iza ti on
92 Netw ork auth enti catio n âÂÂOnly visi b le if Interne t is se lected as D at a bearer . To use HTTPS authentication, select Ye s , and ent e r user name and pa ssword in Netw ork user name and Network password . Sync hronize data In the main view, scroll to a pr ofile , and select Opt ion s > Synchronise . The status of the synchronization is shown. After synchronization is complete, select Opt ions > View log t o ope n a log file showing the synchronization s t atus ( Com pl et e or Incomple te ) and ho w many calendar or contac t entries h a ve been added, updat ed, de le ted, or disca rde d (not synchronized) in th e ph one or on the se rver. â Inf rared Use infrare d to connect two devices and tr a nsfer da ta between t h em. With infrared, you can transfer data such as bu siness cards, calenda r n otes, and m edia files with a compatible device. Do not p oint t he infrar ed (IR) bea m at anyon e's eye or a llow it to interfere wi th other IR devices. This device is a Class 1 laser product. Send and receive dat a 1. Ensure th a t t h e infrared por ts of the devices face each other. The positioning of the devices is more importa nt th an angle or dis tance . 2. To turn on infrared on your device, select Menu > Settin gs > Con nect iv ity > Inf rared . T urn on infrared on the ot h er device. Wa it a f e w seconds until a n infrared connection is established. 3. To send, loca te th e desired file in an a pplication or the file m anager, a nd select Op tion s > Sen d > Via infrar ed . If data tr a nsfer is not started soon aft er the activat ion of the infrared port , the connection is ca ncelled and m ust be start e d again. All items received through infrared are placed in the Inbox folder in Messaging . â Modem Before you ca n u se you r phon e as a m odem: ⢠Acqui re the appropr iate da ta commun icatio ns softw are for your comp uter.
93 ⢠Subscribe t o t he appropria t e ne t work se rvices from your service provider or internet se rvice provider. ⢠Install the appropriat e drivers on your computer. Select Men u > Settings > Conn ectivity > Mode m . To connect the phone to a compatible computer using infr a red, press the scroll key. Make sure the infr a red port s of the phone and com put er are directly faci ng each other wi th no obstac les bet ween them. To connect your phon e to a computer using Bluetooth w ireless technology, initiate the connection fr o m the computer. To a ctivate Bluetooth in you r ph one, select Menu > Connectivity > Bluetooth > Bluetooth > On . If you u se a cable to connect your phon e t o a computer, initiate th e conn e ction fr om the co mput er. No te that you m ay no t be a ble to use s ome of th e other commu nica tion featu res when th e phone is used a s a mode m. â USB data cable You can use t he USB data ca ble to t ransfer dat a between the ph on e and a compatible PC. You can also us e the USB data cable wi t h Nokia PC Suite. Select Men u > Settings > Conn ectivity > USB . To s ele ct th e de fault U SB connection mode, select USB m ode and the des i red mode. To h a ve the device ask the purpose of the connection each time t he cable is conn ected, se lect As k o n connection > Ye s . To us e the phone with Nok i a P C Su ite, s elect PC Suite . To synchroniz e media files, such as music, w ith a compatible version of Windows Media Pla yer, s e lect Media player . To access files on t h e inserted memory card as a r em ovable drive, select Dat a tr ans fer . Aft er t ra nsf er rin g da ta, en sur e th at it is s afe to u npl ug the US B da ta cab le fr om the PC . â Dat a trans fer With data tran sfer you can copy or s ynchron ize cont acts , ca l e ndar e ntri es, an d possibly other data, such as video clips and im ages, from a compatible phon e using a Bluetooth or in frared connection. When both Bluetooth and inf ra red are available on both devices, it i s preferable to us e Blu etooth.
94 Depending on the ot h er phone, syn chr onization may not be possible and data can be copied only once . To transfe r or synchronize data, do the follow ing: 1. When using infrare d, place the devices so that the infrared ports face each other, and activate infrared on both devices. Select Menu > Se ttings > C o nn ec tivi ty > Tra nsfer . If you h ave not used Transfer be fore, information about the application is displayed. Selec t Cont in ue to st art tran sfer rin g data . If y ou have used Transfer , select Transfer data . 2. Sele ct whether t o use Bluet ooth or infra red for tran sferring the data. When using Bluetooth, the phones ne e d to be pa ired in or de r to t ransfer data. Depending on the type of t he other phone, an application may be sent and installed on the other phon e to enable the da ta transfer. Follow th e instructions. 3. Select what c ont ent you w a nt to be transferred to your phon e. 4. Content is transferr ed t o your phone. The transfe r t ime depends on the amount of data. You can stop the transfer and continue later. 16. Data manag er â Application manager You can install two t ypes of applications and software t o you r phone: J2ME TM applications based on Java TM tec hnology with the e xtension .jad or .jar. Per sonalJava TM applications cannot be installed on your phon e. Other a pplications a nd soft ware suitable for the Symbi an operating system. The installation files have the .sis extension. Only install software specifically designed for y o ur phone. Installation files ma y be t ransferred to your ph one from a compat ible computer, downloaded during brows ing, or sen t to you in a multim edia message , as an e-mail attachment or by using Bluetooth. You can use Nokia Application In st aller in Nokia PC Suite to install an application to you r phon e or a memory card. To open App. manager , sel e ct Menu > Se ttings > Data mgr . > App. mgr . .
95 Install an application Import a nt: O nly in stall and use applications and other software from trusted sources, such as applicat ions that are Symbian Signed or have passed the Java Ve rif ie d TM testing. Before installation, in App. manager , scroll to the installation file, and select Opti o ns > View details to view information such as the a pplica tion type, version number, and the su pplier or m a nufacturer of t he application. The .jar file is required for installing Java applications. If it is missing, the phone may ask you t o download it. To install an application or software package: 1. Scroll to an installation file. A pplications on the memory card are indicated wit h . 2. S elect Op tio ns > Inst a ll . Alternatively, search the phone memory or t he m e mory car d, select the application, a nd press the s croll ke y to start the installation. During the installation, the phon e shows information a bout the progress of t he installation. If you are installing an application without a digital signature or certification, the phone displays a warning. Continue installation only if you are sure of t he origins and contents of the a pplication. To view extra information about the application, scroll to it, and select Op tion s > Go to web address . This option may not be available with all applications. To see w hat softw a re packages have been installed or removed a nd when , se lect Opti o ns > Vie w log . Remov e an application In th e App. manager main view, scroll to the soft ware package, and select Opti o ns > Rem ove . Appl ication mana ger set tings In App. manager , s el ec t Opt io ns > Se ttings and from the follow i ng settings: Software installation âÂÂto select if y o u want to allow installation of all Symbian applications ( All ) or on ly signed applications ( Signed only ) Online certificate check âÂÂt o select if you wa nt App. manager t o ch eck the on line certificates for an application before installing it
96 Default web address âÂÂdefault address used when checking online certificates Java applications may attem pt to, f or exa mple, e stablish a da t a connection or send a messa g e. To edit the permissions of an installed Java application a nd define which access point the application will use, in the main view, scroll to t he application, and select Op tio ns > Open . â File manager In the f ile manager, you can brows e, open, and manage f iles and folders in the phone memory or on the memory card. To see a list of the folders in the ph one memory, select Menu > Se ttings > Data mgr . > File mgr . . Scroll righ t to see the folders on the m em ory car d. Vie w memory c onsumpt ion Scroll either right or left to view the phone m emory or th e memory card c ontents. To check memory consum ption of t he cu rrent memory, select Op tio ns > Mem o ry details . The phone c a lculates the a pproximate a m ount of fre e me m ory for st oring data and installing new applications. In the m em ory vie ws, you ca n view th e memory consumption of the different applications or file types. If t he phone memory is getting low, remove some files, or move th em to t he me m or y ca rd. â Device manager You may receive serv e r profiles and configuration settings f rom your se rvice provider or company information mana gement department. To open t he device manager, select Me nu > Settings > Data m gr. > D evice mgr . . I f you have n o se rver pr ofiles defined, the phone as ks w het h er you w a nt to def ine one. To connect to a server and r ece ive configuration settings for you r ph one, scroll t o the serve r profile, and selec t Opti o ns > Start configuration . To edit a server profile, select Op tio ns > E dit profile and from th e following setti ngs: Allow configuration âÂÂTo receive configuration settings from t he server, select Yes . Auto-accept all requests âÂÂIf you w a nt th e phone t o ask for confirmati on before accepting a configuration from the se rve r, select No .
97 Contact your se rvice provider, or company inform a tion management de pa rtment for th e other ser ver profile se ttings. â Me mo ry c ard Keep all memory cards out of the re a ch of small children. Select Men u > Settings > Data mgr . > Me mory . For details on inserting a memory card into the phone, see â Get started ,â p. 10. Y ou can use it to st ore your multimedia files such a s video clips, musi c t racks, and sound files, ph otos, and messaging data, and t o back u p in for m ation from phone memo ry. Form at the m emory c ard When a me mory card is format ted, all data on the card is perm ane nt ly l ost. Some memory cards a re su pplied preformatted and others requ ire for matting. 1. S elect Op tio ns > Form at m emory card . 2. S elect Ye s to co nf irm . 3. When formatting is complete , en ter a na me for the me mory card. Back up a nd restore information To back up information from phone memory to the memory card, select Opt ions > Back up phone memory . To re st or e information from the memory card to the phone memory, select Opti o ns > Restore from card . You can only ba ck up t he phone m emory and re st ore it to the same phone. Loc k the me mor y car d To set a pa ssword to help preve n t unauthorized u se, select Optio ns > Set password . Y ou are asked to enter and confirm your pass word. Th e password can be up to eig ht ch aract ers l ong . Unl ock a memo ry ca rd If you i nsert anot her password-prot ected memory card into your phone, you are prompted to e nter the password of t he card. To unlock t he card, select Op tio ns > Unlock memory card .
98 Ch eck me mory con sumpti on To check the me mory consumption and t h e amount of memory ava ila ble on you r memo ry c ard, se l ec t Opti ons > Memo ry de t ails . â Activa tion keys Digita l rights managem ent Content owners may use different type s of digital rights management (DRM) technologies to protect their intellectual prope rty, including copyrights. This device uses various types of DRM softw are to acc ess DRM-pro tected c ontent. With th is device you can ac cess con tent pr otecte d wit h WMDRM 10, O MA D RM 2.0 and OM A DRM 1 .0. If certa in DRM soft ware fails to protect the con tent, content owne rs may ask tha t such DRM softw are's ability to acce ss new DRM-protected content be revoked. Revocation may also prevent renew al of such DRM-pro tected co ntent already in your device . Revocation of such DRM software d oes not affect the use of content protecte d with other types of DRM or the use of non-DRM- protected content. Digital rights managem ent (DRM) prote cted content comes w ith an associated ac tivation key that define s your rights to use the con tent. If your device has OM A DRM protecte d content , to back up both the activ ation keys a nd the content, use the backup feature of Nokia PC Suite. Other transf er methods may not transfer the activation k eys which need to be res tored with the content for you to be able to continue the use of OMA DR M protected content afte r the device memory is formatted. Y ou may also need to res tore the activation keys in case the files on you r device get corrupted. If your device has WMD RM protected conte nt, both the activation keys and the content will be lost if the device mem ory is formatted. You m ay also lose the activa tion keys and the content in case the files on your devic e get corrupted. Losing the activation keys or the content may limit your ability to use th e same cont ent on your device aga in. For more information, conta ct your service provider. Some activation key s may be connected to a specific SIM card, and the protected con tent can be accessed only if the SIM card is inse rted in the device. Select Men u > Settings > Data mgr . > Actv . keys to v iew th e dig i tal r igh ts activation key s saved in your phone. To view valid keys ( ) that are con n ected to one or m ore media files, select Valid keys . Group keys, which contain several ke ys, are indica t ed with . T o view the keys contain e d in th e group key, select the group key. To view invalid ke ys ( ) with which t h e time period for using the file is e xce eded, select In valid keys . To buy more usage time or extend the u sage period for a m edia file, scroll to a key, and select Optio ns > G et act ivation key . I t may not be possible
99 to update a ct ivation keys if web service message reception is disabled. See âÂÂService message s et tings, â p. 39. To view activat ion ke ys th a t are n ot in use, sele ct Not i n u se . U nused a ct ivation keys have no m edia files c onne cted t o the m . To view de tailed informat ion such as the validity status a nd the abil ity to send the file, scroll to an activation ke y, and select it . 17. Batte ry inf ormatio n â Charging and dis c harging Your device is powered by a rechargeable battery. The battery can be charged and discharged hundreds of times, but it will eventual ly wear out. When the talk and standby times are noticea bly shorter tha n normal, replace the batte ry. Use only Nokia a pproved batteries, and recharge your batter y only with Nokia approved chargers designated for this device. The full performance of a new batter y is achieved only after two or thr ee complete charge and disch arge cycles. If a replacement ba ttery is being used for the first time or if the bat tery has not been used for a prolonged period, it may be necessary to connect th e charger, then disconnect and reconnect it to begin chargin g the battery. Unplug the cha rger from the electrical plug an d the device when not in use. Do not le ave a fully charged battery con nected to a charger, since overcharging m ay shorten its lifetime. If left unused, a ful ly charged battery will lose its charge over time. If the battery is com pletely disch arged, it may take several minute s before the char ging indicator appears on the display or before a ny calls can be made. Use the battery only for its inte nded purpose. Never use any charger or batter y that is damaged. Do not short-circ uit the battery. Acc idental short-circ uiting can occur whe n a metallic object such as a coin, clip, or pen causes direct conn ection of the positive ( ) and negative (âÂÂ) terminals of the batte ry. (These look l ike metal str ips on the ba ttery.) This m ight happen, for example, when you ca rry a spare battery in your pocket or purse. Short- circuit ing the termina ls may da mage the bat tery or t he connect ing object. Leaving the battery in hot or cold places , such as in a closed car in summer or winter condition s, will reduc e the capacity a nd lifetime of the battery. Always tr y to keep the battery betw een 15ðC and 25ðC (59ðF an d 77ðF). A device with a hot or cold ba ttery may not
100 work temporarily, even wh en the battery is fully char ged. Battery performance is particularly limited in temp eratures well below freezin g. Do not dispose of batteries in a fire as they may explode. Batteries may also explode if damaged. Dispose of batteries according to loca l regulations. Please recycle when possible. Do not dispose as household waste. Do not dismantle or shred cells or batteries. In the event of a battery leak, do not allow the liquid to come in con tact with the skin or eyes. In th e event of such a leak, flush y our skin or eyes i mmediate ly with wa ter, o r seek med ical hel p. â Nokia batter y authentication guideline s Always u se original Nokia batter ies for your safe ty. To check tha t you are gettin g an original Nokia battery, purchase it from an authorized Nokia dealer, look for the Nokia Original Enhancements logo on the pa ckaging, and inspect the hologram label usin g t he following step s: Successfu l completion of the four ste ps is not a total assurance of the authenticity of th e battery. If you h ave an y reason to believe that you r battery is not an authe ntic, original Nokia battery, you should refrain from using it, and take it to the nearest aut horized Nokia service point or dealer for assis tance. Your authorized Nokia se rvice point or dealer will inspect the batte ry for authen ticity. If authentic ity cannot be v erified, retur n the battery to the place of purchase. Auth entic ate hol ogram 1. When looking at the hologram on the label, you should see the Nokia connecting hands symbol from one a ngle and the Nokia Original Enhanceme nts logo when looking from another angle. 2. When you angle the hologram left, right, down, and up, you should see 1, 2, 3, and 4 dots on each side respectively.
101 3. Scratch the side of the label to reveal a 20-d igit code, for exampl e, 12345 678919 876543 210. Tur n the batte ry so that the numb ers are faci ng upwar ds. The 20- digit code rea ds sta rtin g from the number at th e top row followed by the bottom row. 4. Confirm that the 20- digit code is valid by followin g the instruc tions at www.nokia .com/batteryche ck. To cr eate a t ext message , enter the 20-dig it code, for example , 1234 567891 987654 3210, and s end to 44 7786 200276 . National and interna tional operator charges will apply. You shou ld receive a messa ge indica ting whe ther the cod e can be authentica ted. What if your b a t tery is no t authenti c? If you c annot confirm t hat your Nokia battery with the hologr am on th e label is an authentic Nokia battery , please do not use the batte ry. Take it to the nearest auth orized Nokia s ervice point or dealer for assistance. The use of a battery that is not approved by the manufacturer may be dangerous and may result in poor performance and damage to your devic e and its enhancem ents. It m ay also in validate an y approval or warranty a pplying to the device. To find out more abo ut original Nokia batte ries, visit www.n okia.com/batt ery. 18. Enhan cement s Pra ctical rule s about a cce ssories and e nhancemen ts ⢠K ee p all accessories and enhanc ements out of the reach of small children. ⢠When you disconnect the power cord of any accessory or enhancement, grasp and pull the plug, no t the cord. ⢠Check regularly t hat enhancements insta lled in a vehi c le are mounted and are operating properly. ⢠In s tallation of any complex car enhancements must be made by qualifie d pe rsonnel only. Car e and main te nan ce Your device is a product of superior design and craftsmanship and should be treated with care. The following suggestions will help you protect you r warranty cover age.
102 ⢠K e ep the device dry. Precipita tion, humidity, and a ll types of liquids or moistu re can conta in minerals that will c orrode electr onic circu its. If your device does get wet, remove the battery, and allow the device to dry completely before repla cing it. ⢠Do not use or store the device in dusty, dirty areas. Its moving parts and electronic components can be dam aged. ⢠Do not store th e devic e in hot areas. High t emperatures can sh orten the life of electron ic devices, damage batteries , and warp or melt certain plastics. ⢠Do not store the de v ice in cold areas. When the device returns to its normal te m perature, moisture can form in side the device and damage electronic circuit boa rds. ⢠Do not attem pt to open the device other than as instructed in th is guide. ⢠Do n ot drop , knock, or sh ake the de vice. Ro ugh handlin g ca n break inte rnal circ uit bo ards an d fin e me chan ics. ⢠Do not use h a rs h chemi cals, c leaning solvent s, or strong d eterg ents to c lean the device. ⢠Do not paint th e device. Paint can clog the moving parts and prevent proper operatio n. ⢠Use a soft, clean , dry clo th to clean a ny lenses, su ch as cam era, proximity s enso r, and lig ht senso r lens es. ⢠Use only the supplied or a n approved replacement a ntenna. Unauthorized ante nnas, modifications, or attac hments could damage the device and may violate regulations governing radio devices. ⢠Use chargers indoors. ⢠A lways create a backup of data you w ant to kee p, such as co ntacts an d calendar notes. ⢠To reset the de vice from time to time f or optimum performance, power off the device and remove th e battery. These su ggestion s apply equ ally to your device, battery, ch arger, o r any enhanc ement . If any device is not w orking properly, take it to th e nearest authorize d service facility for service. Di sposa l The crossed-out wheeled-bin symbol on your produc t, literature, or packaging reminds you that in the European U nion all electrical and electronic products, batteries, and accum ulators must be taken to sepa rate collection at the en d of their working life. Do not dispose of these products as unsorted municipal waste. Return the products to c ollection to prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncontr olled waste disposal and to promote the sustainable reuse of material reso urces. Collection inform ation is available from the product retailer, local waste au thorities, national producer responsibilit y organizations, or your local N okia represent ative. For m ore inf ormation, se e product Ec o-Declaratio n or country-spe cific infor mation at ww w.nokia.co m.
103 Add itio nal sa fety infor mation â Smal l children You r device a nd its en hancemen ts may c ontai n small p arts. K eep them o ut of t he reach o f small children. â O perat ing en viro nment This device meet s RF ex posure gu idelines wh en used either in t he nor ma l use positio n against the ear or whe n positioned at lea st 2.2 cen timeters (7/8 in ches) away f rom the body. When a carry ca s e, belt clip, or holder is used for body -worn operation, it s ho uld not co ntain metal and should position the device th e above-stated distance from your body .To transmit data files or messages, this device requir es a quality connection to the network. In some cases, transmission of data files or messages may be delayed until such a conn ection is available. Ensur e the above separation distance instructions are followed u ntil the tran smissi on i s compl eted . Parts of the device are magnetic. Metallic m aterials may be attracte d to the device. Do not place credit cards or other magnetic storage m edia near the device, because information sto r ed on them may be erased. â Medic al de vice s Operation of any radio transmitti ng equipment, including wireless phones, may inter fere with the functionality of inadequately pr otected medical devices. Consult a physician or the manufact urer of the medical device to determine if they a re adequately shielde d from external RF energy or if you have any questions. Switch off your device in health care facilities when any r egulations posted in these are as instruct you to do so. Hospit als or health care facilit ies may be using equipmen t that could be sensitive to external RF energy. Impl anted med ical de vices Manufacturers of medica l devices recommend that a minimum separatio n of 15.3 centim eters (6 inches) should be maintained betwee n a wireless device and a n implanted medica l device, such as a pace maker or implanted ca rdioverter defibrillat or, to avoid potential interference with the medica l device. Per s ons who have such devices should: ⢠Always keep the wi reless device mo re than 15.3 centimeter s (6 inches) from the medi cal device w hen the wir eless device is turned o n. ⢠Not ca rry the wir eless device in a breast pocke t. ⢠Hold th e wireless devic e to the e ar opposite the m edical device to m inimize the potential fo r in te rfer enc e. ⢠Turn the wireles s device off immed iately if there is a ny reason to s uspect th a t interfere nce is taking place.
104 ⢠Read and follow the directions from the manufacture r of their implanted medical device. If you have any questions about using y our wireless device with an implant ed medical de vic e, co ns ult yo ur hea l th c are pr ov id er. Hear ing aids Some digital wireless devices may interfere with som e hearing aids. If interference occurs, cons ult yo ur se rvice p rovide r. â Vehicles RF signals may affect im properly installed or ina dequately shiel ded electronic systems in motor vehicl es such a s electro nic fuel inject ion system s, elec tronic a ntiski d (antiloc k) brak ing syst ems, ele ctron ic s peed con tr ol syst ems, an d air bag s yste ms. Fo r mor e informa tion, check wi th the manu facturer, or its representa tive, of you r vehicle or any equipment that has been added. Only qualified personn el should service the devic e or install the device in a vehicle. Faulty installation or service may be dangerous and may invalidate any warranty that may apply to the devic e. Check regu larly that all wir eless device equipment in yo ur vehicle is mounted and operating pr operly. Do not store or carry flammable liquids, ga ses, or explosive ma terials in the sa me compar tment a s the device, its pa rts, or e nhancem ents. For ve hicles eq uipped with an air bag, remember that a ir bags inflate with great force. Do not place objects, inclu ding ins talled or portabl e wireles s equipm ent in t he area over the air ba g or i n the air bag deployment are a. If in-vehicle wireless equ ipment is improperly ins talled and the air bag inflates, serious injury cou ld result. Using your device while fl ying in aircr aft is prohibited. Switch off you r device b efore boarding an aircraft. The use of wireless teledevices in an aircraft may be dang erous to the operation of the aircraft, disrupt the wireless telephone n etwork, and may be illegal. â Pot entially e xplosive e nvir onments Switch off your device when in a ny area with a pote ntially explosi ve atmosph ere, and ob ey all signs and instruction s. Potentially explosive at mospheres include areas where you would normally be advised to turn off your vehicle engine. Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily in jury or even death. Switch off the device at refueling points such as near gas pumps at service stations. Observe restrictions on the use of radio equipment in fuel depots, storage, and distribution areas; chemica l plants; or wh ere blasting operations are in progress. Areas with a potentially explosive atmosphe re are often, but not always , clearly marked. Th ey includ e below d eck on boat s, chemica l transfer or storage facilities, veh icles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as propane or butane), and areas where the air contains chemicals or particles such as grain, dus t, or metal powders.
105 â Emerge ncy call s Import a nt: W ire less phones, including this device, operate using radio signals, wireless networks, landline network s, and user -programmed functions. Because of this, conn ections in all cond itions cannot be guarantee d. You should never rely sole ly on any wireless device for essential comm unications like medica l emergenc ies. To ma ke an emergen cy call : 1. If the device is not on, switch it on. Check for adequate signal strength. Some networks m ay require that a valid SIM card is properly inserted in the device. 2. Pre s s the end key as many t im es as ne eded to cl ear the d isplay an d ready the dev ice for calls. 3. Ente r the of ficial emergency number for yo ur pre s en t locati on. Em ergency numbers v ary by location. 4. P ress th e call key. If c ert ai n fe atu res are in us e, yo u m ay f irs t nee d to tur n t hos e fe atu re s of f be fo re y ou can make an e mergency c all. If the device is in the offline prof ile mode, you may need to ch ange the profile to activate the phone fun ction before you can make an emergency call. Consult this guide or your service provider for more information. When ma king an eme rgency ca ll, give all the ne cessary inf ormation as accurate ly as possible. Your wireless device may be the only means of com munication at the scene of an accident. Do not end the call until given permiss ion to do so. â Cert ification inf ormation (SAR) THIS MOBI LE DEVICE MEETS G UI DELI NES FOR EXPOSURE TO RA DI O WAVES. Your mobile device is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed not to exceed the limits for exposure to radio wave s recommended by inte rnational guidelines. The se guidelines were developed by the independent s cientific organization ICNIRP and include safety margins designed to assure the protection of all persons, regardless of age and health. The exposure guidelines for mob ile devices employ a unit of measuremen t known as the Specific Absorption R ate or SAR. The SAR limit stated in the ICNIRP gu idelines is 2.0 watts/ kilogram (W/kg) averaged over 10 grams of tissue. T es ts for SAR are conduc t ed using standard operating pos itions with the device trans mitting at its highest certified pow er level in all tested fr equency ba nds. The a ctual SAR level of a n operating d evice can be below the maxim um value be cause t he devi c e is design ed to use o nly th e power re quired t o reach the network. That amount changes depending on a number of factors such as how close you are to a network b a se s tation . The high est SAR va lue under the ICNIRP gu idelines for use of the device at th e ear is 1.24 W/ kg.
106 Use of device a ccessories and enha ncement s may r esult i n differen t SAR val ues. SAR v a lu es may vary depending on national reporting an d testing requirements and the network band. Additional SAR information may be provided under product information at www.nokia.com.
107 Inde x NUME RICS 3-D tone s 59 A access codes barring password 9 change 73 lock co de 8 , 13 module PIN 9 PIN 8 , 13 PIN2 8 PUK 9 PUK2 9 signing P IN 9 UPIN 8 UPUK 9 access points 78 activation keys 98 act ive st and by 16 alarm clock. See clock. application ma nager 94 applications 94 B battery charg ing 12 Bluetooth conne c tio n set tings 84 disconnecting 86 paired devices 86 receiving data 86 sending da ta 85 bookmarks 61 browser. See web. C cache 64 calcula tor 68 calendar 66 call re gi ster. Se e log. callback r equests 88 , 89 calls an swer in g 23 barring 77 confer ence c a ll 23 diverting 77 ending 22 interna tional 21 makin g 21 options during a call 24 reje cting 23 reje cting with SMS 24 speed dial 22 , 42 swapping 24 voi ce dia l 22 voice mailbox 22 waiting 24 camer a 52 ca mer a mo d e 15 certifica tes 74 clock 65 conne c tio n mana ger 86 connec tivity 84 conta cts 40 conver ter 68 copyright protection. See activation keys. D data cable 93 data connection indicator s 17 data transfer 93 device ma nager 96 digital r ights manage ment. See activation keys . downloading 63 E editing v ideos 44 e-mail mailbox 34 settings 33 e-mail m essages deleting 35 retr ievi ng 34 en ha nc em e nt s 73 F file m anager 96 Fl ash P layer 57
108 functional modes 15 G gallery 42 transferring videos 45 GPS data 70 H he lp 20 I IM. S ee i nst ant me ssag ing . indicators 17 infrared 92 inst ant me ss agin g conne c tin g 81 conta cts 83 convers ation 82 groups 82 , 83 settings 81 K keyguar d. See keypad lock. keypad lock 20 L landmarks 70 listening to m usic 46 log 28 M media player. See RealPlayer. me mory car d 97 me mory con sumpt ion phone memory 96 me nu 19 message setting s cell broadcast 39 e-mail 38 multimedia settings 37 other sett ings 40 ser vice mess ages 39 text m essages 36 me ssage s au dio 32 cell broadcast 36 lis tening t o 40 multimedia objects 33 organizing 34 outbox 31 , 35 rece iving 33 sen di ng 31 ser vic e c omm ands 36 ser vi ce me ssa ges 34 SIM m essages 36 spe cial message types 33 writin g 31 mobile browser. See web. mobile s earch 60 modem 92 movies , muvees cu stom muve es 54 qu ic k muve es 54 music mode 16 musi c pla yer downloading music 47 mu sic sho p 47 playlist s 47 transf erring music 48 musi c.See musi c pla yer. N networ k 78 notes 67 àone-t ouch dial. See speed d ial. P phone mode 15 phonebook. See contacts. profiles 58 PTT. See push to talk. push t o talk 87 â 91 R RealPlayer 57 re corde r 56 S services. See web. settings con nec tio n 78 data call 79 date 73 enhanc ements 73 packet data 79
109 phone 71 phone language 72 predictive text input 72 secu rity 73 Setting w izard 80 speec h 80 time 73 writing language 72 SIM card using phon e withou t a SIM card 17 song s transf erring 48 speed d i al assigning a number 41 , 71 calling 22 cha nging a num ber 71 dele ting a num ber 71 standby mode 16 sy nchro nizati on 91 T text input 72 copying text 30 deleting te xt 30 predictive 29 themes 58 to-do 67 tran sfer ring mu sic 48 transferring v ideos 45 tutorial 19 U USB. See data cable. V video call 24 , 25 video call mode 16 video view mode 16 videos transf erring 45 Visua l Radio 49 voic e commands 70 voice dialing 22 voice mailbox 71 voic e recorder. See recor der. volum e 20 W web blogs 63 bookmarks 61 browser settings 64 browsing 62 con nec tin g 61 con nect io n se curi ty 61 disconnecting 64 fee ds 63 saving a page 63 settings 60 viewing a saved page 63 writin g text. See t ext in put.